The Not So Short

Introduction to L
A
T
E
X2
ε
Or L
A
T
E
X2
ε
in 157 minutes
by Tobias Oetiker
Hubert Partl, Irene Hyna and Elisabeth Schlegl
Version 5.01, April 06, 2011
ii
Copyright ©1995-2011 Tobias Oetiker and Contributors. All rights reserved.
This document is free; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms
of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation;
either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
This document is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but without any
warranty; without even the implied warranty of merchantability or fittness for a
particular purpose. See the GNU General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with
this document; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave,
Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
Thank you!
Much of the material used in this introduction comes from an Austrian
introduction to L
A
T
E
X 2.09 written in German by:
Hubert Partl <partl@mail.boku.ac.at>
Zentraler Informatikdienst der Universität für Bodenkultur Wien
Irene Hyna <Irene.Hyna@bmwf.ac.at>
Bundesministerium für Wissenschaft und Forschung Wien
Elisabeth Schlegl <noemail>
in Graz
If you are interested in the German document, you can find a version
updated for L
A
T
E
X2
ε
by Jörg Knappen at CTAN://info/lshort/german
iv Thank you!
The following individuals helped with corrections, suggestions and material
to improve this paper. They put in a big effort to help me get this document
into its present shape. I would like to sincerely thank all of them. Naturally,
all the mistakes you’ll find in this book are mine. If you ever find a word
that is spelled correctly, it must have been one of the people below dropping
me a line.
Eric Abrahamsen, Rosemary Bailey, Marc Bevand, Friedemann Brauer,
Barbara Beeton, Salvatore Bonaccorso, Jan Busa, Markus Brühwiler,
Pietro Braione, David Carlisle, José Carlos Santos, Neil Carter, Mike Chapman,
Pierre Chardaire, Christopher Chin, Carl Cerecke, Chris McCormack,
Diego Clavadetscher, Wim van Dam, Benjamin Deschwanden Jan Dittberner,
Michael John Downes, Matthias Dreier, David Dureisseix, Eilinger August, Elliot,
Rockrush Engch, Hans Ehrbar, Daniel Flipo, David Frey, Hans Fugal,
Robert Funnell, Robin Fairbairns, Jörg Fischer, Erik Frisk, Mic Milic Frederickx,
Frank, Kasper B. Graversen, Arlo Griffiths, Alexandre Guimond, Andy Goth,
Cyril Goutte, Greg Gamble, Frank Fischli, Robert Funnell, Morten Høgholm,
Neil Hammond, Rasmus Borup Hansen, Joseph Hilferty, Björn Hvittfeldt,
Martien Hulsen, Werner Icking, Jakob, Eric Jacoboni, Alan Jeffrey, Byron Jones,
David Jones, Nils Kanning, Tobias Krewer, Johannes-Maria Kaltenbach,
Andrzej Kawalec, Sander de Kievit, Alain Kessi, Christian Kern, Tobias Klauser,
Jörg Knappen, Kjetil Kjernsmo, Michael Koundouros, Matt Kraai, Maik Lehradt,
Rémi Letot, Flori Lambrechts, Mike Lee, Axel Liljencrantz, Johan Lundberg,
Alexander Mai, Hendrik Maryns, Martin Maechler, Aleksandar S Milosevic,
Henrik Mitsch, Claus Malten, Kevin Van Maren, Stefan M. Moser, Richard Nagy,
Philipp Nagele, Lenimar Nunes de Andrade, I. J. Vera Marún, Manuel Oetiker,
Urs Oswald, Marcelo Pasin, Lan Thuy Pham, Martin Pfister, Breno Pietracci,
Demerson Andre Polli, Nikos Pothitos, Maksym Polyakov Hubert Partl,
John Refling, Mike Ressler, Brian Ripley, Young U. Ryu, Bernd Rosenlecher,
Kurt Rosenfeld, Chris Rowley, Axel Kielhorn, Risto Saarelma,
Jordi Serra i Solanich, Hanspeter Schmid, Craig Schlenter, Gilles Schintgen,
Baron Schwartz, Christopher Sawtell, Miles Spielberg, Matthieu Stigler,
Geoffrey Swindale, Laszlo Szathmary, András Salamon, Boris Tobotras,
Josef Tkadlec, Scott Veirs, Didier Verna, Matthew Widmann, Fabian Wernli,
Carl-Gustav Werner, David Woodhouse, Chris York, Fritz Zaucker, Rick Zaccone,
and Mikhail Zotov.
Preface
L
A
T
E
X [1] is a typesetting system that is very suitable for producing scientific
and mathematical documents of high typographical quality. It is also suitable
for producing all sorts of other documents, from simple letters to complete
books. L
A
T
E
X uses T
E
X [2] as its formatting engine.
This short introduction describes L
A
T
E
X2
ε
and should be sufficient for
most applications of L
A
T
E
X. Refer to [1, 3] for a complete description of the
L
A
T
E
X system.
This introduction is split into 6 chapters:
Chapter 1 tells you about the basic structure of L
A
T
E
X2
ε
documents. You
will also learn a bit about the history of L
A
T
E
X. After reading this
chapter, you should have a rough understanding how L
A
T
E
X works.
Chapter 2 goes into the details of typesetting your documents. It explains
most of the essential L
A
T
E
X commands and environments. After reading
this chapter, you will be able to write your first documents.
Chapter 3 explains how to typeset formulae with L
A
T
E
X. Many examples
demonstrate how to use one of L
A
T
E
X’s main strengths. At the end
of the chapter are tables listing all mathematical symbols available in
L
A
T
E
X.
Chapter 4 explains indexes, bibliography generation and inclusion of EPS
graphics. It introduces creation of PDF documents with pdfL
A
T
E
X and
presents some handy extension packages.
Chapter 5 shows how to use L
A
T
E
X for creating graphics. Instead of drawing
a picture with some graphics program, saving it to a file and then
including it into L
A
T
E
X, you describe the picture and have L
A
T
E
X draw
it for you.
Chapter 6 contains some potentially dangerous information about how to
alter the standard document layout produced by L
A
T
E
X. It will tell you
how to change things such that the beautiful output of L
A
T
E
X turns
ugly or stunning, depending on your abilities.
vi Preface
It is important to read the chapters in order—the book is not that big, after
all. Be sure to carefully read the examples, because a lot of the information
is in the examples placed throughout the book.
L
A
T
E
X is available for most computers, from the PC and Mac to large UNIX
and VMS systems. On many university computer clusters you will find that
a L
A
T
E
X installation is available, ready to use. Information on how to access
the local L
A
T
E
X installation should be provided in the Local Guide [5]. If you
have problems getting started, ask the person who gave you this booklet.
The scope of this document is not to tell you how to install and set up a
L
A
T
E
X system, but to teach you how to write your documents so that they
can be processed by L
A
T
E
X.
If you need to get hold of any L
A
T
E
X related material, have a look at one of
the Comprehensive T
E
X Archive Network (CTAN) sites. The homepage is
at http://www.ctan.org.
You will find other references to CTAN throughout the book, especially
pointers to software and documents you might want to download. Instead of
writing down complete urls, I just wrote CTAN: followed by whatever location
within the CTAN tree you should go to.
If you want to run L
A
T
E
X on your own computer, take a look at what is
available from CTAN://systems.
If you have ideas for something to be added, removed or altered in this
document, please let me know. I am especially interested in feedback from
L
A
T
E
X novices about which bits of this intro are easy to understand and
which could be explained better.
Tobias Oetiker <tobi@oetiker.ch>
OETIKER+PARTNER AG
Aarweg 15
4600 Olten
Switzerland
The current version of this document is available on
CTAN://info/lshort
Contents
Thank you! iii
Preface v
1 Things You Need to Know 1
1.1 The Name of the Game . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1.1 T
E
X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1.2 L
A
T
E
X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.2 Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.2.1 Author, Book Designer, and Typesetter . . . . . . . . 2
1.2.2 Layout Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.2.3 Advantages and Disadvantages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.3 L
A
T
E
X Input Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.3.1 Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.3.2 Special Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.3.3 L
A
T
E
X Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.3.4 Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.4 Input File Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.5 A Typical Command Line Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.6 The Layout of the Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.6.1 Document Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.6.2 Packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.6.3 Page Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.7 Files You Might Encounter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.8 Big Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2 Typesetting Text 17
2.1 The Structure of Text and Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.2 Line Breaking and Page Breaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.2.1 Justified Paragraphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.2.2 Hyphenation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
2.3 Ready-Made Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2.4 Special Characters and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
viii CONTENTS
2.4.1 Quotation Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2.4.2 Dashes and Hyphens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.4.3 Tilde (∼) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.4.4 Slash (/) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.4.5 Degree Symbol (◦) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.4.6 The Euro Currency Symbol (e) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.4.7 Ellipsis (. . . ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2.4.8 Ligatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2.4.9 Accents and Special Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2.5 International Language Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2.5.1 Support for Portuguese . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
2.5.2 Support for French . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2.5.3 Support for German . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2.5.4 Support for Korean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2.5.5 Writing in Greek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
2.5.6 Support for Cyrillic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
2.5.7 Support for Mongolian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
2.5.8 The Unicode option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
2.6 The Space Between Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
2.7 Titles, Chapters, and Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
2.8 Cross References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
2.9 Footnotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
2.10 Emphasized Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
2.11 Environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
2.11.1 Itemize, Enumerate, and Description . . . . . . . . . . 43
2.11.2 Flushleft, Flushright, and Center . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
2.11.3 Quote, Quotation, and Verse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
2.11.4 Abstract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
2.11.5 Printing Verbatim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
2.11.6 Tabular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
2.12 Floating Bodies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
2.13 Protecting Fragile Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
3 Typesetting Mathematical Formulae 53
3.1 The A
M
S-L
A
T
E
X bundle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
3.2 Single Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
3.2.1 Math Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
3.3 Building Blocks of a Mathematical Formula . . . . . . . . . . 56
3.4 Single Equations that are Too Long: multline . . . . . . . . . 61
3.5 Multiple Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
3.5.1 Problems with Traditional Commands . . . . . . . . . 62
3.5.2 IEEEeqnarray Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
3.5.3 Common Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
3.6 Arrays and Matrices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
CONTENTS ix
3.7 Spacing in Math Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
3.7.1 Phantoms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
3.8 Fiddling with the Math Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
3.8.1 Bold Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
3.9 Theorems, Lemmas, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
3.9.1 Proofs and End-of-Proof Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
3.10 List of Mathematical Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
4 Specialities 83
4.1 Including Encapsulated PostScript . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
4.2 Bibliography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
4.3 Indexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
4.4 Fancy Headers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
4.5 The Verbatim Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
4.6 Installing Extra Packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
4.7 Working with pdfL
A
T
E
X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
4.7.1 PDF Documents for the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
4.7.2 The Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
4.7.3 Using Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
4.7.4 Hypertext Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
4.7.5 Problems with Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
4.7.6 Problems with Bookmarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
4.7.7 Source Compatibility Between L
A
T
E
X and pdfL
A
T
E
X . . 97
4.8 Working with X
E
L
A
T
E
X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
4.8.1 The Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
4.8.2 Compatibility Between X
E
L
A
T
E
X and pdfL
A
T
E
X . . . . 100
4.9 Creating Presentations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
5 Producing Mathematical Graphics 105
5.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
5.2 The picture Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
5.2.1 Basic Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
5.2.2 Line Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
5.2.3 Arrows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
5.2.4 Circles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
5.2.5 Text and Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
5.2.6 \multiput and \linethickness . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
5.2.7 Ovals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
5.2.8 Multiple Use of Predefined Picture Boxes . . . . . . . 112
5.2.9 Quadratic Bézier Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
5.2.10 Catenary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
5.2.11 Rapidity in the Special Theory of Relativity . . . . . . 115
5.3 The PGF and TikZ Graphics Packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
x CONTENTS
6 Customising L
A
T
E
X 119
6.1 New Commands, Environments and Packages . . . . . . . . . 119
6.1.1 New Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
6.1.2 New Environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
6.1.3 Extra Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
6.1.4 Commandline L
A
T
E
X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
6.1.5 Your Own Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
6.2 Fonts and Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
6.2.1 Font Changing Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
6.2.2 Danger, Will Robinson, Danger . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
6.2.3 Advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
6.3 Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
6.3.1 Line Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
6.3.2 Paragraph Formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
6.3.3 Horizontal Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
6.3.4 Vertical Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
6.4 Page Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
6.5 More Fun With Lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
6.6 Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
6.7 Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
A Installing L
A
T
E
X 137
A.1 What to Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
A.2 T
E
X on Mac OS X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
A.2.1 Get a T
E
X Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
A.2.2 Picking an Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
A.2.3 Treat yourself to PDFView . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
A.3 T
E
X on Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
A.3.1 Getting T
E
X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
A.3.2 A L
A
T
E
X editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
A.3.3 Document Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
A.3.4 Working with graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
A.4 T
E
X on Linux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Bibliography 141
Index 144
List of Figures
1.1 A Minimal L
A
T
E
X File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.2 Example of a Realistic Journal Article. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
4.1 Example fancyhdr Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
4.2 Sample code for the beamer class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
6.1 Example Package. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
6.2 Layout parameters for this book. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
List of Tables
1.1 Document Classes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.2 Document Class Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.3 Some of the Packages Distributed with L
A
T
E
X. . . . . . . . . . 12
1.4 The Predefined Page Styles of L
A
T
E
X. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.1 A bag full of Euro symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.2 Accents and Special Characters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2.3 Preamble for Portuguese documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2.4 Special commands for French. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2.5 German Special Characters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2.6 Preamble for Greek documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
2.7 Greek Special Characters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
2.8 Bulgarian, Russian, and Ukrainian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
2.9 Float Placing Permissions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
3.1 Math Mode Accents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
3.2 Greek Letters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
3.3 Binary Relations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
3.4 Binary Operators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
3.5 BIG Operators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
3.6 Arrows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
3.7 Arrows as Accents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
3.8 Delimiters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
3.9 Large Delimiters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
3.10 Miscellaneous Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
3.11 Non-Mathematical Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
3.12 A
M
S Delimiters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
3.13 A
M
S Greek and Hebrew. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
3.14 Math Alphabets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
3.15 A
M
S Binary Operators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
3.16 A
M
S Binary Relations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
3.17 A
M
S Arrows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
3.18 A
M
S Negated Binary Relations and Arrows. . . . . . . . . . 82
xiv LIST OF TABLES
3.19 A
M
S Miscellaneous. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
4.1 Key Names for graphicx Package. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
4.2 Index Key Syntax Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
6.1 Fonts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
6.2 Font Sizes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
6.3 Absolute Point Sizes in Standard Classes. . . . . . . . . . . . 125
6.4 Math Fonts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
6.5 T
E
X Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Chapter 1
Things You Need to Know
The first part of this chapter presents a short overview of the philosophy and
history of L
A
T
E
X2
ε
. The second part focuses on the basic structures of a L
A
T
E
X
document. After reading this chapter, you should have a rough knowledge of
how L
A
T
E
X works, which you will need to understand the rest of this book.
1.1 The Name of the Game
1.1.1 T
E
X
T
E
X is a computer program created by Donald E. Knuth [2]. It is aimed at
typesetting text and mathematical formulae. Knuth started writing the T
E
X
typesetting engine in 1977 to explore the potential of the digital printing
equipment that was beginning to infiltrate the publishing industry at that
time, especially in the hope that he could reverse the trend of deteriorating
typographical quality that he saw affecting his own books and articles. T
E
X
as we use it today was released in 1982, with some slight enhancements added
in 1989 to better support 8-bit characters and multiple languages. T
E
X is
renowned for being extremely stable, for running on many different kinds of
computers, and for being virtually bug free. The version number of T
E
X is
converging to π and is now at 3.141592653.
T
E
X is pronounced “Tech,” with a “ch” as in the German word “Ach”
1
or
in the Scottish “Loch.” The “ch” originates from the Greek alphabet where
X is the letter “ch” or “chi”. T
E
X is also the first syllable of the Greek word
τεκνολογία (technology). In an ASCII environment, T
E
X becomes TeX.
1
In german there are actually two pronounciations for “ch” and one might assume that
the soft “ch” sound from “Pech” would be a more appropriate. Asked about this, Knuth
wrote in the German Wikipedia: I do not get angry when people pronounce T
E
X in their
favorite way . . . and in Germany many use a soft ch because the X fol lows the vowel e, not
the harder ch that fol lows the vowel a. In Russia, ‘tex’ is a very common word, pronounced
‘tyekh’. But I believe the most proper pronunciation is heard in Greece, where you have the
harsher ch of ach and Loch.
2 Things You Need to Know
1.1.2 L
A
T
E
X
L
A
T
E
X enables authors to typeset and print their work at the highest typo-
graphical quality, using a predefined, professional layout. L
A
T
E
X was originally
written by Leslie Lamport [1]. It uses the T
E
X formatter as its typesetting
engine. These days L
A
T
E
X is maintained by Frank Mittelbach.
L
A
T
E
X is pronounced “Lay-tech” or “Lah-tech.” If you refer to L
A
T
E
X in
an ASCII environment, you type LaTeX. L
A
T
E
X2
ε
is pronounced “Lay-tech
two e” and typed LaTeX2e.
1.2 Basics
1.2.1 Author, Book Designer, and Typesetter
To publish something, authors give their typed manuscript to a publishing
company. One of their book designers then decides the layout of the document
(column width, fonts, space before and after headings, . . . ). The book designer
writes his instructions into the manuscript and then gives it to a typesetter,
who typesets the book according to these instructions.
A human book designer tries to find out what the author had in mind
while writing the manuscript. He decides on chapter headings, citations,
examples, formulae, etc. based on his professional knowledge and from the
contents of the manuscript.
In a L
A
T
E
X environment, L
A
T
E
X takes the role of the book designer and
uses T
E
X as its typesetter. But L
A
T
E
X is “only” a program and therefore
needs more guidance. The author has to provide additional information to
describe the logical structure of his work. This information is written into
the text as “L
A
T
E
X commands.”
This is quite different from the WYSIWYG
2
approach that most modern
word processors, such as MS Word or LibreOffice, take. With these applica-
tions, authors specify the document layout interactively while typing text
into the computer. They can see on the screen how the final work will look
when it is printed.
When using L
A
T
E
X it is not normally possible to see the final output while
typing the text, but the final output can be previewed on the screen after
processing the file with L
A
T
E
X. Then corrections can be made before actually
sending the document to the printer.
1.2.2 Layout Design
Typographical design is a craft. Unskilled authors often commit serious
formatting errors by assuming that book design is mostly a question of
aesthetics—“If a document looks good artistically, it is well designed.” But
2
What you see is what you get.
1.2 Basics 3
as a document has to be read and not hung up in a picture gallery, the
readability and understandability is much more important than the beautiful
look of it. Examples:
• The font size and the numbering of headings have to be chosen to make
the structure of chapters and sections clear to the reader.
• The line length has to be short enough not to strain the eyes of the
reader, while long enough to fill the page beautifully.
With WYSIWYG systems, authors often generate aesthetically pleasing
documents with very little or inconsistent structure. L
A
T
E
X prevents such
formatting errors by forcing the author to declare the logical structure of his
document. L
A
T
E
X then chooses the most suitable layout.
1.2.3 Advantages and Disadvantages
When people from the WYSIWYG world meet people who use L
A
T
E
X, they
often discuss “the advantages of L
A
T
E
X over a normal word processor” or the
opposite. The best thing to do when such a discussion starts is to keep a low
profile, since such discussions often get out of hand. But sometimes there is
no escaping . . .
So here is some ammunition. The main advantages of L
A
T
E
X over normal
word processors are the following:
• Professionally crafted layouts are available, which make a document
really look as if “printed.”
• The typesetting of mathematical formulae is supported in a convenient
way.
• Users only need to learn a few easy-to-understand commands that
specify the logical structure of a document. They almost never need to
tinker with the actual layout of the document.
• Even complex structures such as footnotes, references, table of contents,
and bibliographies can be generated easily.
• Free add-on packages exist for many typographical tasks not directly
supported by basic L
A
T
E
X. For example, packages are available to
include PostScript graphics or to typeset bibliographies conforming
to exact standards. Many of these add-on packages are described in
The L
A
T
E
X Companion [3].
• L
A
T
E
X encourages authors to write well-structured texts, because this
is how L
A
T
E
X works—by specifying structure.
4 Things You Need to Know
• T
E
X, the formatting engine of L
A
T
E
X2
ε
, is highly portable and free.
Therefore the system runs on almost any hardware platform available.
L
A
T
E
X also has some disadvantages, and I guess it’s a bit difficult for me to
find any sensible ones, though I am sure other people can tell you hundreds
;-)
• L
A
T
E
X does not work well for people who have sold their souls . . .
• Although some parameters can be adjusted within a predefined docu-
ment layout, the design of a whole new layout is difficult and takes a
lot of time.
3
• It is very hard to write unstructured and disorganized documents.
• Your hamster might, despite some encouraging first steps, never be
able to fully grasp the concept of Logical Markup.
1.3 L
A
T
E
X Input Files
The input for L
A
T
E
X is a plain text file. On Unix/Linux text files are pretty
common. On windows, one would use Notepad to create a text file. It
contains the text of the document, as well as the commands that tell L
A
T
E
X
how to typeset the text. If you are working with a LaTeX IDE, it will contain
a program for creating L
A
T
E
X input files in text format.
1.3.1 Spaces
“Whitespace” characters, such as blank or tab, are treated uniformly as
“space” by L
A
T
E
X. Several consecutive whitespace characters are treated as
one “space.” Whitespace at the start of a line is generally ignored, and a
single line break is treated as “whitespace.”
An empty line between two lines of text defines the end of a paragraph.
Several empty lines are treated the same as one empty line. The text below
is an example. On the left hand side is the text from the input file, and on
the right hand side is the formatted output.
It does not matter whether you
enter one or several spaces
after a word.
An empty line starts a new
paragraph.
It does not matter whether you enter one
or several spaces after a word.
An empty line starts a new paragraph.
3
Rumour says that this is one of the key elements that will be addressed in the upcoming
L
A
T
E
X3 system.
1.3 L
A
T
E
X Input Files 5
1.3.2 Special Characters
The following symbols are reserved characters that either have a special
meaning under L
A
T
E
X or are not available in all the fonts. If you enter them
directly in your text, they will normally not print, but rather coerce L
A
T
E
X
to do things you did not intend.
# $ % ^ & _ { } ~ \
As you will see, these characters can be used in your documents all the
same by using a prefix backslash:
\# \$ \% \^{} \& \_ \{ \} \~{}
\textbackslash
# $ % ˆ & _ { } ˜ \
The other symbols and many more can be printed with special commands
in mathematical formulae or as accents. The backslash character \ can not
be entered by adding another backslash in front of it (\\); this sequence is
used for line breaking. Use the \textbackslash command instead.
1.3.3 L
A
T
E
X Commands
L
A
T
E
X commands are case sensitive, and take one of the following two formats:
• They start with a backslash \ and then have a name consisting of
letters only. Command names are terminated by a space, a number or
any other ‘non-letter.’
• They consist of a backslash and exactly one non-letter.
• Many commands exist in a ‘starred variant’ where a star is appended
to the command name.
L
A
T
E
X ignores whitespace after commands. If you want to get a space after
a command, you have to put either an empty parameter {} and a blank or a
special spacing command after the command name. The empty parameter
{} stops L
A
T
E
X from eating up all the white space after the command name.
I read that Knuth divides the
people working with \TeX{} into
\TeX{}nicians and \TeX perts.\\
Today is \today.
I read that Knuth divides the people
working with T
E
X into T
E
Xnicians and
T
E
Xperts.
Today is April 6, 2011.
Some commands require a parameter, which has to be given between
curly braces { } after the command name. Some commands take optional
parameters, which are inserted after the command name in square brack-
ets [ ].
6 Things You Need to Know
\command[optinal parameter]{parameter}
The next examples use some L
A
T
E
X commands. Don’t worry about them;
they will be explained later.
You can \textsl{lean} on me! You can lean on me!
Please, start a new line
right here!\newline
Thank you!
Please, start a new line right here!
Thank you!
1.3.4 Comments
When L
A
T
E
X encounters a % character while processing an input file, it ignores
the rest of the present line, the line break, and all whitespace at the beginning
of the next line.
This can be used to write notes into the input file, which will not show
up in the printed version.
This is an % stupid
% Better: instructive <----
example: Supercal%
ifragilist%
icexpialidocious
This is an example: Supercalifragilisticex-
pialidocious
The % character can also be used to split long input lines where no
whitespace or line breaks are allowed.
For longer comments you could use the comment environment provided by
the verbatim package. Add the line \usepackage{verbatim} to the preamble
of your document as explained below to use this command.
This is another
\begin{comment}
rather stupid,
but helpful
\end{comment}
example for embedding
comments in your document.
This is another example for embedding
comments in your document.
Note that this won’t work inside complex environments, like math for
example.
1.4 Input File Structure 7
1.4 Input File Structure
When L
A
T
E
X2
ε
processes an input file, it expects it to follow a certain
structure. Thus every input file must start with the command
\documentclass{...}
This specifies what sort of document you intend to write. After that, add
commands to influence the style of the whole document, or load packages
that add new features to the L
A
T
E
X system. To load such a package you use
the command
\usepackage{...}
When all the setup work is done,
4
you start the body of the text with
the command
\begin{document}
Now you enter the text mixed with some useful L
A
T
E
X commands. At
the end of the document you add the
\end{document}
command, which tells L
A
T
E
X to call it a day. Anything that follows this
command will be ignored by L
A
T
E
X.
Figure 1.1 shows the contents of a minimal L
A
T
E
X2
ε
file. A slightly more
complicated input file is given in Figure 1.2.
1.5 A Typical Command Line Session
I bet you must be dying to try out the neat small L
A
T
E
X input file shown
on page 7. Here is some help: L
A
T
E
X itself comes without a GUI or fancy
buttons to press. It is just a program that crunches away at your input file.
Some L
A
T
E
X installations feature a graphical front-end where there is a L
A
T
E
X
button to start compiling your input file. On other systems there might be
4
The area between \documentclass and \begin{document} is called the preamble.
\documentclass{article}
\begin{document}
Small is beautiful.
\end{document}
Figure 1.1: A Minimal L
A
T
E
X File.
8 Things You Need to Know
some typing involved, so here is how to coax L
A
T
E
X into compiling your input
file on a text based system. Please note: this description assumes that a
working L
A
T
E
X installation already sits on your computer.
5
1. Edit/Create your L
A
T
E
X input file. This file must be plain ASCII text.
On Unix all the editors will create just that. On Windows you might
want to make sure that you save the file in ASCII or Plain Text format.
When picking a name for your file, make sure it bears the extension
.tex.
2. Open a shell or cmd window, cd to the directory where your input file
is located and run L
A
T
E
X on your input file. If successful you will end
up with a .dvi file. It may be necessary to run L
A
T
E
X several times to
get the table of contents and all internal references right. When your
input file has a bug L
A
T
E
X will tell you about it and stop processing
your input file. Type ctrl-D to get back to the command line.
latex foo.tex
3. Now you may view the DVI file. There are several ways to do that.
5
This is the case with most well groomed Unix Systems, and . . . Real Men use Unix,
so . . . ;-)
\documentclass[a4paper,11pt]{article}
% define the title
\author{H.~Partl}
\title{Minimalism}
\begin{document}
% generates the title
\maketitle
% insert the table of contents
\tableofcontents
\section{Some Interesting Words}
Well, and here begins my lovely article.
\section{Good Bye World}
\ldots{} and here it ends.
\end{document}
Figure 1.2: Example of a Realistic Journal Article. Note that all the
commands you see in this example will be explained later in the introduction.
1.6 The Layout of the Document 9
Look at the file on screen with
xdvi foo.dvi &
This only works on Unix with X11. If you are on Windows you might
want to try yap (yet another previewer).
Convert the dvi file to PostScript for printing or viewing with
GhostScript.
dvips -Pcmz foo.dvi -o foo.ps
If you are lucky your L
A
T
E
X system even comes with the dvipdf tool,
which allows you to convert your .dvi files straight into pdf.
dvipdf foo.dvi
1.6 The Layout of the Document
1.6.1 Document Classes
The first information L
A
T
E
X needs to know when processing an input file is
the type of document the author wants to create. This is specified with the
\documentclass command.
\documentclass[options]{class}
Here class specifies the type of document to be created. Table 1.1 lists the
document classes explained in this introduction. The L
A
T
E
X2
ε
distribution
provides additional classes for other documents, including letters and slides.
The options parameter customises the behaviour of the document class. The
options have to be separated by commas. The most common options for the
standard document classes are listed in Table 1.2.
Example: An input file for a L
A
T
E
X document could start with the line
\documentclass[11pt,twoside,a4paper]{article}
which instructs L
A
T
E
X to typeset the document as an article with a base
font size of eleven points, and to produce a layout suitable for double sided
printing on A4 paper.
10 Things You Need to Know
1.6.2 Packages
While writing your document, you will probably find that there are some
areas where basic L
A
T
E
X cannot solve your problem. If you want to include
graphics, coloured text or source code from a file into your document, you
need to enhance the capabilities of L
A
T
E
X. Such enhancements are called
packages. Packages are activated with the
\usepackage[options]{package}
command, where package is the name of the package and options is a list of
keywords that trigger special features in the package. Some packages come
with the L
A
T
E
X2
ε
base distribution (See Table 1.3). Others are provided
separately. You may find more information on the packages installed at your
site in your Local Guide [5]. The prime source for information about L
A
T
E
X
packages is The L
A
T
E
X Companion [3]. It contains descriptions on hundreds
of packages, along with information of how to write your own extensions to
L
A
T
E
X2
ε
.
Modern T
E
X distributions come with a large number of packages prein-
stalled. If you are working on a Unix system, use the command texdoc for
accessing package documentation.
Table 1.1: Document Classes.
article for articles in scientific journals, presentations, short reports, pro-
gram documentation, invitations, . . .
proc a class for proceedings based on the article class.
minimal is as small as it can get. It only sets a page size and a base font. It
is mainly used for debugging purposes.
report for longer reports containing several chapters, small books, PhD
theses, . . .
book for real books
slides for slides. The class uses big sans serif letters. You might want to
consider using the Beamer class instead.
1.6 The Layout of the Document 11
Table 1.2: Document Class Options.
10pt, 11pt, 12pt Sets the size of the main font in the document. If no
option is specified, 10pt is assumed.
a4paper, letterpaper, . . . Defines the paper size. The default size is
letterpaper. Besides that, a5paper, b5paper, executivepaper,
and legalpaper can be specified.
fleqn Typesets displayed formulae left-aligned instead of centred.
leqno Places the numbering of formulae on the left hand side instead of
the right.
titlepage, notitlepage Specifies whether a new page should be started
after the document title or not. The article class does not start a
new page by default, while report and book do.
onecolumn, twocolumn Instructs L
A
T
E
X to typeset the document in one
column or two columns.
twoside, oneside Specifies whether double or single sided output
should be generated. The classes article and report are single sided
and the book class is double sided by default. Note that this option
concerns the style of the document only. The option twoside does not
tell the printer you use that it should actually make a two-sided
printout.
landscape Changes the layout of the document to print in landscape
mode.
openright, openany Makes chapters begin either only on right hand
pages or on the next page available. This does not work with the
article class, as it does not know about chapters. The report class
by default starts chapters on the next page available and the book
class starts them on right hand pages.
12 Things You Need to Know
Table 1.3: Some of the Packages Distributed with L
A
T
E
X.
doc Allows the documentation of L
A
T
E
X programs.
Described in doc.dtx
a
and in The L
A
T
E
X Companion [3].
exscale Provides scaled versions of the math extension font.
Described in ltexscale.dtx.
fontenc Specifies which font encoding L
A
T
E
X should use.
Described in ltoutenc.dtx.
ifthen Provides commands of the form
‘if. . . then do. . . otherwise do. . . .’
Described in ifthen.dtx and The L
A
T
E
X Companion [3].
latexsym To access the L
A
T
E
X symbol font, you should use the latexsym
package. Described in latexsym.dtx and in The L
A
T
E
X Companion [3].
makeidx Provides commands for producing indexes. Described in section 4.3
and in The L
A
T
E
X Companion [3].
syntonly Processes a document without typesetting it.
inputenc Allows the specification of an input encoding such as ASCII, ISO
Latin-1, ISO Latin-2, 437/850 IBM code pages, Apple Macintosh, Next,
ANSI-Windows or user-defined one. Described in inputenc.dtx.
a
This file should be installed on your system, and you should be able to get a dvi file
by typing latex doc.dtx in any directory where you have write permission. The same is
true for all the other files mentioned in this table.
1.7 Files You Might Encounter 13
1.6.3 Page Styles
L
A
T
E
X supports three predefined header/footer combinations—so-called page
styles. The style parameter of the
\pagestyle{style}
command defines which one to use. Table 1.4 lists the predefined page styles.
Table 1.4: The Predefined Page Styles of L
A
T
E
X.
plain prints the page numbers on the bottom of the page, in the middle of
the footer. This is the default page style.
headings prints the current chapter heading and the page number in the
header on each page, while the footer remains empty. (This is the style
used in this document)
empty sets both the header and the footer to be empty.
It is possible to change the page style of the current page with the
command
\thispagestyle{style}
A description how to create your own headers and footers can be found
in The L
A
T
E
X Companion [3] and in section 4.4 on page 87.
1.7 Files You Might Encounter
When you work with L
A
T
E
X you will soon find yourself in a maze of files
with various extensions and probably no clue. The following list explains the
various file types you might encounter when working with T
E
X. Please note
that this table does not claim to be a complete list of extensions, but if you
find one missing that you think is important, please drop me a line.
.tex L
A
T
E
X or T
E
X input file. Can be compiled with latex.
.sty L
A
T
E
X Macro package. Load this into your L
A
T
E
X document using the
\usepackage command.
.dtx Documented T
E
X. This is the main distribution format for L
A
T
E
X style
files. If you process a .dtx file you get documented macro code of the
L
A
T
E
X package contained in the .dtx file.
14 Things You Need to Know
.ins The installer for the files contained in the matching .dtx file. If you
download a L
A
T
E
X package from the net, you will normally get a .dtx
and a .ins file. Run L
A
T
E
X on the .ins file to unpack the .dtx file.
.cls Class files define what your document looks like. They are selected
with the \documentclass command.
.fd Font description file telling L
A
T
E
X about new fonts.
The following files are generated when you run L
A
T
E
X on your input file:
.dvi Device Independent File. This is the main result of a L
A
T
E
X compile
run. Look at its content with a DVI previewer program or send it to a
printer with dvips or a similar application.
.log Gives a detailed account of what happened during the last compiler
run.
.toc Stores all your section headers. It gets read in for the next compiler
run and is used to produce the table of content.
.lof This is like .toc but for the list of figures.
.lot And again the same for the list of tables.
.aux Another file that transports information from one compiler run to the
next. Among other things, the .aux file is used to store information
associated with cross-references.
.idx If your document contains an index. L
A
T
E
X stores all the words that
go into the index in this file. Process this file with makeindex. Refer
to section 4.3 on page 86 for more information on indexing.
.ind The processed .idx file, ready for inclusion into your document on the
next compile cycle.
.ilg Logfile telling what makeindex did.
1.8 Big Projects
When working on big documents, you might want to split the input file into
several parts. L
A
T
E
X has two commands that help you to do that.
\include{filename}
Use this command in the document body to insert the contents of another file
named filename.tex. Note that L
A
T
E
X will start a new page before processing
the material input from filename.tex.
1.8 Big Projects 15
The second command can be used in the preamble. It allows you to
instruct L
A
T
E
X to only input some of the \included files.
\includeonly{filename,filename,. . . }
After this command is executed in the preamble of the document, only
\include commands for the filenames that are listed in the argument of
the \includeonly command will be executed. Note that there must be no
spaces between the filenames and the commas.
The \include command starts typesetting the included text on a new
page. This is helpful when you use \includeonly, because the page breaks
will not move, even when some include files are omitted. Sometimes this
might not be desirable. In this case, use the
\input{filename}
command. It simply includes the file specified. No flashy suits, no strings
attached.
To make L
A
T
E
X quickly check your document use the syntonly package.
This makes L
A
T
E
X skim through your document only checking for proper
syntax and usage of the commands, but doesn’t produce any (DVI) output.
As L
A
T
E
X runs faster in this mode you may save yourself valuable time. Usage
is very simple:
\usepackage{syntonly}
\syntaxonly
When you want to produce pages, just comment out the second line (by
adding a percent sign).
Chapter 2
Typesetting Text
After reading the previous chapter, you should know about the basic stuff of
which a L
A
T
E
X2
ε
document is made. In this chapter I will fill in the remaining
structure you will need to know in order to produce real world material.
2.1 The Structure of Text and Language
By Hanspeter Schmid <hanspi@schmid-werren.ch>
The main point of writing a text (some modern DAAC
1
literature excluded),
is to convey ideas, information, or knowledge to the reader. The reader will
understand the text better if these ideas are well-structured, and will see and
feel this structure much better if the typographical form reflects the logical
and semantical structure of the content.
L
A
T
E
X is different from other typesetting systems in that you just have
to tell it the logical and semantical structure of a text. It then derives the
typographical form of the text according to the “rules” given in the document
class file and in various style files.
The most important text unit in L
A
T
E
X (and in typography) is the
paragraph. We call it “text unit” because a paragraph is the typographical
form that should reflect one coherent thought, or one idea. You will learn in
the following sections how to force line breaks with e.g. \\, and paragraph
breaks with e.g. leaving an empty line in the source code. Therefore, if a new
thought begins, a new paragraph should begin, and if not, only line breaks
should be used. If in doubt about paragraph breaks, think about your text
as a conveyor of ideas and thoughts. If you have a paragraph break, but
the old thought continues, it should be removed. If some totally new line of
thought occurs in the same paragraph, then it should be broken.
Most people completely underestimate the importance of well-placed
paragraph breaks. Many people do not even know what the meaning of
1
Different At All Cost, a translation of the Swiss German UVA (Um’s Verrecken Anders).
18 Typesetting Text
a paragraph break is, or, especially in L
A
T
E
X, introduce paragraph breaks
without knowing it. The latter mistake is especially easy to make if equations
are used in the text. Look at the following examples, and figure out why
sometimes empty lines (paragraph breaks) are used before and after the
equation, and sometimes not. (If you don’t yet understand all commands
well enough to understand these examples, please read this and the following
chapter, and then read this section again.)
% Example 1
\ldots when Einstein introduced his formula
\begin{equation}
e = m \cdot c^2 \; ,
\end{equation}
which is at the same time the most widely known
and the least well understood physical formula.
% Example 2
\ldots from which follows Kirchhoff’s current law:
\begin{equation}
\sum_{k=1}^{n} I_k = 0 \; .
\end{equation}
Kirchhoff’s voltage law can be derived \ldots
% Example 3
\ldots which has several advantages.
\begin{equation}
I_D = I_F - I_R
\end{equation}
is the core of a very different transistor model. \ldots
The next smaller text unit is a sentence. In English texts, there is a
larger space after a period that ends a sentence than after one that ends an
abbreviation. L
A
T
E
X tries to figure out which one you wanted to have. If
L
A
T
E
X gets it wrong, you must tell it what you want. This is explained later
in this chapter.
The structuring of text even extends to parts of sentences. Most languages
have very complicated punctuation rules, but in many languages (including
German and English), you will get almost every comma right if you remember
what it represents: a short stop in the flow of language. If you are not sure
about where to put a comma, read the sentence aloud and take a short
2.2 Line Breaking and Page Breaking 19
breath at every comma. If this feels awkward at some place, delete that
comma; if you feel the urge to breathe (or make a short stop) at some other
place, insert a comma.
Finally, the paragraphs of a text should also be structured logically at a
higher level, by putting them into chapters, sections, subsections, and so on.
However, the typographical effect of writing e.g. \section{The Structure
of Text and Language} is so obvious that it is almost self-evident how
these high-level structures should be used.
2.2 Line Breaking and Page Breaking
2.2.1 Justified Paragraphs
Books are often typeset with each line having the same length. L
A
T
E
X
inserts the necessary line breaks and spaces between words by optimizing
the contents of a whole paragraph. If necessary, it also hyphenates words
that would not fit comfortably on a line. How the paragraphs are typeset
depends on the document class. Normally the first line of a paragraph is
indented, and there is no additional space between two paragraphs. Refer to
section 6.3.2 for more information.
In special cases it might be necessary to order L
A
T
E
X to break a line:
\\ or \newline
starts a new line without starting a new paragraph.
\\*
additionally prohibits a page break after the forced line break.
\newpage
starts a new page.
\linebreak[n], \nolinebreak[n], \pagebreak[n], \nopagebreak[n]
suggest places where a break may (or may not) happen. They enable the
author to influence their actions with the optional argument n, which can
be set to a number between zero and four. By setting n to a value below
4, you leave L
A
T
E
X the option of ignoring your command if the result would
look very bad. Do not confuse these “break” commands with the “new”
commands. Even when you give a “break” command, L
A
T
E
X still tries to even
out the right border of the line and the total length of the page, as described
in the next section; this can lead to unpleasant gaps in your text. If you
20 Typesetting Text
really want to start a “new line” or a “new page”, then use the corresponding
command. Guess their names!
L
A
T
E
X always tries to produce the best line breaks possible. If it cannot
find a way to break the lines in a manner that meets its high standards, it
lets one line stick out on the right of the paragraph. L
A
T
E
X then complains
(“overfull hbox”) while processing the input file. This happens most often
when L
A
T
E
X cannot find a suitable place to hyphenate a word.
2
Instruct
L
A
T
E
X to lower its standards a little by giving the \sloppy command. It
prevents such over-long lines by increasing the inter-word spacing—even if
the final output is not optimal. In this case a warning (“underfull hbox”) is
given to the user. In most such cases the result doesn’t look very good. The
command \fussy brings L
A
T
E
X back to its default behaviour.
2.2.2 Hyphenation
L
A
T
E
X hyphenates words whenever necessary. If the hyphenation algorithm
does not find the correct hyphenation points, remedy the situation by using
the following commands to tell T
E
X about the exception.
The command
\hyphenation{word list}
causes the words listed in the argument to be hyphenated only at the points
marked by “-”. The argument of the command should only contain words
built from normal letters, or rather signs that are considered to be normal
letters by L
A
T
E
X. The hyphenation hints are stored for the language that
is active when the hyphenation command occurs. This means that if you
place a hyphenation command into the preamble of your document it will
influence the English language hyphenation. If you place the command
after the \begin{document} and you are using some package for national
language support like babel, then the hyphenation hints will be active in the
language activated through babel.
The example below will allow “hyphenation” to be hyphenated as well as
“Hyphenation”, and it prevents “FORTRAN”, “Fortran” and “fortran” from
being hyphenated at all. No special characters or symbols are allowed in the
argument.
Example:
\hyphenation{FORTRAN Hy-phen-a-tion}
2
Although L
A
T
E
X gives you a warning when that happens (Overfull \hbox) and displays
the offending line, such lines are not always easy to find. If you use the option draft in
the \documentclass command, these lines will be marked with a thick black line on the
right margin.
2.3 Ready-Made Strings 21
The command \- inserts a discretionary hyphen into a word. This
also becomes the only point hyphenation is allowed in this word. This
command is especially useful for words containing special characters (e.g.
accented characters), because L
A
T
E
X does not automatically hyphenate words
containing special characters.
I think this is: su\-per\-cal\-%
i\-frag\-i\-lis\-tic\-ex\-pi\-%
al\-i\-do\-cious
I think this is: supercalifragilisticexpiali-
docious
Several words can be kept together on one line with the command
\mbox{text}
It causes its argument to be kept together under all circumstances.
My phone number will change soon.
It will be \mbox{0116 291 2319}.
The parameter
\mbox{\emph{filename}} should
contain the name of the file.
My phone number will change soon. It will
be 0116 291 2319.
The parameter filename should contain the
name of the file.
\fbox is similar to \mbox, but in addition there will be a visible box
drawn around the content.
2.3 Ready-Made Strings
In some of the examples on the previous pages, you have seen some very
simple L
A
T
E
X commands for typesetting special text strings:
Command Example Description
\today April 6, 2011 Current date
\TeX T
E
X Your favorite typesetter
\LaTeX L
A
T
E
X The Name of the Game
\LaTeXe L
A
T
E
X2
ε
The current incarnation
2.4 Special Characters and Symbols
2.4.1 Quotation Marks
You should not use the " for quotation marks as you would on a typewriter.
In publishing there are special opening and closing quotation marks. In L
A
T
E
X,
use two (grave accent) for opening quotation marks and two (vertical
quote) for closing quotation marks. For single quotes you use just one of
each.
22 Typesetting Text
‘‘Please press the ‘x’ key.’’ “Please press the ‘x’ key.”
Yes I know the rendering is not ideal, it’s really a back-tick or grave
accent () for opening quotes and vertical quote () for closing, despite what
the font chosen might suggest.
2.4.2 Dashes and Hyphens
L
A
T
E
X knows four kinds of dashes. Access three of them with different number
of consecutive dashes. The fourth sign is actually not a dash at all—it is the
mathematical minus sign:
daughter-in-law, X-rated\\
pages 13--67\\
yes---or no? \\
$0$, $1$ and $-1$
daughter-in-law, X-rated
pages 13–67
yes—or no?
0, 1 and −1
The names for these dashes are: ‘-’ hyphen, ‘–’ en-dash, ‘—’ em-dash
and ‘−’ minus sign.
2.4.3 Tilde (∼)
A character often seen in web addresses is the tilde. To generate this in
L
A
T
E
X use \~{} but the result (˜) is not really what you want. Try this
instead:
http://www.rich.edu/\~{}bush \\
http://www.clever.edu/$\sim$demo
http://www.rich.edu/˜bush
http://www.clever.edu/∼demo
2.4.4 Slash (/)
In order to typeset a slash between two words, one can simply type e.g.
read/write, but this makes L
A
T
E
X treat the two words as one. Hyphenation
is disabled for these two words, so there may be ‘overfull’ errors. To over-
come this, use \slash. For example type ‘read\slash write’ which allows
hyphenation. But normal ‘/’ character may be still used for ratios or units,
e.g. 5 MB/s.
2.4.5 Degree Symbol (◦)
Printing the degree symbol in pure L
A
T
E
X.
2.4 Special Characters and Symbols 23
It’s $-30\,^{\circ}\mathrm{C}$.
I will soon start to
super-conduct.
It’s −30

C. I will soon start to super-
conduct.
The textcomp package makes the degree symbol also available as \textdegree
or in combination with the C by using the \textcelsius.
30 \textcelsius{} is
86 \textdegree{}F.
30 ℃ is 86 °F.
2.4.6 The Euro Currency Symbol (e)
When writing about money these days, you need the Euro symbol. Many
current fonts contain a Euro symbol. After loading the textcomp package in
the preamble of your document
\usepackage{textcomp}
use the command
\texteuro
to access it.
If your font does not provide its own Euro symbol or if you do not like
the font’s Euro symbol, you have two more choices:
First the eurosym package. It provides the official Euro symbol:
\usepackage[official ]{eurosym}
If you prefer a Euro symbol that matches your font, use the option gen
in place of the official option.
Table 2.1: A bag full of Euro symbols
LM+textcomp \texteuro € € €
eurosym \euro e e e
[gen]eurosym \euro AC AC AC
24 Typesetting Text
2.4.7 Ellipsis (. . . )
On a typewriter, a comma or a period takes the same amount of space as
any other letter. In book printing, these characters occupy only a little space
and are set very close to the preceding letter. Therefore, entering ‘ellipsis’
by just typing three dots would produce the wrong result. Instead, there is
a special command for these dots. It is called
\ldots (low dots)
Not like this ... but like this:\\
New York, Tokyo, Budapest, \ldots
Not like this ... but like this:
New York, Tokyo, Budapest, . . .
2.4.8 Ligatures
Some letter combinations are typeset not just by setting the different letters
one after the other, but by actually using special symbols.
ff fi fl ffi. . . instead of ff fi fl ffi . . .
These so-called ligatures can be prohibited by inserting an \mbox{} between
the two letters in question. This might be necessary with words built from
two words.
\Large Not shelfful\\
but shelf\mbox{}ful
Not shelfful
but shelfful
2.4.9 Accents and Special Characters
L
A
T
E
X supports the use of accents and special characters from many languages.
Table 2.2 shows all sorts of accents being applied to the letter o. Naturally
other letters work too.
To place an accent on top of an i or a j, its dots have to be removed.
This is accomplished by typing \i and \j.
H\^otel, na\"\i ve, \’el\‘eve,\\
sm\o rrebr\o d, !‘Se\~norita!,\\
Sch\"onbrunner Schlo\ss{}
Stra\ss e
Hôtel, naïve, élève,
smørrebrød, ¡Señorita!,
Schönbrunner Schloß Straße
2.5 International Language Support 25
2.5 International Language Support
When you write documents in languages other than English, there are three
areas where L
A
T
E
X has to be configured appropriately:
1. All automatically generated text strings
3
have to be adapted to the
new language. For many languages, these changes can be accomplished
by using the babel package by Johannes Braams.
2. L
A
T
E
X needs to know the hyphenation rules for the new language.
Getting hyphenation rules into L
A
T
E
X is a bit more tricky. It means
rebuilding the format file with different hyphenation patterns enabled.
Your Local Guide [5] should give more information on this.
3. Language specific typographic rules. In French for example, there is a
mandatory space before each colon character (:).
If your system is already configured appropriately, activate the babel
package by adding the command
\usepackage[language]{babel}
after the \documentclass command. A list of the languages built into your
L
A
T
E
X system will be displayed every time the compiler is started. Babel will
automatically activate the appropriate hyphenation rules for the language
you choose. If your L
A
T
E
X format does not support hyphenation in the
language of your choice, babel will still work but will disable hyphenation,
which has quite a negative effect on the appearance of the typeset document.
3
Table of Contents, List of Figures, . . .
Table 2.2: Accents and Special Characters.
ò \‘o ó \’o ô \^o õ \~o
¯o \=o ˙ o \.o ö \"o ç \c c
˘o \u o ˇo \v o ő \H o ¸ o \c o
o
.
\d o o
¯
\b o oo \t oo
œ \oe Œ \OE æ \ae Æ \AE
å \aa Å \AA
ø \o Ø \O ł \l Ł \L
ı \i  \j ¡ !‘ ¿ ?‘
26 Typesetting Text
Babel also specifies new commands for some languages, which simplify
the input of special characters. The German language, for example, contains
a lot of umlauts (äöü). With babel loaded, enter an ö by typing "o instead
of \"o.
If you call babel with multiple languages
\usepackage[languageA,languageB]{babel}
then the last language in the option list will be active (i.e. languageB). Use
the command
\selectlanguage{languageA}
to change the active language.
Most modern computer systems allow you to input letters of national
alphabets directly from the keyboard. In order to handle a variety of input
encodings used for different groups of languages and/or on different computer
platforms L
A
T
E
X employs the inputenc package:
\usepackage[encoding]{inputenc}
When using this package, you should consider that other people might
not be able to display your input files on their computer, because they use a
different encoding. For example, the German umlaut ä on OS/2 is encoded
as 132, on Unix systems using ISO-LATIN 1 it is encoded as 228, while
in Cyrillic encoding cp1251 for Windows this letter does not exist at all;
therefore you should use this feature with care. The following encodings may
come in handy, depending on the type of system you are working on
4
Operating encodings
system western Latin Cyrillic
Mac applemac macukr
Unix latin1 koi8-ru
Windows ansinew cp1251
DOS, OS/2 cp850 cp866nav
\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
will enable you to create L
A
T
E
X input files in utf8, a multi-byte encoding in
which each character can be encoded in as little as one byte and as many as
four bytes.
4
To learn more about supported input encodings for Latin-based and Cyrillic-based
languages, read the documentation for inputenc.dtx and cyinpenc.dtx respectively.
Section 4.6 tells how to produce package documentation.
2.5 International Language Support 27
Since the turn of the Century most Operating Systems are based on
Unicode (Windows XP, MacOS X). Therefore it is recommended to use utf8
for any new project. The utf8 encoding used by inputenc only defines the
characters that are actually provided by the fonts used. If you need more
(non-latin) characters have a look at X
E
L
A
T
E
X in section 4.8 a Unicode based
T
E
X-engine.
Font encoding is a different matter. It defines at which position inside a
T
E
X-font each letter is stored. Multiple input encodings could be mapped
into one font encoding, which reduces the number of required font sets. Font
encodings are handled through fontenc package:
\usepackage[encoding]{fontenc}
where encoding is font encoding. It is possible to load several encodings
simultaneously.
The default L
A
T
E
X font encoding is OT1, the encoding of the original
Computer Modern T
E
X font. It contains only the 128 characters of the 7-bit
ASCII character set. When accented characters are required, T
E
X creates
them by combining a normal character with an accent. While the resulting
output looks perfect, this approach stops the automatic hyphenation from
working inside words containing accented characters. Besides, some Latin
letters could not be created by combining a normal character with an accent,
to say nothing about letters of non-Latin alphabets, such as Greek or Cyrillic.
To overcome these shortcomings, several 8-bit CM-like font sets were
created. Extended Cork (EC) fonts in T1 encoding contains letters and
punctuation characters for most of the European languages using Latin
script. The LH font set contains letters necessary to typeset documents
in languages using Cyrillic script. Because of the large number of Cyrillic
glyphs, they are arranged into four font encodings—T2A, T2B, T2C, and X2.
5
The CB bundle contains fonts in LGR encoding for the composition of Greek
text.
Improve/enable hyphenation in non-English documents by using these
fonts. Another advantage of using new CM-like fonts is that they provide
fonts of CM families in all weights, shapes, and optically scaled font sizes.
2.5.1 Support for Portuguese
By Demerson Andre Polli <polli@linux.ime.usp.br>
To enable hyphenation and change all automatic text to Portuguese, use the
5
Find a list of languages supported by each of these encodings in [11].
28 Typesetting Text
Table 2.3: Preamble for Portuguese documents.
\usepackage[portuguese]{babel}
\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
command:
\usepackage[portuguese]{babel}
Or if you are in Brazil, substitute brazilian as the language.
As there are a lot of accents in Portuguese you might want to use
\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
to be able to input them correctly as well as
\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
to get the hyphenation right.
See table 2.3 for the preamble you need to write in the Portuguese
language. Note that the example is for the latin1 input encoding. Modern
systems might be using utf8 instead.
2.5.2 Support for French
By Daniel Flipo <daniel.flipo@univ-lille1.fr>
Some hints for those creating French documents with L
A
T
E
X: load French
language support with the following command:
\usepackage[francais]{babel}
This enables French hyphenation, if you have configured your L
A
T
E
X
system accordingly. It also changes all automatic text into French: \chapter
prints Chapitre, \today prints the current date in French and so on. A set
of new commands also becomes available, which allows you to write French
input files more easily. Check out table 2.4 for inspiration.
You will also notice that the layout of lists changes when switching to the
French language. For more information on what the francais option of babel
does and how to customize its behaviour, run L
A
T
E
X on file frenchb.dtx
and read the produced file frenchb.dvi.
2.5 International Language Support 29
Table 2.4: Special commands for French.
\og guillemets \fg{} « guillemets »
M\up{me}, D\up{r} M
me
, D
r
1\ier{}, 1\iere{}, 1\ieres{} 1
er
, 1
re
, 1
res
2\ieme{} 4\iemes{} 2
e
4
es
\No 1, \no 2 N
o
1, n
o
2
20~\degres C, 45\degres 20 °C, 45°
\bsc{M. Durand} M. Durand
\nombre{1234,56789} 1 234,567 89
Recent versions of frenchb rely on numprint to implement the \nombre
command.
2.5.3 Support for German
Some hints for those creating German documents with L
A
T
E
X: load German
language support with the following command:
\usepackage[german]{babel}
This enables German hyphenation, if you have configured your L
A
T
E
X
system accordingly. It also changes all automatic text into German. Eg.
“Chapter” becomes “Kapitel.” A set of new commands also becomes available,
which allows you to write German input files more quickly even when you
don’t use the inputenc package. Check out table 2.5 for inspiration. With
inputenc, all this becomes moot, but your text also is locked in a particular
encoding world.
In German books you often find French quotation marks («guillemets»).
German typesetters, however, use them differently. A quote in a German
book would look like »this«. In the German speaking part of Switzerland,
typesetters use «guillemets» the same way the French do.
A major problem arises from the use of commands like \flq: If you use
the OT1 font (which is the default font) the guillemets will look like the math
symbol “¸”, which turns a typesetter’s stomach. T1 encoded fonts, on the
other hand, do contain the required symbols. So if you are using this type of
quote, make sure you use the T1 encoding. (\usepackage[T1]{fontenc})
30 Typesetting Text
Table 2.5: German Special Characters.
"a ä "s ß
"‘ „ "’ “
"< or \flqq « "> or \frqq »
\flq ‹ \frq ›
\dq "
2.5.4 Support for Korean
6
To use L
A
T
E
X for typesetting Korean, we need to solve three problems:
1. We must be able to edit Korean input files. Korean input files must be in
plain text format, but because Korean uses its own character set outside
the repertoire of US-ASCII, they will look rather strange with a normal
ASCII editor. The two most widely used encodings for Korean text
files are EUC-KR and its upward compatible extension used in Korean
MS-Windows, CP949/Windows-949/UHC. In these encodings each
US-ASCII character represents its normal ASCII character similar to
other ASCII compatible encodings such as ISO-8859-x, EUC-JP, Big5,
or Shift_JIS. On the other hand, Hangul syllables, Hanjas (Chinese
characters as used in Korea), Hangul Jamos, Hiraganas, Katakanas,
Greek and Cyrillic characters and other symbols and letters drawn from
KS X 1001 are represented by two consecutive octets. The first has its
MSB set. Until the mid-1990’s, it took a considerable amount of time
and effort to set up a Korean-capable environment under a non-localized
(non-Korean) operating system. Skim through the now much-outdated
http://jshin.net/faq to get a glimpse of what it was like to use
Korean under non-Korean OS in mid-1990’s. These days all three major
operating systems (Mac OS, Unix, Windows) come equipped with pretty
decent multilingual support and internationalization features so that
editing Korean text file is not so much of a problem anymore, even on
non-Korean operating systems.
2. T
E
X and L
A
T
E
X were originally written for scripts with no more than
256 characters in their alphabet. To make them work for languages with
considerably more characters such as Korean
7
or Chinese, a subfont
6
Considering a number of issues Korean L
A
T
E
X users have to cope with. This section was
written by Karnes KIM on behalf of the Korean lshort translation team. It was translated
into English by SHIN Jungshik and shortened by Tobi Oetiker.
7
Korean Hangul is an alphabetic script with 14 basic consonants and 10 basic vowels
2.5 International Language Support 31
mechanism was developed. It divides a single CJK font with thousands
or tens of thousands of glyphs into a set of subfonts with 256 glyphs
each. For Korean, there are three widely used packages; HL
A
T
E
X by
UN Koaunghi, hL
A
T
E
Xp by CHA Jaechoon and the CJK package by
Werner Lemberg.
8
HL
A
T
E
X and hL
A
T
E
Xp are specific to Korean and
provide Korean localization on top of the font support. They both can
process Korean input text files encoded in EUC-KR. HL
A
T
E
X can even
process input files encoded in CP949/Windows-949/UHC and UTF-8
when used along with Λ or Ω.
The CJK package is not specific to Korean. It can process input files
in UTF-8 as well as in various CJK encodings including EUC-KR and
CP949/Windows-949/UHC, it can be used to typeset documents with
multilingual content (especially Chinese, Japanese and Korean). The
CJK package has no Korean localization such as the one offered by
HL
A
T
E
X and it does not come with as many special Korean fonts as
HL
A
T
E
X.
3. The ultimate purpose of using typesetting programs like T
E
X and
L
A
T
E
X is to get documents typeset in an ‘aesthetically’ satisfying way.
Arguably the most important element in typesetting is a set of well-
designed fonts. The HL
A
T
E
X distribution includes UHC PostScript
fonts of 10 different families and Munhwabu
9
fonts (TrueType) of 5
different families. The CJK package works with a set of fonts used by
earlier versions of HL
A
T
E
X and it can use Bitstream’s cyberbit TrueType
font.
(Jamos). Unlike Latin or Cyrillic scripts, the individual characters have to be arranged in
rectangular clusters about the same size as Chinese characters. Each cluster represents a
syllable. An unlimited number of syllables can be formed out of this finite set of vowels
and consonants. Modern Korean orthographic standards (both in South Korea and North
Korea), however, put some restrictions on the formation of these clusters. Therefore
only a finite number of orthographically correct syllables exist. The Korean Character
encoding defines individual code points for each of these syllables (KS X 1001:1998
and KS X 1002:1992). So Hangul, albeit alphabetic, is treated like the Chinese and
Japanese writing systems with tens of thousands of ideographic/logographic characters.
ISO 10646/Unicode offers both ways of representing Hangul used for modern Korean
by encoding Conjoining Hangul Jamos (alphabets: http://www.unicode.org/charts/
PDF/U1100.pdf) in addition to encoding all the orthographically allowed Hangul syllables
in modern Korean (http://www.unicode.org/charts/PDF/UAC00.pdf). One of the most
daunting challenges in Korean typesetting with L
A
T
E
X and its related typesetting system
is supporting Middle Korean—and possibly future Korean—syllables that can only be
represented by conjoining Jamos in Unicode. It is hoped that future T
E
X engines like Ω
and Λ will eventually provide solutions to this.
8
They can be obtained at language/korean/HLaTeX/
language/korean/CJK/ and http://knot.kaist.ac.kr/htex/
9
Korean Ministry of Culture.
32 Typesetting Text
To use the HL
A
T
E
X package for typesetting your Korean text, put the
following declaration into the preamble of your document:
\usepackage{hangul}
This command turns the Korean localization on. The headings of chapters,
sections, subsections, table of content and table of figures are all translated
into Korean and the formatting of the document is changed to follow Korean
conventions. The package also provides automatic “particle selection.” In
Korean, there are pairs of post-fix particles grammatically equivalent but
different in form. Which of any given pair is correct depends on whether the
preceding syllable ends with a vowel or a consonant. (It is a bit more complex
than this, but this should give you a good picture.) Native Korean speakers
have no problem picking the right particle, but it cannot be determined which
particle to use for references and other automatic text that will change while
you edit the document. It takes a painstaking effort to place appropriate
particles manually every time you add/remove references or simply shuffle
parts of your document around. HL
A
T
E
X relieves its users from this boring
and error-prone process.
If you don’t need Korean localization features but just want to typeset
Korean text, put the following line in the preamble, instead.
\usepackage{hfont}
For more details on typesetting Korean with HL
A
T
E
X, refer to the HL
A
T
E
X
Guide. Check out the web site of the Korean T
E
X User Group (KTUG)
at http://www.ktug.or.kr/. There is also a Korean translation of this
manual available.
2.5.5 Writing in Greek
By Nikolaos Pothitos <pothitos@di.uoa.gr>
See table 2.6 for the preamble you need to write in the Greek language. This
preamble enables hyphenation and changes all automatic text to Greek.
10
A set of new commands also becomes available, which allows you to
write Greek input files more easily. In order to temporarily switch to
English and vice versa, one can use the commands \textlatin{english text}
and \textgreek{greek text} that both take one argument which is then
typeset using the requested font encoding. Otherwise use the command
\selectlanguage{...} described in a previous section. Check out table 2.7
for some Greek punctuation characters. Use \euro for the Euro symbol.
10
If you select the utf8x option for the package inputenc, L
A
T
E
X will understand Greek
and polytonic Greek Unicode characters.
2.5 International Language Support 33
Table 2.6: Preamble for Greek documents.
\usepackage[english,greek]{babel}
\usepackage[iso-8859-7]{inputenc}
Table 2.7: Greek Special Characters.
; ? ;
(( « )) »
‘‘ ‘ ’’ ’
2.5.6 Support for Cyrillic
By Maksym Polyakov <polyama@myrealbox.com>
Version 3.7h of babel includes support for the T2* encodings and for typeset-
ting Bulgarian, Russian and Ukrainian texts using Cyrillic letters.
Support for Cyrillic is based on standard L
A
T
E
X mechanisms plus the
fontenc and inputenc packages. But, if you are going to use Cyrillics in math
mode, you need to load mathtext package before fontenc:
11
\usepackage{mathtext}
\usepackage[T1,T2A]{fontenc}
\usepackage[koi8-ru]{inputenc}
\usepackage[english,bulgarian,russian,ukranian]{babel}
Generally, babel will authomatically choose the default font encoding, for
the above three languages this is T2A. However, documents are not restricted
to a single font encoding. For multi-lingual documents using Cyrillic and
Latin-based languages it makes sense to include Latin font encoding explicitly.
babel will take care of switching to the appropriate font encoding when a
different language is selected within the document.
In addition to enabling hyphenations, translating automatically gener-
ated text strings, and activating some language specific typographic rules
(like \frenchspacing), babel provides some commands allowing typesetting
according to the standards of Bulgarian, Russian, or Ukrainian languages.
For all three languages, language specific punctuation is provided: The
Cyrillic dash for the text (it is little narrower than Latin dash and surrounded
11
If you use A
M
S-L
A
T
E
X packages, load them before fontenc and babel as well.
34 Typesetting Text
by tiny spaces), a dash for direct speech, quotes, and commands to facilitate
hyphenation, see Table 2.8.
Table 2.8: The extra definitions made by Bulgarian, Russian, and Ukrainian
options of babel
"| disable ligature at this position.
"- an explicit hyphen sign, allowing hyphenation in the rest of the word.
"--- Cyrillic emdash in plain text.
"--~ Cyrillic emdash in compound names (surnames).
"--* Cyrillic emdash for denoting direct speech.
"" like "-, but producing no hyphen sign (for compound words with
hyphen, e.g. x-""y or some other signs as “disable/enable”).
"~ for a compound word mark without a breakpoint.
"= for a compound word mark with a breakpoint, allowing hyphenation
in the composing words.
", thinspace for initials with a breakpoint in following surname.
"‘ for German left double quotes (looks like ,,).
"’ for German right double quotes (looks like “).
"< for French left double quotes (looks like <<).
"> for French right double quotes (looks like ).
The Russian and Ukrainian options of babel define the commands \Asbuk
and \asbuk, which act like \Alph and \alph
12
, but produce capital and
small letters of Russian or Ukrainian alphabets (whichever is the active
language of the document). The Bulgarian option of babel provides the
commands \enumBul and \enumLat (\enumEng), which make \Alph and
\alph produce letters of either Bulgarian or Latin (English) alphabets. The
default behaviour of \Alph and \alph for the Bulgarian language option is
to produce letters from the Bulgarian alphabet.
2.5.7 Support for Mongolian
To use L
A
T
E
X for typesetting Mongolian you have a choice between two
packages: Multilingual Babel and MonT
E
X by Oliver Corff.
MonT
E
X includes support for both Cyrillic and traditional Mongolian
Script. In order to access the commands of MonT
E
X, add:
\usepackage[language,encoding]{mls}
to the preamble. Choose the language option xalx to generate captions
and dates in Modern Mongolian. To write a complete document in the
12
the commands for turning counters into a, b, c, . . .
2.5 International Language Support 35
traditional Mongolian script you have to choose bicig for the language option.
The document language option bicig enables the “Simplified Transliteration”
input method.
Enable and disable Latin Transliteration Mode with
\SetDocumentEncodingLMC
and
\SetDocumentEncodingNeutral
More information about MonT
E
X is available from CTAN://language/
mongolian/montex/doc.
Mongolian Cyrillic script is supported by babel. Activate Mongolian
language support with the following commands:
\usepackage[T2A]{fontenc}
\usepackage[mn]{inputenc}
\usepackage[mongolian]{babel}
where mn is the cp1251 input encoding. For a more modern approach invoke
utf8 instead.
2.5.8 The Unicode option
By Axel Kielhorn <A.Kielhorn@web.de>
Unicode is the way to go if you want to include several languages in one
document, especially when these languages are not using the latin script.
There are two T
E
X-engines that are capable of processing Unicode input:
X
E
T
E
X was developed for MacOS X but is now available for all architectures.
It was first included into TexLive 2007.
LuaT
E
X is the successor of pdfT
E
X. It was first included into TexLive 2008.
The following describes X
E
L
A
T
E
X as distributed with TexLive 2010.
Quickstart
To convert an existing L
A
T
E
X file to X
E
L
A
T
E
X the following needs to be done:
1. Save the file as UTF-8
36 Typesetting Text
2. Remove
\usepackage{inputenc}
\usepackage{fontenc}
\usepackage{textcomp}
from the preamble.
3. Change
\usepackage[languageA]{babel}
to
\usepackage{polyglossia}
\setdefaultlanguage[babelshorthands]{languageA}
4. Add
\usepackage[Ligatures=TeX]{fontspec}
to the preamble.
The package polyglossia[19] is a replacement for babel. It takes care of
the hyphenation patterns and automatically generated text strings. The
option babelshorthands enables babel compatible shorthands for german
and catalan.
The package fontspec[21] handles font loading for X
E
L
A
T
E
X and LuaT
E
X.
The default font is Latin Modern Roman. It is a little know fact that some
T
E
X command are ligatures defined in the Computer Modern fonts. If you
want to use them with a non-T
E
X font, you have to fake them. The option
Ligatures=TeX defines the following ligatures:
-- –
--- —
’’ ”
‘‘ “
!‘ ¡
?‘ ¿
,, „
<< «
>> »
2.5 International Language Support 37
It’s all Γρccκ to me
So far there has been no advantage to using a Unicode T
E
X engine. This
changes when we leave the Latin script and move to a more interesting
language like Greek and Russian. With a Unicode based system, you can
simply
13
enter the characters in your editor and T
E
X will understand them.
Writing in different languages is easy, just specify the languages in the
preamble:
\setdefaultlanguage{english}
\setotherlanguage[babelshorthands]{german}
To write a paragraph in German, you can use the German environment:
Englisch text.
\begin{german}
Deutscher Text.
\end{german}
More English text.
If you just need a word in a foreign language you can use the \textlanguage
command:
Englisch text. \textgerman{Gesundheit} is actually a German word.
This may look unnecessary since the only advantage is a correct hyphen-
ation, but when the second language is a little bit more exotic it will be
worth the effort.
Sometimes the font used in the main document does not contain glyphs
that are required in the second language
14
. The solution is to define a font
that will be used for that language. Whenever a new language is activated,
polyglossia will first check whether a font has been defined for that language.
\newfontfamily\russianfont[Script=Cyrillic,(...)]{(font)}
Now you can write
\textrussian{Pravda} is a russian newspaper.
Since this document is written in Latin1-encoding, I cannot show the
actual Cyrillic letters.
The package xgreek[22] offers support for writing either ancient or modern
(monotonic or politonic) greek.
13
For small values of simple.
14
Latin Modern does not contain Cyrillic letters
38 Typesetting Text
Right to Left (RTL) languages.
Some languages are written left to right, others are written right to left(RTL).
polyglossia needs the bidi[23] package
15
in order to support RTL languages.
The bidi package should be the last package you load, even after hyperref
which is usually the last package. (Since polyglossia loads bidi this means
that polyglossia should be the last package loaded.)
The package xepersian[24] offers support for the Persian language. It
supplies Persian L
A
T
E
X-commands that allows you to enter commands like
\section in Persian, which makes this really attractive to native speakers.
xepersian is the only package that supports kashida with X
E
L
A
T
E
X. A package
for Syriac which uses a similar algorithm is under development.
The IranNastaliq font provided by the SCICT
16
is available at their
website http://www.scict.ir/Portal/Home/Default.aspx.
The arabxetex[20] package supports several languages with an Arabic
script:
• arab (Arabic)
• persian
• urdu
• sindhi
• pashto
• ottoman (turk)
• kurdish
• kashmiri
• malay (jawi)
• uighur
It offers a font mapping that enables X
E
L
A
T
E
X to process input using the
ArabT
E
X ASCII transcription.
Fonts that support several Arabic laguages are offered by the IRMUG
17
at http://wiki.irmug.org/index.php/X_Series_2.
There is no package available for Hebrew because none is needed. The
Hebrew support in polyglossia should be sufficient. But you do need a
suitable font with real Unicode Hebrew. SBL Hebrew is free for non-
commercial use and available at http://www.sbl-site.org/educational/
15
bidi does not support LuaT
E
X.
16
Supreme Council of Information and Communication Technology
17
Iranian Mac User Group
2.6 The Space Between Words 39
biblicalfonts.aspx. Another font available under the Open Font License
is Ezra SIL, available at http://www.sil.org/computing/catalog/show_
software.asp?id=76.
Remember to select the correct script:
\newfontfamily\hebrewfont[Script=Hebrew]{SBL Hebrew}
\newfontfamily\hebrewfont[Script=Hebrew]{Ezra SIL}
Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
The package xeCJK[25] takes care of font selection and punctuation of these
languages.
2.6 The Space Between Words
To get a straight right margin in the output, L
A
T
E
X inserts varying amounts
of space between the words. It inserts slightly more space at the end of a
sentence, as this makes the text more readable. L
A
T
E
X assumes that sentences
end with periods, question marks or exclamation marks. If a period follows
an uppercase letter, this is not taken as a sentence ending, since periods after
uppercase letters normally occur in abbreviations.
Any exception from these assumptions has to be specified by the author.
A backslash in front of a space generates a space that will not be enlarged. A
tilde ‘~’ character generates a space that cannot be enlarged and additionally
prohibits a line break. The command \@ in front of a period specifies that
this period terminates a sentence even when it follows an uppercase letter.
Mr.~Smith was happy to see her\\
cf.~Fig.~5\\
I like BASIC\@. What about you?
Mr. Smith was happy to see her
cf. Fig. 5
I like BASIC. What about you?
The additional space after periods can be disabled with the command
\frenchspacing
which tells L
A
T
E
X not to insert more space after a period than after or-
dinary character. This is very common in non-English languages, except
bibliographies. If you use \frenchspacing, the command \@ is not necessary.
40 Typesetting Text
2.7 Titles, Chapters, and Sections
To help the reader find his or her way through your work, you should divide
it into chapters, sections, and subsections. L
A
T
E
X supports this with special
commands that take the section title as their argument. It is up to you to
use them in the correct order.
The following sectioning commands are available for the article class:
\section{...}
\subsection{...}
\subsubsection{...}
\paragraph{...}
\subparagraph{...}
If you want to split your document in parts without influencing the
section or chapter numbering use
\part{...}
When you work with the report or book class, an additional top-level
sectioning command becomes available
\chapter{...}
As the article class does not know about chapters, it is quite easy
to add articles as chapters to a book. The spacing between sections, the
numbering and the font size of the titles will be set automatically by L
A
T
E
X.
Two of the sectioning commands are a bit special:
• The \part command does not influence the numbering sequence of
chapters.
• The \appendix command does not take an argument. It just changes
the chapter numbering to letters.
18
L
A
T
E
X creates a table of contents by taking the section headings and page
numbers from the last compile cycle of the document. The command
\tableofcontents
expands to a table of contents at the place it is issued. A new document
has to be compiled (“L
A
T
E
Xed”) twice to get a correct table of contents.
Sometimes it might be necessary to compile the document a third time.
L
A
T
E
X will tell you when this is necessary.
18
For the article style it changes the section numbering.
2.7 Titles, Chapters, and Sections 41
All sectioning commands listed above also exist as “starred” versions. A
“starred” version of a command is built by adding a star * after the command
name. This generates section headings that do not show up in the table
of contents and are not numbered. The command \section{Help}, for
example, would become \section*{Help}.
Normally the section headings show up in the table of contents exactly
as they are entered in the text. Sometimes this is not possible, because the
heading is too long to fit into the table of contents. The entry for the table
of contents can then be specified as an optional argument in front of the
actual heading.
\chapter[Title for the table of contents]{A long
and especially boring title, shown in the text}
The title of the whole document is generated by issuing a
\maketitle
command. The contents of the title have to be defined by the commands
\title{...}, \author{...} and optionally \date{...}
before calling \maketitle. In the argument to \author, you can supply
several names separated by \and commands.
An example of some of the commands mentioned above can be found in
Figure 1.2 on page 8.
Apart from the sectioning commands explained above, L
A
T
E
X2
ε
intro-
duced three additional commands for use with the book class. They are
useful for dividing your publication. The commands alter chapter headings
and page numbering to work as you would expect in a book:
\frontmatter should be the very first command after the start of the
document body (\begin{document}). It will switch page numbering
to Roman numerals and sections be non-enumerated as if you were
using the starred sectioning commands (eg \chapter*{Preface}) but
the sections will still show up in the table of contents.
\mainmatter comes right before the first chapter of the book. It turns on
Arabic page numbering and restarts the page counter.
\appendix marks the start of additional material in your book. After this
command chapters will be numbered with letters.
\backmatter should be inserted before the very last items in your book,
such as the bibliography and the index. In the standard document
classes, this has no visual effect.
42 Typesetting Text
2.8 Cross References
In books, reports and articles, there are often cross-references to figures,
tables and special segments of text. L
A
T
E
X provides the following commands
for cross referencing
\label{marker}, \ref{marker} and \pageref{marker}
where marker is an identifier chosen by the user. L
A
T
E
X replaces \ref by
the number of the section, subsection, figure, table, or theorem after which
the corresponding \label command was issued. \pageref prints the page
number of the page where the \label command occurred.
19
As with section
titles and page numbers for the table of contents, the numbers from the
previous compile cycle are used.
A reference to this subsection
\label{sec:this} looks like:
‘‘see section~\ref{sec:this} on
page~\pageref{sec:this}.’’
A reference to this subsection looks like:
“see section 2.8 on page 42.”
2.9 Footnotes
With the command
\footnote{footnote text}
a footnote is printed at the foot of the current page. Footnotes should always
be put
20
after the word or sentence they refer to. Footnotes referring to a
sentence or part of it should therefore be put after the comma or period.
21
Footnotes\footnote{This is
a footnote.} are often used
by people using \LaTeX.
Footnotes
a
are often used by people using
L
A
T
E
X.
a
This is a footnote.
19
Note that these commands are not aware of what they refer to. \label just saves the
last automatically generated number.
20
“put” is one of the most common English words.
21
Note that footnotes distract the reader from the main body of your document. After
all, everybody reads the footnotes—we are a curious species, so why not just integrate
everything you want to say into the body of the document?
22
22
A guidepost doesn’t necessarily go where it’s pointing to :-).
2.10 Emphasized Words 43
2.10 Emphasized Words
If a text is typed using a typewriter, important words are emphasized by
underlining them.
\underline{text}
In printed books, however, words are emphasized by typesetting them in
an italic font. L
A
T
E
X provides the command
\emph{text}
to emphasize text. What the command actually does with its argument
depends on the context:
\emph{If you use
emphasizing inside a piece
of emphasized text, then
\LaTeX{} uses the
\emph{normal} font for
emphasizing.}
If you use emphasizing inside a piece of
emphasized text, then L
A
T
E
X uses the nor-
mal font for emphasizing.
2.11 Environments
\begin{environment} text \end{environment}
Where environment is the name of the environment. Environments can be
nested within each other as long as the correct nesting order is maintained.
\begin{aaa}...\begin{bbb}...\end{bbb}...\end{aaa}
In the following sections all important environments are explained.
2.11.1 Itemize, Enumerate, and Description
The itemize environment is suitable for simple lists, the enumerate environ-
ment for enumerated lists, and the description environment for descriptions.
44 Typesetting Text
\flushleft
\begin{enumerate}
\item You can next the list
environments to your taste:
\begin{itemize}
\item But it might start to
look silly.
\item[-] With a dash.
\end{itemize}
\item Therefore remember:
\begin{description}
\item[Stupid] things will not
become smart because they are
in a list.
\item[Smart] things, though,
can be presented beautifully
in a list.
\end{description}
\end{enumerate}
1. You can next the list environments
to your taste:
• But it might start to look
silly.
- With a dash.
2. Therefore remember:
Stupid things will not become
smart because they are in a
list.
Smart things, though, can be
presented beautifully in a list.
2.11.2 Flushleft, Flushright, and Center
The environments flushleft and flushright generate paragraphs that
are either left- or right-aligned. The center environment generates centred
text. If you do not issue \\ to specify line breaks, L
A
T
E
X will automatically
determine line breaks.
\begin{flushleft}
This text is\\ left-aligned.
\LaTeX{} is not trying to make
each line the same length.
\end{flushleft}
This text is
left-aligned. L
A
T
E
X is not trying to make
each line the same length.
\begin{flushright}
This text is right-\\aligned.
\LaTeX{} is not trying to make
each line the same length.
\end{flushright}
This text is right-
aligned. L
A
T
E
X is not trying to make each
line the same length.
\begin{center}
At the centre\\of the earth
\end{center}
At the centre
of the earth
2.11 Environments 45
2.11.3 Quote, Quotation, and Verse
The quote environment is useful for quotes, important phrases and examples.
A typographical rule of thumb
for the line length is:
\begin{quote}
On average, no line should
be longer than 66 characters.
\end{quote}
This is why \LaTeX{} pages have
such large borders by default
and also why multicolumn print
is used in newspapers.
A typographical rule of thumb for the line
length is:
On average, no line should be
longer than 66 characters.
This is why L
A
T
E
X pages have such large
borders by default and also why multicol-
umn print is used in newspapers.
There are two similar environments: the quotation and the verse envi-
ronments. The quotation environment is useful for longer quotes going over
several paragraphs, because it indents the first line of each paragraph. The
verse environment is useful for poems where the line breaks are important.
The lines are separated by issuing a \\ at the end of a line and an empty
line after each verse.
I know only one English poem by
heart. It is about Humpty Dumpty.
\begin{flushleft}
\begin{verse}
Humpty Dumpty sat on a wall:\\
Humpty Dumpty had a great fall.\\
All the King’s horses and all
the King’s men\\
Couldn’t put Humpty together
again.
\end{verse}
\end{flushleft}
I know only one English poem by heart. It
is about Humpty Dumpty.
Humpty Dumpty sat on a
wall:
Humpty Dumpty had a great
fall.
All the King’s horses and all
the King’s men
Couldn’t put Humpty
together again.
2.11.4 Abstract
In scientific publications it is customary to start with an abstract which gives
the reader a quick overview of what to expect. L
A
T
E
X provides the abstract
environment for this purpose. Normally abstract is used in documents
typeset with the article document class.
\begin{abstract}
The abstract abstract.
\end{abstract}
The abstract abstract.
46 Typesetting Text
2.11.5 Printing Verbatim
Text that is enclosed between \begin{verbatim} and \end{verbatim} will
be directly printed, as if typed on a typewriter, with all line breaks and
spaces, without any L
A
T
E
X command being executed.
Within a paragraph, similar behavior can be accessed with
\verb+text+
The + is just an example of a delimiter character. Use any character except
letters, * or space. Many L
A
T
E
X examples in this booklet are typeset with
this command.
The \verb|\ldots| command \ldots
\begin{verbatim}
10 PRINT "HELLO WORLD ";
20 GOTO 10
\end{verbatim}
The \ldots command . . .
10 PRINT "HELLO WORLD ";
20 GOTO 10
\begin{verbatim*}
the starred version of
the verbatim
environment emphasizes
the spaces in the text
\end{verbatim*}
the␣starred␣version␣of
the␣␣␣␣␣␣verbatim
environment␣emphasizes
the␣spaces␣␣␣in␣the␣text
The \verb command can be used in a similar fashion with a star:
\verb*|like this :-) | like␣␣␣this␣:-)␣
The verbatim environment and the \verb command may not be used
within parameters of other commands.
2.11.6 Tabular
The tabular environment can be used to typeset beautiful tables with
optional horizontal and vertical lines. L
A
T
E
X determines the width of the
columns automatically.
The table spec argument of the
\begin{tabular}[pos]{table spec}
command defines the format of the table. Use an l for a column of left-
aligned text, r for right-aligned text, and c for centred text; p{width }
2.11 Environments 47
for a column containing justified text with line breaks, and | for a vertical
line.
If the text in a column is too wide for the page, L
A
T
E
X won’t automatically
wrap it. Using p{width } you can define a special type of column which
will wrap-around the text as in a normal paragraph.
The pos argument specifies the vertical position of the table relative to
the baseline of the surrounding text. Use one of the letters t , b and c to
specify table alignment at the top, bottom or center.
Within a tabular environment, & jumps to the next column, \\ starts
a new line and \hline inserts a horizontal line. Add partial lines by using
\cline{i-,}, where i and , are the column numbers the line should extend
over.
\begin{tabular}{|r|l|}
\hline
7C0 & hexadecimal \\
3700 & octal \\ \cline{2-2}
11111000000 & binary \\
\hline \hline
1984 & decimal \\
\hline
\end{tabular}
7C0 hexadecimal
3700 octal
11111000000 binary
1984 decimal
\begin{tabular}{|p{4.7cm}|}
\hline
Welcome to Boxy’s paragraph.
We sincerely hope you’ll
all enjoy the show.\\
\hline
\end{tabular}
Welcome to Boxy’s paragraph.
We sincerely hope you’ll all en-
joy the show.
The column separator can be specified with the @{...} construct. This
command kills the inter-column space and replaces it with whatever is
between the curly braces. One common use for this command is explained
below in the decimal alignment problem. Another possible application is to
suppress leading space in a table with @{} .
\begin{tabular}{@{} l @{}}
\hline
no leading space\\
\hline
\end{tabular}
no leading space
48 Typesetting Text
\begin{tabular}{l}
\hline
leading space left and right\\
\hline
\end{tabular}
leading space left and right
Since there is no built-in way to align numeric columns to a decimal
point,
23
we can “cheat” and do it by using two columns: a right-aligned integer
and a left-aligned fraction. The @{.} command in the \begin{tabular}
line replaces the normal inter-column spacing with just a “.”, giving the
appearance of a single, decimal-point-justified column. Don’t forget to
replace the decimal point in your numbers with a column separator (&)!
A column label can be placed above our numeric “column” by using the
\multicolumn command.
\begin{tabular}{c r @{.} l}
Pi expression &
\multicolumn{2}{c}{Value} \\
\hline
$\pi$ & 3&1416 \\
$\pi^{\pi}$ & 36&46 \\
$(\pi^{\pi})^{\pi}$ & 80662&7 \\
\end{tabular}
Pi expression Value
π 3.1416
π
π
36.46

π
)
π
80662.7
\begin{tabular}{|c|c|}
\hline
\multicolumn{2}{|c|}{Ene} \\
\hline
Mene & Muh! \\
\hline
\end{tabular}
Ene
Mene Muh!
Material typeset with the tabular environment always stays together on
one page. If you want to typeset long tables, you might want to use the
longtable environments.
Sometimes the default L
A
T
E
X tables do feel a bit cramped. So you
may want to give them a bit more breathing space by setting a higher
\arraystretch and \tabcolsep value.
23
If the ‘tools’ bundle is installed on your system, have a look at the dcolumn package.
2.12 Floating Bodies 49
\begin{tabular}{|l|}
\hline
These lines\\\hline
are tight\\\hline
\end{tabular}
{\renewcommand{\arraystretch}{1.5}
\renewcommand{\tabcolsep}{0.2cm}
\begin{tabular}{|l|}
\hline
less cramped\\\hline
table layout\\\hline
\end{tabular}}
These lines
are tight
less cramped
table layout
If you just want to grow the height of a single row in your table add an
invisible vertical bar
24
. Use a zero width \rule to implement this trick.
\begin{tabular}{|c|}
\hline
\rule{1pt}{4ex}Pitprop \ldots\\
\hline
\rule{0pt}{4ex}Strut\\
\hline
\end{tabular}
Pitprop . . .
Strut
The pt and em in the example above are T
E
X units. Read more on units
in table 6.5 on page 130.
2.12 Floating Bodies
Today most publications contain a lot of figures and tables. These elements
need special treatment, because they cannot be broken across pages. One
method would be to start a new page every time a figure or a table is too
large to fit on the present page. This approach would leave pages partially
empty, which looks very bad.
The solution to this problem is to ‘float’ any figure or table that does not
fit on the current page to a later page, while filling the current page with
body text. L
A
T
E
X offers two environments for floating bodies; one for tables
and one for figures. To take full advantage of these two environments it is
important to understand approximately how L
A
T
E
X handles floats internally.
Otherwise floats may become a major source of frustration, because L
A
T
E
X
never puts them where you want them to be.
Let’s first have a look at the commands L
A
T
E
X supplies for floats:
24
In professional typesetting, this is called a strut.
50 Typesetting Text
Any material enclosed in a figure or table environment will be treated
as floating matter. Both float environments support an optional parameter
\begin{figure}[placement specifier] or \begin{table}[. . . ]
called the placement specifier. This parameter is used to tell L
A
T
E
X about the
locations to which the float is allowed to be moved. A placement specifier is
constructed by building a string of float-placing permissions. See Table 2.9.
For example, a table could be started with the following line
\begin{table}[!hbp]
The placement specifier [!hbp] allows L
A
T
E
X to place the table right here
(h) or at the bottom (b) of some page or on a special floats page (p), and all
this even if it does not look that good (!). If no placement specifier is given,
the standard classes assume [tbp].
L
A
T
E
X will place every float it encounters according to the placement
specifier supplied by the author. If a float cannot be placed on the current
page it is deferred either to the figures queue or the tables queue.
25
When
a new page is started, L
A
T
E
X first checks if it is possible to fill a special
‘float’ page with floats from the queues. If this is not possible, the first float
on each queue is treated as if it had just occurred in the text: L
A
T
E
X tries
again to place it according to its respective placement specifiers (except ‘h,’
which is no longer possible). Any new floats occurring in the text get placed
into the appropriate queues. L
A
T
E
X strictly maintains the original order of
appearance for each type of float. That’s why a figure that cannot be placed
pushes all further figures to the end of the document. Therefore:
If L
A
T
E
X is not placing the floats as you expected, it is often only
one float jamming one of the two float queues.
25
These are FIFO—‘first in first out’—queues!
Table 2.9: Float Placing Permissions.
Spec Permission to place the float . . .
h here at the very place in the text where it oc-
curred. This is useful mainly for small floats.
t at the top of a page
b at the bottom of a page
p on a special page containing only floats.
! without considering most of the internal param-
eters
a
, which could stop this float from being
placed.
a
Such as the maximum number of floats allowed on one page.
2.12 Floating Bodies 51
While it is possible to give L
A
T
E
X single-location placement specifiers,
this causes problems. If the float does not fit in the location specified it
becomes stuck, blocking subsequent floats. In particular, you should never,
ever use the [h] option—it is so bad that in more recent versions of L
A
T
E
X, it
is automatically replaced by [ht].
Having explained the difficult bit, there are some more things to mention
about the table and figure environments. Use the
\caption{caption text}
command to define a caption for the float. A running number and the string
“Figure” or “Table” will be added by L
A
T
E
X.
The two commands
\listoffigures and \listoftables
operate analogously to the \tableofcontents command, printing a list of
figures or tables, respectively. These lists will display the whole caption, so if
you tend to use long captions you must have a shorter version of the caption
for the lists. This is accomplished by entering the short version in brackets
after the \caption command.
\caption[Short]{LLLLLoooooonnnnnggggg}
Use \label and \ref to create a reference to a float within your text.
Note that the \label command must come after the \caption command
since you want it to reference the number of the caption.
The following example draws a square and inserts it into the document.
You could use this if you wanted to reserve space for images you are going
to paste into the finished document.
Figure~\ref{white} is an example of Pop-Art.
\begin{figure}[!hbtp]
\makebox[\textwidth]{\framebox[5cm]{\rule{0pt}{5cm}}}
\caption{Five by Five in Centimetres.\label{white}}
\end{figure}
In the example above, L
A
T
E
X will try real ly hard (!) to place the figure right
here (h).
26
If this is not possible, it tries to place the figure at the bottom (b)
of the page. Failing to place the figure on the current page, it determines
whether it is possible to create a float page containing this figure and maybe
some tables from the tables queue. If there is not enough material for a
26
assuming the figure queue is empty.
52 Typesetting Text
special float page, L
A
T
E
X starts a new page, and once more treats the figure
as if it had just occurred in the text.
Under certain circumstances it might be necessary to use the
\clearpage or even the \cleardoublepage
command. It orders L
A
T
E
X to immediately place all floats remaining in the
queues and then start a new page. \cleardoublepage even goes to a new
right-hand page.
You will learn how to include PostScript drawings in your L
A
T
E
X2
ε
documents later in this introduction.
2.13 Protecting Fragile Commands
Text given as arguments of commands like \caption or \section may show
up more than once in the document (e.g. in the table of contents as well as
in the body of the document). Some commands will break when used in the
argument of \section-like commands. Compilation of your document will
fail. These commands are called fragile commands—for example, \footnote
or \phantom. These fragile commands need protection (don’t we all?).
Protect them by putting the \protect command in front of them. Now they
will work properly even when used in moving arguments.
\protect only refers to the command that follows right behind, not even
to its arguments. In most cases a superfluous \protect won’t hurt.
\section{I am considerate
\protect\footnote{and protect my footnotes}}
Chapter 3
Typesetting Mathematical
Formulae
Now you are ready! In this chapter, we will attack the main strength of T
E
X:
mathematical typesetting. But be warned, this chapter only scratches the surface.
While the things explained here are sufficient for many people, don’t despair
if you can’t find a solution to your mathematical typesetting needs here. It is
highly likely that your problem is addressed in A
M
S-L
A
T
E
X.
3.1 The A
M
S-L
A
T
E
X bundle
If you want to typeset (advanced) mathematics, you should use A
M
S-L
A
T
E
X.
The A
M
S-L
A
T
E
X bundle is a collection of packages and classes for mathemat-
ical typesetting. We will mostly deal with the amsmath package which is a
part of the bundle. A
M
S-L
A
T
E
X is produced by The American Mathematical
Society and it is used extensively for mathematical typesetting. L
A
T
E
X itself
does provide some basic features and environments for mathematics, but they
are limited (or maybe it’s the other way around: A
M
S-L
A
T
E
X is unlimited!)
and in some cases inconsistent.
A
M
S-L
A
T
E
X is a part of the required distribution and is provided with all
recent L
A
T
E
X distributions.
1
In this chapter, we assume amsmath is loaded
in the preamble; \usepackage{amsmath}.
3.2 Single Equations
A mathematical formula can be typeset in-line within a paragraph (text style),
or the paragraph can be broken and the formula typeset separately (display
style). Mathematical equations within a paragraph are entered between $
and $:
1
If yours is missing it, go to CTAN://macros/latex/required/amslatex.
54 Typesetting Mathematical Formulae
Add $a$ squared and $b$ squared
to get $c$ squared. Or, using
a more mathematical approach:
$a^2 + b^2 = c^2$
Add o squared and / squared to get c
squared. Or, using a more mathematical
approach: o
2
+ /
2
= c
2
\TeX{} is pronounced as
$\tau\epsilon\chi$\\[5pt]
100~m$^{3}$ of water\\[5pt]
This comes from my $\heartsuit$
T
E
X is pronounced as τcχ
100 m
3
of water
This comes from my ♥
If you want your larger equations to be set apart from the rest of the
paragraph, it is preferable to display them rather than to break the para-
graph apart. To do this, you enclose them between \begin{equation} and
\end{equation}.
2
You can then \label an equation number and refer to it
somewhere else in the text by using the \eqref command. If you want to
name the equation something specific, you \tag it instead.
Add $a$ squared and $b$ squared
to get $c$ squared. Or, using
a more mathematical approach
\begin{equation}
a^2 + b^2 = c^2
\end{equation}
Einstein says
\begin{equation}
E = mc^2 \label{clever}
\end{equation}
He didn’t say
\begin{equation}
1 + 1 = 3 \tag{dumb}
\end{equation}
This is a reference to
\eqref{clever}.
Add o squared and / squared to get c
squared. Or, using a more mathematical
approach
o
2
+ /
2
= c
2
(3.1)
Einstein says
1 = :c
2
(3.2)
He didn’t say
1 + 1 = 3 (dumb)
This is a reference to (3.2).
If you don’t want L
A
T
E
X to number the equations, use the starred version of
equation using an asterisk, equation*, or even easier, enclose the equation
in \[ and \]:
3
2
This is an amsmath command. If you don’t have access to the package for some obscure
reason, you can use L
A
T
E
X’s own displaymath environment instead.
3
This is again from amsmath. Standard L
A
T
E
X’s has only the equation environment
without the star.
3.2 Single Equations 55
Add $a$ squared and $b$ squared
to get $c$ squared. Or, using
a more mathematical approach
\begin{equation*}
a^2 + b^2 = c^2
\end{equation*}
or you can type less for the
same effect:
\[ a^2 + b^2 = c^2 \]
Add o squared and / squared to get c
squared. Or, using a more mathematical
approach
o
2
+ /
2
= c
2
or you can type less for the same effect:
o
2
+ /
2
= c
2
While \[ is short and sweet, it does not allow switching between numbered
and not numbered style as easily as equation and equation*.
Note the difference in typesetting style between text style and display
style equations:
This is text style:
$\lim_{n \to \infty}
\sum_{k=1}^n \frac{1}{k^2}
= \frac{\pi^2}{6}$.
And this is display style:
\begin{equation}
\lim_{n \to \infty}
\sum_{k=1}^n \frac{1}{k^2}
= \frac{\pi^2}{6}
\end{equation}
This is text style: lim
n→∞

n
k=1
1
k
2
=
π
2
6
.
And this is display style:
lim
n→∞
n

k=1
1
/
2
=
π
2
6
(3.3)
In text style, enclose tall or deep math expressions or sub expressions
in \smash. This makes L
A
T
E
X ignore the height of these expressions. This
keeps the line spacing even.
A $d_{e_{e_p}}$ mathematical
expression followed by a
$h^{i^{g^h}}$ expression. As
opposed to a smashed
\smash{$d_{e_{e_p}}$} expression
followed by a
\smash{$h^{i^{g^h}}$} expression.
A d
e
e
p
mathematical expression followed
by a /
i
g
h
expression. As opposed to a
smashed d
e
e
p
expression followed by a /
i
g
h
expression.
3.2.1 Math Mode
There are also differences between math mode and text mode. For example,
in math mode:
1. Most spaces and line breaks do not have any significance, as all spaces
are either derived logically from the mathematical expressions, or have
to be specified with special commands such as \,, \quad or \qquad
(we’ll get back to that later, see section 3.7).
56 Typesetting Mathematical Formulae
2. Empty lines are not allowed. Only one paragraph per formula.
3. Each letter is considered to be the name of a variable and will be
typeset as such. If you want to typeset normal text within a formula
(normal upright font and normal spacing) then you have to enter the
text using the \text{...} command (see also section 3.8 on page 70).
$\forall x \in \mathbf{R}:
\qquad x^{2} \geq 0$
∀r ∈ R : r
2
≥ 0
$x^{2} \geq 0\qquad
\text{for all }x\in\mathbf{R}$
r
2
≥ 0 for all r ∈ R
Mathematicians can be very fussy about which symbols are used: it would
be conventional here to use the ‘blackboard bold’ font, which is obtained
using \mathbb from the package amssymb.
4
The last example becomes
$x^{2} \geq 0\qquad
\text{for all } x
\in \mathbb{R}$
r
2
≥ 0 for all r ∈ 1
See Table 3.14 on page 79 and Table 6.4 on page 125 for more math fonts.
3.3 Building Blocks of a Mathematical Formula
In this section, we describe the most important commands used in mathe-
matical typesetting. Most of the commands in this section will not require
amsmath (if they do, it will be stated clearly), but load it anyway.
Lowercase Greek letters are entered as \alpha, \beta, \gamma, . . . ,
uppercase letters are entered as \Gamma, \Delta, . . .
5
Take a look at Table 3.2 on page 75 for a list of Greek letters.
$\lambda,\xi,\pi,\theta,
\mu,\Phi,\Omega,\Delta$
λ, ξ, π, θ, j, Φ, Ω, ∆
Exponents, Superscripts and Subscripts can be specified using the
^ and the _ characters. Most math mode commands act only on the next
character, so if you want a command to affect several characters, you have
to group them together using curly braces: {...}.
4
amssymb is not a part of the A
M
S-L
A
T
E
X bundle, but it is perhaps still a part of your
L
A
T
E
X distribution. Check your distribution or go to CTAN:/fonts/amsfonts/latex/ to
obtain it.
5
There is no uppercase Alpha, Beta etc. defined in L
A
T
E
X2
ε
because it looks the same
as a normal roman A, B. . .
3.3 Building Blocks of a Mathematical Formula 57
Table 3.3 on page 76 lists a lot of binary relations like ⊆ and ⊥.
$p^3_{ij} \qquad
m_\text{Knuth}\qquad
\sum_{k=1}^3 k \\[5pt]
a^x+y \neq a^{x+y}\qquad
e^{x^2} \neq {e^x}^2$
j
3
ij
:
Knuth

3
k=1
/
o
x
+ j ,= o
x+y
c
x
2
,= c
x2
The square root is entered as \sqrt; the n
th
root is generated with
\sqrt[n]. The size of the root sign is determined automatically by L
A
T
E
X.
If just the sign is needed, use \surd.
See various kinds of arrows like → and = on Table 3.6 on page 77.
$\sqrt{x} \Leftrightarrow x^{1/2}
\quad \sqrt[3]{2}
\quad \sqrt{x^{2} + \sqrt{y}}
\quad \surd[x^2 + y^2]$

r ⇔r
1/2 3

2
_
r
2
+

j

[r
2
+j
2
]
While the dot sign to indicate the multiplication operation is normally
left out, it is sometimes written to help the eye in grouping a formula. Use
\cdot to typeset a single centered dot. \cdots is three centered dots while
\ldots sets the dots low (on the baseline). Besides that, there are \vdots
for vertical and \ddots for diagonal dots. There are more examples in
section 3.6.
$\Psi = v_1 \cdot v_2
\cdot \ldots \qquad
n! = 1 \cdot 2
\cdots (n-1) \cdot n$
Ψ = ·
1
·
2
. . . n! = 1 2 (n −1) n
The commands \overline and \underline create horizontal lines
directly over or under an expression:
$0.\overline{3} =
\underline{\underline{1/3}}$
0.3 = 1,3
The commands \overbrace and \underbrace create long horizontal
braces over or under an expression:
$\underbrace{\overbrace{a+b+c}^6
\cdot \overbrace{d+e+f}^9}
_\text{meaning of life} = 42$
6
¸ .. ¸
o + / + c
9
¸ .. ¸
d + c + )
. ¸¸ .
meaning of life
= 42
To add mathematical accents such as small arrows or tilde signs to
variables, the commands given in Table 3.1 on page 75 might be useful. Wide
58 Typesetting Mathematical Formulae
hats and tildes covering several characters are generated with \widetilde
and \widehat. Notice the difference between \hat and \widehat and the
placement of \bar for a variable with subscript. The apostrophe mark ’
gives a prime:
$f(x) = x^2 \qquad f’(x)
= 2x \qquad f’’(x) = 2\\[5pt]
\hat{XY} \quad \widehat{XY}
\quad \bar{x_0} \quad \bar{x}_0$
)(r) = r
2
)

(r) = 2r )

(r) = 2
ˆ
AY
¯
AY ¯ r
0
¯ r
0
Vectors are often specified by adding small arrow symbols on the tops
of variables. This is done with the \vec command. The two commands
\overrightarrow and \overleftarrow are useful to denote the vector from
¹ to 1:
$\vec{a} \qquad
\vec{AB} \qquad
\overrightarrow{AB}$
o

¹1
−−→
¹1
Names of functions are often typeset in an upright font, and not in italics
as variables are, so L
A
T
E
X supplies the following commands to typeset the
most common function names:
\arccos \cos \csc \exp \ker \limsup
\arcsin \cosh \deg \gcd \lg \ln
\arctan \cot \det \hom \lim \log
\arg \coth \dim \inf \liminf \max
\sinh \sup \tan \tanh \min \Pr
\sec \sin
\begin{equation*}
\lim_{x \rightarrow 0}
\frac{\sin x}{x}=1
\end{equation*}
lim
x→0
sin r
r
= 1
For functions missing from the list, use the \DeclareMathOperator
command. There is even a starred version for functions with limits. This
command works only in the preamble so the commented lines in the example
below must be put into the preamble.
%\DeclareMathOperator{\argh}{argh}
%\DeclareMathOperator*{\nut}{Nut}
\begin{equation*}
3\argh = 2\nut_{x=1}
\end{equation*}
3 argh = 2 Nut
x=1
For the modulo function, there are two commands: \bmod for the binary
operator “o mod /” and \pmod for expressions such as “r ≡ o (mod /):”
3.3 Building Blocks of a Mathematical Formula 59
$a\bmod b \\
x\equiv a \pmod{b}$
o mod /
r ≡ o (mod /)
A built-up fraction is typeset with the \frac{...}{...} command. In
in-line equations, the fraction is shrunk to fit the line. This style is obtainable
in display style with \tfrac. The reverse, i.e. display style fraction in text,
is made with \dfrac. Often the slashed form 1,2 is preferable, because it
looks better for small amounts of ‘fraction material:’
In display style:
\begin{equation*}
3/8 \qquad \frac{3}{8}
\qquad \tfrac{3}{8}
\end{equation*}
In display style:
3,8
3
8
3
8
In text style:
$1\frac{1}{2}$~hours \qquad
$1\dfrac{1}{2}$~hours
In text style: 1
1
2
hours 1
1
2
hours
Here the \partial command for partial derivatives is used:
\begin{equation*}
\sqrt{\frac{x^2}{k+1}}\qquad
x^\frac{2}{k+1}\qquad
\frac{\partial^2f}
{\partial x^2}
\end{equation*}
_
r
2
/ + 1
r
2
k+1

2
)
∂r
2
To typeset binomial coefficients or similar structures, use the command
\binom from amsmath:
Pascal’s rule is
\begin{equation*}
\binom{n}{k} =\binom{n-1}{k}
+ \binom{n-1}{k-1}
\end{equation*}
Pascal’s rule is
_
n
/
_
=
_
n −1
/
_
+
_
n −1
/ −1
_
For binary relations it may be useful to stack symbols over each other.
\stackrel{#1}{#2} puts the symbol given in #1 in superscript-like size over
#2 which is set in its usual position.
\begin{equation*}
f_n(x) \stackrel{*}{\approx} 1
\end{equation*}
)
n
(r)

≈ 1
60 Typesetting Mathematical Formulae
The integral operator is generated with \int, the sum operator with
\sum, and the product operator with \prod. The upper and lower limits
are specified with ^ and _ like subscripts and superscripts:
\begin{equation*}
\sum_{i=1}^n \qquad
\int_0^{\frac{\pi}{2}} \qquad
\prod_\epsilon
\end{equation*}
n

i=1
_ π
2
0

To get more control over the placement of indices in complex expressions,
amsmath provides the \substack command:
\begin{equation*}
\sum^n_{\substack{0<i<n \\
j\subseteq i}}
P(i,j) = Q(i,j)
\end{equation*}
n

0<i<n
j⊆i
1(i, ,) = Q(i, ,)
L
A
T
E
X provides all sorts of symbols for bracketing and other delim-
iters (e.g. [ ¸ | ¸). Round and square brackets can be entered with the
corresponding keys and curly braces with \{, but all other delimiters are
generated with special commands (e.g. \updownarrow).
\begin{equation*}
{a,b,c} \neq \{a,b,c\}
\end{equation*}
o, /, c ,= ¦o, /, c¦
If you put \left in front of an opening delimiter and \right in front of
a closing delimiter, L
A
T
E
X will automatically determine the correct size of
the delimiter. Note that you must close every \left with a corresponding
\right. If you don’t want anything on the right, use the invisible “\right.”:
\begin{equation*}
1 + \left(\frac{1}{1-x^{2}}
\right)^3 \qquad
\left. \ddagger \frac{~}{~}\right)
\end{equation*}
1 +
_
1
1 −r
2
_
3

_
In some cases it is necessary to specify the correct size of a mathematical
delimiter by hand, which can be done using the commands \big, \Big, \bigg
and \Bigg as prefixes to most delimiter commands:
$\Big((x+1)(x-1)\Big)^{2}$\\
$\big( \Big( \bigg( \Bigg( \quad
\big\} \Big\} \bigg\} \Bigg\} \quad
\big\| \Big\| \bigg\| \Bigg\| \quad
\big\Downarrow \Big\Downarrow
\bigg\Downarrow \Bigg\Downarrow$
_
(r + 1)(r −1)
_
2
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
3.4 Single Equations that are Too Long: multline 61
For a list of all delimiters available, see Table 3.8 on page 78.
3.4 Single Equations that are Too Long: multline
If an equation is too long, we have to wrap it somehow. Unfortunately,
wrapped equations are usually less easy to read than not wrapped ones. To
improve the readability, there are certain rules on how to do the wrapping:
1. In general one should always wrap an equation before an equality sign
or an operator.
2. A wrap before an equality sign is preferable to a wrap before any
operator.
3. A wrap before a plus- or minus-operator is preferable to a wrap before
a multiplication-operator.
4. Any other type of wrap should be avoided if at all possible.
The easiest way to achieve such a wrapping is the use of the multline
environment:
6
\begin{multline}
a + b + c + d + e + f
+ g + h + i
\\
= j + k + l + m + n
\end{multline}
o + / + c + d + c + ) + p + / + i
= , + / + | + : + n (3.4)
The difference from the equation environment is that an arbitrary line-break
(or also multiple line-breaks) can be introduced. This is done by putting a
\\ on those places where the equation needs to be wrapped. Similarly to
equation* there also exists a multline* version for preventing an equation
number.
Often the IEEEeqnarray environment (see section 3.5) will yield better
results. Consider the following situation:
\begin{equation}
a = b + c + d + e + f
+ g + h + i + j
+ k + l + m + n + o + p
\label{eq:equation_too_long}
\end{equation}
o = /+c+d+c+)+p+/+i+,+/+|+:+n+o+j
(3.5)
Here it is actually the RHS that is too long to fit on one line. The multline
environment creates the following output:
6
The multline-environment is from amsmath.
62 Typesetting Mathematical Formulae
\begin{multline}
a = b + c + d + e + f
+ g + h + i + j \\
+ k + l + m + n + o + p
\end{multline}
o = / + c + d + c + ) + p + / + i + ,
+ / + | + : + n + o + j (3.6)
This is better than (3.5), but it has the disadvantage that the equality
sign loses its natural greater importance with respect to the plus operator in
front of /. The better solution is provided by the IEEEeqnarray environment
that will be discussed in detail in Section 3.5.
3.5 Multiple Equations
In the most general situation we have a sequence of several equalities that
do not fit onto one line. Here we need to work with vertical alignment in
order to keep the array of equations in a nice and readable structure.
Before we offer our suggestions on how to do this, we start with a few
bad examples that show the biggest drawbacks of some common solutions.
3.5.1 Problems with Traditional Commands
To group multiple equations the align environment
7
could be used:
\begin{align}
a & = b + c \\
& = d + e
\end{align}
o = / + c (3.7)
= d + c (3.8)
this approach fails once a single line is too long:
\begin{align}
a & = b + c \\
& = d + e + f + g + h + i
+ j + k + l \nonumber \\
& + m + n + o \\
& = p + q + r + s
\end{align}
o = / + c (3.9)
= d + c + ) + p + / + i + , + / + |
+ : + n + o (3.10)
= j + ¡ + : + : (3.11)
Here +: should be below d and not below the equality sign. Of course, one
could add some space (\hspace{...}), but this will never yield a precise
arrangement (and is bad style. . . ).
A better solution is offered by the eqnarray environment:
7
The align-environment can also be used to group several blocks of equations beside
each other. Another excellent use case for the IEEEeqnarray environment. Try an argument
like {rCl+rCl}.
3.5 Multiple Equations 63
\begin{eqnarray}
a & = & b + c \\
& = & d + e + f + g + h + i
+ j + k + l \nonumber \\
&& +\: m + n + o \\
& = & p + q + r + s
\end{eqnarray}
o = / + c (3.12)
= d + c + ) + p + / + i + , + / + |
+ : + n + o (3.13)
= j + ¡ + : + : (3.14)
This is still not optimal though as he spaces around the equality signs
are too big. Particularly, they are not the same as in the multline and
equation environments:
\begin{eqnarray}
a & = & a = a
\end{eqnarray}
o = o = o (3.15)
. . . and the expression sometimes overlaps with the equation number even
though there would be enough room on the left:
\begin{eqnarray}
a & = & b + c
\\
& = & d + e + f + g + h^2
+ i^2 + j
\label{eq:faultyeqnarray}
\end{eqnarray}
o = / + c (3.16)
= d + c + ) + p + /
2
+ i
2
+ , (3.17)
While the environment offers a command \lefteqn that can be used when
the LHS is too long:
\begin{eqnarray}
\lefteqn{a + b + c + d
+ e + f + g + h}\nonumber\\
& = & i + j + k + l + m
\\
& = & n + o + p + q + r + s
\end{eqnarray}
o + / + c + d + c + ) + p + /
= i + , + / + | + : (3.18)
= n + o + j + ¡ + : + : (3.19)
this is not optimal either as the RHS is too short and the array is not properly
centered:
\begin{eqnarray}
\lefteqn{a + b + c + d
+ e + f + g + h}
\nonumber \\
& = & i + j
\end{eqnarray}
o + / + c + d + c + ) + p + /
= i + , (3.20)
64 Typesetting Mathematical Formulae
having badmouthed the competition sufficiently, I can now stear you gently
towards the glorious . . .
3.5.2 IEEEeqnarray Environment
The IEEEeqnarray environment is a very powerful command with many
options. Here, we will only introduce its basic functionalities. For more
information we refer to the manual.
8
First of all, in order to be able to use the IEEEeqnarray environment
one needs to load the package
9
IEEEtrantools. Include the following line in
the header of your document:
\usepackage[retainorgcmds]{IEEEtrantools}
The strength of IEEEeqnarray is the ability to specify the number of
columns in the equation array. Usually, this specification will be {rCl},
i.e., three columns, the first column right-justified, the middle one centered
with a little more space around it (therefore we specify capital C instead of
lower-case c) and the third column left-justified:
\begin{IEEEeqnarray}{rCl}
a & = & b + c
\\
& = & d + e + f + g + h
+ i + j + k \nonumber\\
&& +\: l + m + n + o
\\
& = & p + q + r + s
\end{IEEEeqnarray}
o = / + c (3.21)
= d + c + ) + p + / + i + , + /
+ | + : + n + o (3.22)
= j + ¡ + : + : (3.23)
any number of columns can be specified: {c} will give only one column
with all entries centered, or {rCll} would add a fourth, left-justified column
to use for comments. Moreover, beside l, c, r, L, C, R for math mode
entries there are also s, t, u for left, centered, and right text mode entries.
Additional space can be added with . and / and ? in increasing order.
10
Note the spaces around the equality signs in contrast to the space produced
by the eqnarray environment.
3.5.3 Common Usage
In the following we will describe how we use IEEEeqnarray to solve the most
common problems.
If a line overlaps with the equation number as in (3.17), the command
8
The official manual is called IEEEtran_HOWTO.pdf. The part about IEEEeqnarray can
be found in Appendix F.
9
The IEEEtrantools package may not be included in your setup, it can be found on
CTAN.
10
For more spacing types refer to Section 3.9.1.
3.5 Multiple Equations 65
\IEEEeqnarraynumspace
can be used: it has to be added in the corresponding line and makes sure
that the whole equation array is shifted by the size of the equation numbers
(the shift depends on the size of the number!): instead of
\begin{IEEEeqnarray}{rCl}
a & = & b + c
\\
& = & d + e + f + g + h
+ i + j + k
\\
& = & l + m + n
\end{IEEEeqnarray}
o = / + c (3.24)
= d + c + ) + p + / + i + , + / (3.25)
= | + : + n (3.26)
we get
\begin{IEEEeqnarray}{rCl}
a & = & b + c
\\
& = & d + e + f + g + h
+ i + j + k
\IEEEeqnarraynumspace\\
& = & l + m + n.
\end{IEEEeqnarray}
o = / + c (3.27)
= d + c + ) + p + / + i + , + / (3.28)
= | + : + n. (3.29)
If the LHS is too long, as a replacement for the faulty \lefteqn command,
IEEEeqnarray offers the \IEEEeqnarraymulticol command which works
in all situations:
\begin{IEEEeqnarray}{rCl}
\IEEEeqnarraymulticol{3}{l}{
a + b + c + d + e + f
+ g + h
}\nonumber\\ \quad
& = & i + j
\\
& = & k + l + m
\end{IEEEeqnarray}
o + / + c + d + c + ) + p + /
= i + , (3.30)
= / + | + : (3.31)
The usage is identical to the \multicolumns command in the tabular-
environment. The first argument {3} specifies that three columns shall be
combined into one which will be left-justified {l}.
Note that by inserting \quad commands one can easily adapt the depth
of the equation signs,
11
e.g.,
11
I think that one quad is the distance that looks good for most cases.
66 Typesetting Mathematical Formulae
\begin{IEEEeqnarray}{rCl}
\IEEEeqnarraymulticol{3}{l}{
a + b + c + d + e + f
+ g + h
}\nonumber\\ \qquad\qquad
& = & i + j
\\
& = & k + l + m
\end{IEEEeqnarray}
o + / + c + d + c + ) + p + /
= i + , (3.32)
= / + | + : (3.33)
If an equation is split into two or more lines, L
A
T
E
X interprets the first
+ or − as a sign instead of operator. Therefore, it is necessary to add an
additional space \: between the operator and the term: instead of
\begin{IEEEeqnarray}{rCl}
a & = & b + c
\\
& = & d + e + f + g + h
+ i + j + k \nonumber\\
&& + l + m + n + o
\\
& = & p + q + r + s
\end{IEEEeqnarray}
o = / + c (3.34)
= d + c + ) + p + / + i + , + /
+| + : + n + o (3.35)
= j + ¡ + : + : (3.36)
we should write
\begin{IEEEeqnarray}{rCl}
a & = & b + c
\\
& = & d + e + f + g + h
+ i + j + k \nonumber\\
&& +\: l + m + n + o
\\
& = & p + q + r + s
\end{IEEEeqnarray}
o = / + c (3.37)
= d + c + ) + p + / + i + , + /
+ | + : + n + o (3.38)
= j + ¡ + : + : (3.39)
Note the space difference between + and |!
And sometimes spacing just work e.g., in front of
• an operator name like \log, \sin, \det, \max, etc.,
• an integral \int or sum \sum,
• a bracket with adaptive size using \left and \right (this is in contrast
to normal brackets or brackets with fixed size like \big( ),
a + or − cannot be a sign, but must be an operator. In those situations
L
A
T
E
X will add the correct spacing and no additional space is needed.
If a particular line should not have an equation number, the number
can be suppressed using \nonumber (or \IEEEnonumber). If on such a line a
3.6 Arrays and Matrices 67
label \label{eq:...} is defined, then this label is passed on further to the
next equation number that is not suppressed. Place the labels right before
the line-break \\ or the next to the equation it belongs to. Apart from
improving the readability of the source code this prevents a compilation error
in the situation of a \IEEEmulticol command after the label-definition.
There also exists a *-version where all equation numbers are suppressed.
In this case an equation number can be made to appear using the command
\IEEEyesnumber:
\begin{IEEEeqnarray*}{rCl}
a & = & b + c \\
& = & d + e \IEEEyesnumber\\
& = & f + g
\end{IEEEeqnarray*}
o = / + c
= d + c (3.40)
= ) + p
Sub-numbers are also easily possible using \IEEEyessubnumber:
\begin{IEEEeqnarray}{rCl}
a & = & b + c
\IEEEyessubnumber\\
& = & d + e
\nonumber\\
& = & f + g
\IEEEyessubnumber
\end{IEEEeqnarray}
o = / + c (3.41a)
= d + c
= ) + p (3.41b)
3.6 Arrays and Matrices
To typeset arrays, use the array environment. It works somewhat similar
to the tabular environment. The \\ command is used to break the lines:
\begin{equation*}
\mathbf{X} = \left(
\begin{array}{ccc}
x_1 & x_2 & \ldots \\
x_3 & x_4 & \ldots \\
\vdots & \vdots & \ddots
\end{array} \right)
\end{equation*}
X =
_
_
_
r
1
r
2
. . .
r
3
r
4
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
_
_
_
The array environment can also be used to typeset piecewise functions
by using a “.” as an invisible \right delimiter:
68 Typesetting Mathematical Formulae
\begin{equation*}
|x| = \left\{
\begin{array}{rl}
-x & \text{if } x < 0,\\
0 & \text{if } x = 0,\\
x & \text{if } x > 0.
\end{array} \right.
\end{equation*}
[r[ =
_
_
_
−r if r < 0,
0 if r = 0,
r if r 0.
The cases environment from amsmath simplifies the syntax, so it is worth
a look:
\begin{equation*}
|x| =
\begin{cases}
-x & \text{if } x < 0,\\
0 & \text{if } x = 0,\\
x & \text{if } x > 0.
\end{cases}
\end{equation*}
[r[ =
_
¸
_
¸
_
−r if r < 0,
0 if r = 0,
r if r 0.
Matrices can be typeset by array, but amsmath provides a better solution
using the different matrix environments. There are six versions with different
delimiters: matrix (none), pmatrix (, bmatrix [, Bmatrix ¦, vmatrix [ and
Vmatrix |. You don’t have to specify the number of columns as with array.
The maximum number is 10, but it is customisable (though it is not very
often you need 10 columns!):
\begin{equation*}
\begin{matrix}
1 & 2 \\
3 & 4
\end{matrix} \qquad
\begin{bmatrix}
p_{11} & p_{12} & \ldots
& p_{1n} \\
p_{21} & p_{22} & \ldots
& p_{2n} \\
\vdots & \vdots & \ddots
& \vdots \\
p_{m1} & p_{m2} & \ldots
& p_{mn}
\end{bmatrix}
\end{equation*}
1 2
3 4
_
¸
¸
¸
_
j
11
j
12
. . . j
1n
j
21
j
22
. . . j
2n
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
j
m1
j
m2
. . . j
mn
_
¸
¸
¸
_
3.7 Spacing in Math Mode 69
3.7 Spacing in Math Mode
If the spacing within formulae chosen by L
A
T
E
X is not satisfactory, it can be
adjusted by inserting special spacing commands: \, for
3
18
quad ( ), \: for
4
18
quad ( ) and \; for
5
18
quad ( ). The escaped space character \␣ generates
a medium sized space comparable to the interword spacing and \quad ( )
and \qquad ( ) produce large spaces. The size of a \quad corresponds
to the width of the character ‘M’ of the current font. \! produces a negative
space of −
3
18
quad (−).
\begin{equation*}
\int_1^2 \ln x \mathrm{d}x
\qquad
\int_1^2 \ln x \,\mathrm{d}x
\end{equation*}
_
2
1
ln rdr
_
2
1
ln rdr
Note that ‘d’ in the differential is conventionally set in roman. In the
next example, we define a new command \ud (upright d) which produces “ d”
(notice the spacing before the d), so we don’t have to write it every time.
The \newcommand is placed in the preamble.
\newcommand{\ud}{\,\mathrm{d}}
\begin{equation*}
\int_a^b f(x)\ud x
\end{equation*}
_
b
a
)(r) dr
If you want to typeset multiple integrals, you’ll discover that the spacing
between the integrals is too wide. You can correct it using \!, but amsmath
provides an easier way for fine-tuning the spacing, namely the \iint, \iiint,
\iiiint, and \idotsint commands.
\newcommand{\ud}{\,\mathrm{d}}
\begin{IEEEeqnarray*}{c}
\int\int f(x)g(y)
\ud x \ud y \\
\int\!\!\!\int
f(x)g(y) \ud x \ud y \\
\iint f(x)g(y) \ud x \ud y
\end{IEEEeqnarray*}
_ _
)(r)p(j) drdj
__
)(r)p(j) drdj
__
)(r)p(j) drdj
See the electronic document testmath.tex (distributed with A
M
S-L
A
T
E
X)
or Chapter 8 of The L
A
T
E
X Companion [3] for further details.
70 Typesetting Mathematical Formulae
3.7.1 Phantoms
When vertically aligning text using ^ and _ L
A
T
E
X is sometimes just a little too
helpful. Using the \phantom command you can reserve space for characters
that do not show up in the final output. The easiest way to understand this
is to look at an example:
\begin{equation*}
{}^{14}_{6}\text{C}
\qquad \text{versus} \qquad
{}^{14}_{\phantom{1}6}\text{C}
\end{equation*}
14
6
C versus
14
6
C
If you want to typeset a lot of isotopes as in the example, the mhchem
package is very useful for typesetting isotopes and chemical formulae too.
3.8 Fiddling with the Math Fonts
Different math fonts are listed on Table 3.14 on page 79.
$\Re \qquad
\mathcal{R} \qquad
\mathfrak{R} \qquad
\mathbb{R} \qquad $
' R R 1
The last two require amssymb or amsfonts.
Sometimes you need to tell L
A
T
E
X the correct font size. In math mode,
this is set with the following four commands:
\displaystyle (123), \textstyle (123), \scriptstyle (123) and
\scriptscriptstyle (123).
If

is placed in a fraction, it’ll be typeset in text style unless you tell
L
A
T
E
X otherwise:
\begin{equation*}
P = \frac{\displaystyle{
\sum_{i=1}^n (x_i- x)
(y_i- y)}}
{\displaystyle{\left[
\sum_{i=1}^n(x_i-x)^2
\sum_{i=1}^n(y_i- y)^2
\right]^{1/2}}}
\end{equation*}
1 =
n

i=1
(r
i
−r)(j
i
−j)
_
n

i=1
(r
i
−r)
2
n

i=1
(j
i
−j)
2
_
1/2
Changing styles generally affects the way big operators and limits are
displayed.
3.9 Theorems, Lemmas, . . . 71
3.8.1 Bold Symbols
It is quite difficult to get bold symbols in L
A
T
E
X; this is probably intentional
as amateur typesetters tend to overuse them. The font change command
\mathbf gives bold letters, but these are roman (upright) whereas math-
ematical symbols are normally italic, and furthermore it doesn’t work on
lower case Greek letters. There is a \boldmath command, but this can only
be used outside math mode. It works for symbols too, though:
$\mu, M \qquad
\mathbf{\mu}, \mathbf{M}$
\qquad \boldmath{$\mu, M$}
j, ` j, M µ, M
The package amsbsy (included by amsmath) as well as the package bm
from the tools bundle make this much easier as they include a \boldsymbol
command:
$\mu, M \qquad
\boldsymbol{\mu}, \boldsymbol{M}$
j, ` µ, M
3.9 Theorems, Lemmas, . . .
When writing mathematical documents, you probably need a way to typeset
“Lemmas”, “Definitions”, “Axioms” and similar structures.
\newtheorem{name}[counter]{text}[section]
The name argument is a short keyword used to identify the “theorem”.
With the text argument you define the actual name of the “theorem”, which
will be printed in the final document.
The arguments in square brackets are optional. They are both used to
specify the numbering used on the “theorem”. Use the counter argument to
specify the name of a previously declared “theorem”. The new “theorem”
will then be numbered in the same sequence. The section argument allows
you to specify the sectional unit within which the “theorem” should get its
numbers.
After executing the \newtheorem command in the preamble of your
document, you can use the following command within the document.
\begin{name}[text]
This is my interesting theorem
\end{name}
The amsthm package (part of A
M
S-L
A
T
E
X) provides the \theoremstyle{style}
command which lets you define what the theorem is all about by picking
72 Typesetting Mathematical Formulae
from three predefined styles: definition (fat title, roman body), plain (fat
title, italic body) or remark (italic title, roman body).
This should be enough theory. The following examples should remove
any remaining doubt, and make it clear that the \newtheorem environment
is way too complex to understand.
First define the theorems:
\theoremstyle{definition} \newtheorem{law}{Law}
\theoremstyle{plain} \newtheorem{jury}[law]{Jury}
\theoremstyle{remark} \newtheorem*{marg}{Margaret}
\begin{law} \label{law:box}
Don’t hide in the witness box
\end{law}
\begin{jury}[The Twelve]
It could be you! So beware and
see law~\ref{law:box}.\end{jury}
\begin{marg}No, No, No\end{marg}
Law 1. Don’t hide in the witness box
Jury 2 (The Twelve). It could be you! So
beware and see law 1.
Margaret. No, No, No
The “Jury” theorem uses the same counter as the “Law” theorem, so it
gets a number that is in sequence with the other “Laws”. The argument in
square brackets is used to specify a title or something similar for the theorem.
\newtheorem{mur}{Murphy}[section]
\begin{mur} If there are two or
more ways to do something, and
one of those ways can result in
a catastrophe, then someone
will do it.\end{mur}
Murphy 3.9.1. If there are two or more
ways to do something, and one of those
ways can result in a catastrophe, then
someone will do it.
The “Murphy” theorem gets a number that is linked to the number of
the current section. You could also use another unit, for example chapter or
subsection.
If you want to customize your theorems down to the last dot, the ntheorem
package offers a plethora of options.
3.9.1 Proofs and End-of-Proof Symbol
The amsthm package also provides the proof environment.
\begin{proof}
Trivial, use
\begin{equation*}
E=mc^2.
\end{equation*}
\end{proof}
Proof. Trivial, use
1 = :c
2
.
3.9 Theorems, Lemmas, . . . 73
With the command \qedhere you can move the ‘end of proof’ symbol
around for situations where it would end up alone on a line.
\begin{proof}
Trivial, use
\begin{equation*}
E=mc^2. \qedhere
\end{equation*}
\end{proof}
Proof. Trivial, use
1 = :c
2
.
Unfortunately, this correction does not work for IEEEeqnarray:
\begin{proof}
This is a proof that ends
with an equation array:
\begin{IEEEeqnarray*}{rCl}
a & = & b + c \\
& = & d + e. \qedhere
\end{IEEEeqnarray*}
\end{proof}
Proof. This is a proof that ends with an
equation array:
o = / + c
= d + c.
The reason for this is the internal structure of IEEEeqnarray: it always
puts two invisible columns at both sides of the array that only contain a
stretchable space. By this IEEEeqnarray ensures that the equation array
is horizontally centered. The \qedhere command should actually be put
outside this stretchable space, but this does not happen as these columns
are invisible to the user.
There is a very simple remedy. Define the stretching explicitly!
\begin{proof}
This is a proof that ends
with an equation array:
\begin{IEEEeqnarray*}{+rCl+x*}
a & = & b + c \\
& = & d + e. & \qedhere
\end{IEEEeqnarray*}
\end{proof}
Proof. This is a proof that ends with an
equation array:
o = / + c
= d + c.
Note that the + in {+rCl+x*} denotes stretchable spaces, one on the left
of the equations (which, if not specified, will be done automatically by
IEEEeqnarray!) and one on the right of the equations. But now on the
right, after the stretching column, we add an empty column x. This column
will only be needed on the last line if the \qedhere command is put there.
Finally, we specify a *. This is a null-space that prevents IEEEeqnarray
from adding another unwanted +-space!
In the case of equation numbering, there is a similar problem. Comparing
74 Typesetting Mathematical Formulae
\begin{proof}
This is a proof that ends
with a numbered equation:
\begin{equation}
a = b + c.
\end{equation}
\end{proof}
Proof. This is a proof that ends with a
numbered equation:
o = / + c. (3.42)
with
\begin{proof}
This is a proof that ends
with a numbered equation:
\begin{equation}
a = b + c. \qedhere
\end{equation}
\end{proof}
Proof. This is a proof that ends with a
numbered equation:
o = / + c. (3.43)
you notice that in the (correct) second version the P is much closer to the
equation than in the first version.
Similarly, the correct way of putting the QED-symbol at the end of an
equation array is as follows:
\begin{proof}
This is a proof that ends
with an equation array:
\begin{IEEEeqnarray}{+rCl+x*}
a & = & b + c \\
& = & d + e. \\
&&& \qedhere\nonumber
\end{IEEEeqnarray}
\end{proof}
Proof. This is a proof that ends with an
equation array:
o = / + c (3.44)
= d + c. (3.45)
which contrasts with
\begin{proof}
This is a proof that ends
with an equation array:
\begin{IEEEeqnarray}{rCl}
a & = & b + c \\
& = & d + e.
\end{IEEEeqnarray}
\end{proof}
Proof. This is a proof that ends with an
equation array:
o = / + c (3.46)
= d + c. (3.47)
3.10 List of Mathematical Symbols 75
3.10 List of Mathematical Symbols
The following tables demonstrate all the symbols normally accessible from
math mode.
Note that some tables show symbols only accessible after loading the
amssymb package in the preamble of your document
12
. If the A
M
S package
and fonts are not installed on your system, have a look at CTAN:macros/
latex/required/amslatex. An even more comprehensive list of symbols
can be found at CTAN:info/symbols/comprehensive.
Table 3.1: Math Mode Accents.
ˆ o \hat{a} ˇ o \check{a} ˜ o \tilde{a}
` o \grave{a} ˙ o \dot{a} ¨ o \ddot{a}
¯ o \bar{a} o \vec{a}

¹¹¹ \widehat{AAA}
´ o \acute{a} ˘ o \breve{a}

¹¹¹ \widetilde{AAA}
˚o \mathring{a}
Table 3.2: Greek Letters.
There is no uppercase of some of the letters like \Alpha, \Beta and so on,
because they look the same as normal roman letters: A, B. . .
α \alpha θ \theta o o υ \upsilon
β \beta ϑ \vartheta π \pi φ \phi
γ \gamma ι \iota c \varpi ϕ \varphi
δ \delta κ \kappa ρ \rho χ \chi
c \epsilon λ \lambda ¸ \varrho ψ \psi
ε \varepsilon j \mu σ \sigma ω \omega
ζ \zeta ν \nu ς \varsigma
η \eta ξ \xi τ \tau
Γ \Gamma Λ \Lambda Σ \Sigma Ψ \Psi
∆ \Delta Ξ \Xi Υ \Upsilon Ω \Omega
Θ \Theta Π \Pi Φ \Phi
12
The tables were derived from symbols.tex by David Carlisle and subsequently changed
extensively as suggested by Josef Tkadlec.
76 Typesetting Mathematical Formulae
Table 3.3: Binary Relations.
You can negate the following symbols by prefixing them with a \not com-
mand.
< < > = =
≤ \leq or \le ≥ \geq or \ge ≡ \equiv
¸ \ll ¸ \gg
.
= \doteq
≺ \prec ~ \succ ∼ \sim
_ \preceq _ \succeq · \simeq
⊂ \subset ⊃ \supset ≈ \approx
⊆ \subseteq ⊇ \supseteq

= \cong
¸ \sqsubset
a
¸ \sqsupset
a
I \Join
a
_ \sqsubseteq _ \sqsupseteq > \bowtie
∈ \in ÷ \ni , \owns ∝ \propto
¬ \vdash ¬ \dashv [= \models
[ \mid | \parallel ⊥ \perp
\smile · \frown · \asymp
: : , ∈ \notin ,= \neq or \ne
a
Use the latexsym package to access this symbol
Table 3.4: Binary Operators.
+ + − -
± \pm ∓ \mp \triangleleft
\cdot ÷ \div > \triangleright
\times ¸ \setminus × \star
∪ \cup ∩ \cap ∗ \ast
. \sqcup ¯ \sqcap ◦ \circ
∨ \vee , \lor ∧ \wedge , \land • \bullet
⊕ \oplus ¸ \ominus \diamond
¸ \odot ¸ \oslash ¬ \uplus
⊗ \otimes _ \bigcirc H \amalg
´ \bigtriangleup _ \bigtriangledown † \dagger
¡ \lhd
a
£ \rhd
a
‡ \ddagger
¢ \unlhd
a
¤ \unrhd
a
/ \wr
3.10 List of Mathematical Symbols 77
Table 3.5: BIG Operators.

\sum

\bigcup
_
\bigvee

\prod

\bigcap
_
\bigwedge

\coprod

\bigsqcup

\biguplus
_
\int
_
\oint

\bigodot

\bigoplus

\bigotimes
Table 3.6: Arrows.
← \leftarrow or \gets ←− \longleftarrow
→ \rightarrow or \to −→ \longrightarrow
↔ \leftrightarrow ←→ \longleftrightarrow
⇐ \Leftarrow ⇐= \Longleftarrow
⇒ \Rightarrow =⇒ \Longrightarrow
⇔ \Leftrightarrow ⇐⇒ \Longleftrightarrow
→ \mapsto −→ \longmapsto
← \hookleftarrow → \hookrightarrow
÷ \leftharpoonup ÷ \rightharpoonup
÷ \leftharpoondown ÷ \rightharpoondown
= \rightleftharpoons ⇐⇒ \iff (bigger spaces)
↑ \uparrow ↓ \downarrow
¸ \updownarrow ⇑ \Uparrow
⇓ \Downarrow ¸ \Updownarrow
¸ \nearrow ¸ \searrow
¸ \swarrow ¸ \nwarrow
Y \leadsto
a
a
Use the latexsym package to access this symbol
Table 3.7: Arrows as Accents.
−−→
¹1 \overrightarrow{AB} ¹1
−−→
\underrightarrow{AB}
←−−
¹1 \overleftarrow{AB} ¹1
←−−
\underleftarrow{AB}
←→
¹1 \overleftrightarrow{AB} ¹1
←→
\underleftrightarrow{AB}
78 Typesetting Mathematical Formulae
Table 3.8: Delimiters.
( ( ) ) ↑ \uparrow
[ [ or \lbrack ] ] or \rbrack ↓ \downarrow
¦ \{ or \lbrace ¦ \} or \rbrace ¸ \updownarrow
¸ \langle ) \rangle ⇑ \Uparrow
[ | or \vert | \| or \Vert ⇓ \Downarrow
, / ¸ \backslash ¸ \Updownarrow
¸ \lfloor | \rfloor
| \rceil ¸ \lceil
Table 3.9: Large Delimiters.
_
_
\lgroup
_
_
\rgroup
_
_
\lmoustache
¸
¸
\arrowvert
_
_
\Arrowvert
¸
¸
¸
¸ \bracevert
_
_
\rmoustache
Table 3.10: Miscellaneous Symbols.
. . . \dots \cdots
.
.
. \vdots
.
.
.
\ddots
/ \hbar ı \imath , \jmath / \ell
' \Re · \Im ℵ \aleph ℘ \wp
∀ \forall ∃ \exists G \mho
a
∂ \partial

’ / \prime ∅ \emptyset ∞ \infty
∇ \nabla ´ \triangle P \Box
a
Q \Diamond
a
⊥ \bot · \top ∠ \angle

\surd
♦ \diamondsuit ♥ \heartsuit ♣ \clubsuit ♠ \spadesuit
\neg or \lnot . \flat ; \natural ; \sharp
a
Use the latexsym package to access this symbol
Table 3.11: Non-Mathematical Symbols.
These symbols can also be used in text mode.
† \dag § \S © \copyright ® \textregistered
‡ \ddag ¶ \P £ \pounds % \%
3.10 List of Mathematical Symbols 79
Table 3.12: A
M
S Delimiters.
' \ulcorner ¯ \urcorner , \llcorner ¸ \lrcorner
[ \lvert [ \rvert | \lVert | \rVert
Table 3.13: A
M
S Greek and Hebrew.
} \digamma κ \varkappa Q \beth ג \gimel ¯ \daleth
Table 3.14: Math Alphabets.
See Table 6.4 on 125 for other math fonts.
Example Command Required package
ABCDEabcde1234 \mathrm{ABCDE abcde 1234}
ABCDEabcde1234 \mathit{ABCDE abcde 1234}
¹1C11o/cdc1:¸¸ \mathnormal{ABCDE abcde 1234}
ABCDE \mathcal{ABCDE abcde 1234}
ABCDE \mathscr{ABCDE abcde 1234} mathrsfs
ABCDEabcde1234 \mathfrak{ABCDE abcde 1234} amsfonts or amssymb
ABC|E,'=÷_ \mathbb{ABCDE abcde 1234} amsfonts or amssymb
Table 3.15: A
M
S Binary Operators.
÷ \dotplus . \centerdot
\ltimes \rtimes ÷ \divideontimes
J \doublecup + \doublecap \smallsetminus
Y \veebar ¯ \barwedge , \doublebarwedge
¬ \boxplus ¬ \boxminus ¸ \circleddash
¯ \boxtimes ¯ \boxdot ¸ \circledcirc
¡ \intercal ¸ \circledast · \rightthreetimes
\curlyvee · \curlywedge ` \leftthreetimes
80 Typesetting Mathematical Formulae
Table 3.16: A
M
S Binary Relations.
< \lessdot \gtrdot = \doteqdot
¸ \leqslant ¸ \geqslant = \risingdotseq
¸ \eqslantless ¸ \eqslantgtr = \fallingdotseq
_ \leqq _ \geqq = \eqcirc
≪ \lll or \llless ≫ \ggg = \circeq
_ \lesssim _ \gtrsim = \triangleq
_ \lessapprox _ \gtrapprox = \bumpeq
≶ \lessgtr ≷ \gtrless · \Bumpeq
_ \lesseqgtr ¸ \gtreqless ∼ \thicksim
_ \lesseqqgtr _ \gtreqqless ≈ \thickapprox
- \preccurlyeq , \succcurlyeq ¸ \approxeq
- \curlyeqprec ` \curlyeqsucc ~ \backsim
_ \precsim _ \succsim - \backsimeq
_ \precapprox _ \succapprox = \vDash
¸ \subseteqq ¸ \supseteqq ' \Vdash
+ \shortparallel ¸ \Supset ' \Vvdash
¬ \blacktriangleleft ¸ \sqsupset ~ \backepsilon
\vartriangleright ∵ \because ∝ \varpropto
> \blacktriangleright ¸ \Subset ¸ \between
_ \trianglerighteq · \smallfrown . \pitchfork
< \vartriangleleft . \shortmid · \smallsmile
_ \trianglelefteq ∴ \therefore ¸ \sqsubset
3.10 List of Mathematical Symbols 81
Table 3.17: A
M
S Arrows.
--- \dashleftarrow --- \dashrightarrow
⇔ \leftleftarrows ⇒ \rightrightarrows
¯ \leftrightarrows · \rightleftarrows
÷ \Lleftarrow = \Rrightarrow
÷ \twoheadleftarrow ÷ \twoheadrightarrow
÷ \leftarrowtail ÷ \rightarrowtail
= \leftrightharpoons = \rightleftharpoons
¨ \Lsh ¨ \Rsh
÷ \looparrowleft + \looparrowright
. \curvearrowleft \curvearrowright
¸ \circlearrowleft ¸ \circlearrowright
÷ \multimap | \upuparrows
_ \downdownarrows , \upharpoonleft
` \upharpoonright ¸ \downharpoonright
~ \rightsquigarrow - \leftrightsquigarrow
82 Typesetting Mathematical Formulae
Table 3.18: A
M
S Negated Binary Relations and Arrows.
≮ \nless ≯ \ngtr ¸ \varsubsetneqq
_ \lneq _ \gneq ¿ \varsupsetneqq
_ \nleq _ \ngeq ¿ \nsubseteqq
¸ \nleqslant ¸ \ngeqslant ¸ \nsupseteqq
_ \lneqq _ \gneqq [ \nmid
_ \lvertneqq _ \gvertneqq ∦ \nparallel
_ \nleqq _ \ngeqq · \nshortmid
_ \lnsim _ \gnsim + \nshortparallel
_ \lnapprox _ \gnapprox ~ \nsim
⊀ \nprec , \nsucc æ \ncong
_ \npreceq _ \nsucceq - \nvdash
_ \precneqq _ \succneqq = \nvDash
_ \precnsim _ \succnsim ' \nVdash
_ \precnapprox _ \succnapprox ÷ \nVDash
_ \subsetneq _ \supsetneq ; \ntriangleleft
_ \varsubsetneq _ \varsupsetneq ; \ntriangleright
_ \nsubseteq _ \nsupseteq _ \ntrianglelefteq
_ \subsetneqq _ \supsetneqq _ \ntrianglerighteq
÷ \nleftarrow ÷ \nrightarrow ÷ \nleftrightarrow
= \nLeftarrow = \nRightarrow = \nLeftrightarrow
Table 3.19: A
M
S Miscellaneous.
/ \hbar h \hslash k \Bbbk
¯ \square B \blacksquare ¸ \circledS
, \vartriangle # \blacktriangle U \complement
V \triangledown * \blacktriangledown , \Game
♦ \lozenge # \blacklozenge ± \bigstar
∠ \angle X \measuredangle
, \diagup ¸ \diagdown \ \backprime
± \nexists · \Finv ∅ \varnothing
ð \eth < \sphericalangle G \mho
Chapter 4
Specialities
When putting together a large document, L
A
T
E
X will help with some special
features like index generation, bibliography management, and other things. A
much more complete description of specialities and enhancements possible with
L
A
T
E
X can be found in the L
A
T
E
X Manual [1] and The L
A
T
E
X Companion [3].
4.1 Including Encapsulated PostScript
L
A
T
E
X provides the basic facilities to work with floating bodies, such as
images or graphics, with the figure and table environments.
There are several ways to generate the actual graphics with basic L
A
T
E
X
or a L
A
T
E
X extension package, a few of them are described in chapter 5.
Please refer to The L
A
T
E
X Companion [3] and the L
A
T
E
X Manual [1] for more
information on that subject.
A much easier way to get graphics into a document is to generate them
with a specialised software package
1
and then include the finished graphics
in the document. Here again, L
A
T
E
X packages offer many ways to do this,
but this introduction will only discuss the use of Encapsulated PostScript
(EPS) graphics, because it is quite easy to do and widely used. In order
to use pictures in the EPS format, you must have a PostScript printer
2
available for output.
A good set of commands for inclusion of graphics is provided in the
graphicx package by D. P. Carlisle. It is part of a whole family of packages
called the “graphics” bundle.
3
When working on a system with a PostScript printer available for
output and with the graphicx package installed, use the following step by
1
Such as XFig, Gnuplot, Gimp, Xara X . . .
2
Another possibility to output PostScript is the GhostScript program available
from CTAN://support/ghostscript. Windows and OS/2 users might want to look for
GSview.
3
CTAN://macros/latex/required/graphics
84 Specialities
step guide to include a picture into your document:
1. Export the picture from your graphics program in EPS format.
4
2. Load the graphicx package in the preamble of the input file with
\usepackage[driver]{graphicx}
where driver is the name of your “dvi to PostScript” converter
program. The most widely used program is called dvips. The name of
the driver is required, because there is no standard on how graphics
are included in T
E
X. Knowing the name of the driver, the graphicx
package can choose the correct method to insert information about the
graphics into the .dvi file, so that the printer understands it and can
correctly include the .eps file.
3. Use the command
\includegraphics[key=value, . . . ]{file}
to include file into your document. The optional parameter accepts a
comma separated list of keys and associated values. The keys can be
used to alter the width, height and rotation of the included graphic.
Table 4.1 lists the most important keys.
Table 4.1: Key Names for graphicx Package.
width scale graphic to the specified width
height scale graphic to the specified height
angle rotate graphic counterclockwise
scale scale graphic
4
If your software cannot export into EPS format, you can try to install a PostScript
printer driver (such as an Apple LaserWriter, for example) and then print to a file with
this driver. With some luck this file will be in EPS format. Note that an EPS must not
contain more than one page. Some printer drivers can be explicitly configured to produce
EPS format.
4.2 Bibliography 85
The following example code may help to clarify things:
\begin{figure}
\centering
\includegraphics[angle=90,
width=0.5\textwidth]{test}
\caption{This is a test.}
\end{figure}
It includes the graphic stored in the file test.eps. The graphic is first
rotated by an angle of 90 degrees and then scaled to the final width of 0.5
times the width of a standard paragraph. The aspect ratio is 1.0, because
no special height is specified. The width and height parameters can also be
specified in absolute dimensions. Refer to Table 6.5 on page 130 for more
information. If you want to know more about this topic, make sure to read
[9] and [13].
4.2 Bibliography
Produce a bibliography with the thebibliography environment. Each entry
starts with
\bibitem[label ]{marker}
The marker is then used to cite the book, article or paper within the
document.
\cite{marker}
If you do not use the label option, the entries will get enumerated auto-
matically. The parameter after the \begin{thebibliography} command
defines how much space to reserve for the number of labels. In the example
below, {99} tells L
A
T
E
X to expect that none of the bibliography item numbers
will be wider than the number 99.
Partl~\cite{pa} has
proposed that \ldots
\begin{thebibliography}{99}
\bibitem{pa} H.~Partl:
\emph{German \TeX},
TUGboat Volume~9, Issue~1 (1988)
\end{thebibliography}
Partl [1] has proposed that . . .
Bibliography
[1] H. Partl: German T
E
X, TUGboat
Volume 9, Issue 1 (1988)
86 Specialities
For larger projects, you might want to check out the BibT
E
X program.
BibT
E
X is included with most T
E
X distributions. It allows you to maintain
a bibliographic database and then extract the references relevant to things
you cited in your paper. The visual presentation of BibT
E
X-generated
bibliographies is based on a style-sheets concept that allows you to create
bibliographies following a wide range of established designs.
4.3 Indexing
A very useful feature of many books is their index. With L
A
T
E
X and the
support program makeindex,
5
an index can be generated quite easily. This
introduction will only explain the basic index generation commands. For a
more in-depth view, please refer to The L
A
T
E
X Companion [3].
To enable their indexing feature of L
A
T
E
X, the makeidx package must be
loaded in the preamble with
\usepackage{makeidx}
and the special indexing commands must be enabled by putting the
\makeindex
command in the preamble.
The content of the index is specified with
\index{key@formatted_entry}
commands, where formatted_entry will appear in the index and key will be
used for sorting. The formatted_entry is optional. If it is missing the key
will be used. You enter the index commands at the points in the text that
you want the final index entries to point to. Table 4.2 explains the syntax
with several examples.
When the input file is processed with L
A
T
E
X, each \index command
writes an appropriate index entry, together with the current page number,
to a special file. The file has the same name as the L
A
T
E
X input file, but a
different extension (.idx). This .idx file can then be processed with the
makeindex program:
makeindex filename
The makeindex program generates a sorted index with the same base file
name, but this time with the extension .ind. If now the L
A
T
E
X input file is
5
On systems not necessarily supporting filenames longer than 8 characters, the program
may be called makeidx.
4.4 Fancy Headers 87
Table 4.2: Index Key Syntax Examples.
Example Index Entry Comment
\index{hello} hello, 1 Plain entry
\index{hello!Peter} Peter, 3 Subentry under ‘hello’
\index{Sam@\textsl{Sam}} Sam, 2 Formatted entry
\index{Lin@\textbf{Lin}} Lin, 7 Formatted entry
\index{Kaese@K\"ase} Käse, 33 Formatted entry
\index{ecole@\’ecole} école, 4 Formatted entry
\index{Jenny|textbf} Jenny, 3 Formatted page number
\index{Joe|textit} Joe, 5 Formatted page number
processed again, this sorted index gets included into the document at the
point where L
A
T
E
X finds
\printindex
The showidx package that comes with L
A
T
E
X2
ε
prints out all index entries
in the left margin of the text. This is quite useful for proofreading a document
and verifying the index.
Note that the \index command can affect your layout if not used carefully.
My Word \index{Word}. As opposed
to Word\index{Word}. Note the
position of the full stop.
My Word . As opposed to Word. Note the
position of the full stop.
makeindex has no clue about characters outside the ASCII range. To
get the sorting correct, use the @ character as shown in the Käse and école
examples above.
4.4 Fancy Headers
The fancyhdr package,
6
written by Piet van Oostrum, provides a few simple
commands that allow you to customize the header and footer lines of your
document. Look at the top of this page, for an application of this package.
The tricky problem when customising headers and footers is to get things
like running section and chapter names in there. L
A
T
E
X accomplishes this
with a two-stage approach. In the header and footer definition, you use
the commands \rightmark and \leftmark to represent the current section
6
Available from CTAN://macros/latex/contrib/supported/fancyhdr.
88 Specialities
\documentclass{book}
\usepackage{fancyhdr}
\pagestyle{fancy}
% with this we ensure that the chapter and section
% headings are in lowercase.
\renewcommand{\chaptermark}[1]{%
\markboth{#1}{}}
\renewcommand{\sectionmark}[1]{%
\markright{\thesection\ #1}}
\fancyhf{} % delete current header and footer
\fancyhead[LE,RO]{\bfseries\thepage}
\fancyhead[LO]{\bfseries\rightmark}
\fancyhead[RE]{\bfseries\leftmark}
\renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{0.5pt}
\renewcommand{\footrulewidth}{0pt}
\addtolength{\headheight}{0.5pt} % space for the rule
\fancypagestyle{plain}{%
\fancyhead{} % get rid of headers on plain pages
\renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{0pt} % and the line
}
Figure 4.1: Example fancyhdr Setup.
4.5 The Verbatim Package 89
and chapter heading, respectively. The values of these two commands are
overwritten whenever a chapter or section command is processed.
For ultimate flexibility, the \chapter command and its friends do not
redefine \rightmark and \leftmark themselves. They call yet another
command (\chaptermark, \sectionmark, or \subsectionmark) that is re-
sponsible for redefining \rightmark and \leftmark.
If you want to change the look of the chapter name in the header line,
you need only “renew” the \chaptermark command.
Figure 4.1 shows a possible setup for the fancyhdr package that makes
the headers look about the same as they look in this booklet. In any case, I
suggest you fetch the documentation for the package at the address mentioned
in the footnote.
4.5 The Verbatim Package
Earlier in this book, you got to know the verbatim environment. In this
section, you are going to learn about the verbatim package. The verbatim
package is basically a re-implementation of the verbatim environment that
works around some of the limitations of the original verbatim environment.
This by itself is not spectacular, but the implementation of the verbatim
package added new functionality, which is why I am mentioning the package
here. The verbatim package provides the
\verbatiminput{filename}
command, which allows you to include raw ASCII text into your document
as if it were inside a verbatim environment.
As the verbatim package is part of the ‘tools’ bundle, you should find it
pre-installed on most systems. If you want to know more about this package,
make sure to read [10].
4.6 Installing Extra Packages
Most L
A
T
E
X installations come with a large set of pre-installed style packages,
but many more are available on the net. The main place to look for style
packages on the Internet is CTAN (http://www.ctan.org/).
Packages such as geometry, hyphenat, and many others are typically made
up of two files: a file with the extension .ins and another with the extension
.dtx. There will often be a readme.txt with a brief description of the
package. You should of course read this file first.
In any event, once you have copied the package files onto your machine,
you still have to process them in a way that (a) tells your T
E
X distribution
90 Specialities
about the new style package and (b) gives you the documentation. Here’s
how you do the first part:
1. Run L
A
T
E
X on the .ins file. This will extract a .sty file.
2. Move the .sty file to a place where your distribution can find it. Usually
this is in your .../localtexmf /tex/latex subdirectory (Windows or
OS/2 users should feel free to change the direction of the slashes).
3. Refresh your distribution’s file-name database. The command de-
pends on the L
A
T
E
Xdistribution you use: T
E
Xlive – texhash; web2c –
maktexlsr; MiKT
E
X – initexmf --update-fndb or use the GUI.
Now extract the documentation from the .dtx file:
1. Run L
A
T
E
X on the .dtx file. This will generate a .dvi file. Note that you
may have to run L
A
T
E
X several times before it gets the cross-references
right.
2. Check to see if L
A
T
E
X has produced a .idx file among the various files
you now have. If you do not see this file, then you may proceed to
step 5.
3. In order to generate the index, type the following:
makeindex -s gind.ist name
(where name stands for the main-file name without any extension).
4. Run L
A
T
E
X on the .dtx file once again.
5. Last but not least, make a .ps or .pdf file to increase your reading
pleasure.
Sometimes you will see that a .glo (glossary) file has been produced.
Run the following command between step 4 and 5:
makeindex -s gglo.ist -o name.gls name.glo
Be sure to run L
A
T
E
X on the .dtx one last time before moving on to step 5.
4.7 Working with pdf L
A
T
E
X
By Daniel Flipo <Daniel.Flipo@univ-lille1.fr>
PDF is a portable hypertext document format. Much as in a web page,
some words in the document are marked as hyperlinks. They link to other
places in the document or even to other documents. If you click on such a
hyperlink you get transported to the destination of the link. In the context
of L
A
T
E
X, this means that all occurrences of \ref and \pageref become
hyperlinks. Additionally, the table of contents, the index and all the other
similar structures become collections of hyperlinks.
4.7 Working with pdf L
A
T
E
X 91
Most web pages you find today are written in HTML (HyperText Markup
Language). This format has two significant disadvantages when writing
scientific documents:
1. Including mathematical formulae into HTML documents is not gener-
ally supported. While there is a standard for it, most browsers used
today do not support it, or lack the required fonts.
2. Printing HTML documents is possible, but the results vary widely
between platforms and browsers. The results are miles removed from
the quality we have come to expect in the L
A
T
E
X world.
There have been many attempts to create translators from L
A
T
E
X to
HTML. Some were even quite successful in the sense that they are able
to produce legible web pages from a standard L
A
T
E
X input file. But all of
them cut corners left and right to get the job done. As soon as you start
using more complex L
A
T
E
X features and external packages things tend to
fall apart. Authors wishing to preserve the unique typographic quality of
their documents even when publishing on the web turn to PDF (Portable
Document Format), which preserves the layout of the document and permits
hypertext navigation. Most modern browsers come with plugins that allow
the direct display of PDF documents.
Even though there are DVI and PS viewers for almost every platform,
you will find that Acrobat Reader and Xpdf for viewing PDF documents are
more widely deployed
7
. So providing PDF versions of your documents will
make them much more accessible to your potential readers.
4.7.1 PDF Documents for the Web
The creation of a PDF file from L
A
T
E
X source is very simple, thanks to the
pdfT
E
X program developed by Hàn Th
´
ê Thành. pdfT
E
X produces PDF
output where normal T
E
X produces DVI. There is also a pdfL
A
T
E
X, which
produces PDF output from L
A
T
E
X sources.
Both pdfT
E
X and pdfL
A
T
E
X are installed automatically by most modern
T
E
X distributions, such as teT
E
X, fpT
E
X, MikT
E
X, T
E
XLive and CMacT
E
X.
To produce a PDF instead of DVI, it is sufficient to replace the command
latex file.tex by pdflatex file.tex. On systems where L
A
T
E
X is not
called from the command line, you may find a special button in the T
E
X
GUI.
Set the paper size with an optional documentclass argument such as
a4paper or letterpaper. This works in pdfL
A
T
E
X too, but on top of this
pdfT
E
X also needs to know the physical size of the paper to determine the
physical size of the pages in the pdf file. If you use the hyperref package (see
page 93), the papersize will be adjusted automatically. Otherwise you have
7
http://pdfreaders.org
92 Specialities
to do this manually by putting the following lines into the preamble of the
document:
\pdfpagewidth=\paperwidth
\pdfpageheight=\paperheight
The following section will go into more detail regarding the differences
between normal L
A
T
E
X and pdfL
A
T
E
X. The main differences concern three
areas: the fonts to use, the format of images to include, and the manual
configuration of hyperlinks.
4.7.2 The Fonts
pdfL
A
T
E
X can deal with all sorts of fonts (PK bitmaps, TrueType, PostScript
type 1. . . ) but the normal L
A
T
E
X font format, the bitmap PK fonts produce
very ugly results when the document is displayed with Acrobat Reader. It is
best to use PostScript Type 1 fonts exclusively to produce documents that
display well. Modern TeX installations will be setup so that this happens
automatical ly. Best is to try. If it works for you, just skip this whole section.
The Type 1 font set most widely used today is called Latin Modern (LM).
If you have a recent T
E
X installation, chances are that you already have a
copy of them installed; all you need todo is to add
\usepackage{lmodern}
\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
\usepackage{textcomp}
to the preamble of your document and you are all set for creating excellent
PDF output with full support for the full Latin character set. If you are
working with a stripped down setup, you may have to add the lm fonts
explicitly.
For the Russian language you may want to use C1 virtual fonts, available
at ftp://ftp.vsu.ru/pub/tex/font-packs/c1fonts. These fonts com-
bine the standard CM type 1 fonts from Bluesky collection and CMCYR
type 1 fonts from the Paradissa and BaKoMa collection, all available on
CTAN. Because Paradissa fonts contain only Russian letters, C1 fonts are
missing other Cyrillic glyphs.
Another solution is to switch to other PostScript type 1 fonts. Actually,
some of them are even included with every copy of Acrobat Reader. Because
these fonts have different character sizes, the text layout on your pages will
change. Generally these other fonts will use more space than the CM fonts,
which are very space-efficient. Also, the overall visual coherence of your
document will suffer because Times, Helvetica and Courier (the primary
candidates for such a replacement job) have not been designed to work in
harmony in a single document.
4.7 Working with pdf L
A
T
E
X 93
Two ready-made font sets are available for this purpose: pxfonts, which is
based on Palatino as its main text body font, and the txfonts package, which
is based on Times. To use them it is sufficient to put the following lines into
the preamble of your document:
\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
\usepackage{pxfonts}
You may find lines like
Warning: pdftex (file eurmo10): Font eur... not found
in the .log file after compiling your input file. They mean that some font
used in the document has not been found. Make sure you identify and fix
the offending parts of your document, as the resulting PDF document may
not display the pages with the missing characters at al l.
4.7.3 Using Graphics
Including graphics into a document works best with the graphicx package
(see page 83):
\usepackage{xcolor,graphicx}
In the sample above I have included the color package, as using color in
documents displayed on the web comes quite naturally.
So much for the good news. The bad news is that graphics in Encapsulated
PostScript format do not work with pdfL
A
T
E
X. If you don’t define a file
extension in the \includegraphics command, graphicx will go looking for a
suitable file on its own, depending on the setting of the driver option. For
pdftex this is formats .png, .pdf, .jpg and .mps (METAPOST)—but not
.eps.
The simple way out of this problem is to just convert your EPS files into
PDF format using the epstopdf utility found on many systems. For vector
graphics (drawings) this is a great solution. For bitmaps (photos, scans) this
is not ideal, because the PDF format natively supports the inclusion of PNG
and JPEG images. PNG is good for screenshots and other images with few
colours. JPEG is great for photos, as it is very space-efficient.
It may even be desirable not to draw certain geometric figures, but rather
describe the figure with a specialized command language, such as META-
POST, which can be found in most T
E
X distributions, and comes with its
own extensive manual.
4.7.4 Hypertext Links
The hyperref package will take care of turning all internal references of your
document into hyperlinks. For this to work properly some magic is necessary,
94 Specialities
so you have to put \usepackage[pdftex]{hyperref} as the last command
into the preamble of your document.
Many options are available to customize the behaviour of the hyperref
package:
• either as a comma separated list after the pdftex option
\usepackage[pdftex]{hyperref}
• or on individual lines with the command \hypersetup{options}.
The only required option is pdftex; the others are optional and allow
you to change the default behaviour of hyperref.
8
In the following list the
default values are written in an upright font.
bookmarks (=true,false) show or hide the bookmarks bar when
displaying the document
unicode (=false,true) allows the use of characters of non-latin based
languages in Acrobat’s bookmarks
pdftoolbar (=true,false) show or hide Acrobat’s toolbar
pdfmenubar (=true,false) show or hide Acrobat’s menu
pdffitwindow (=false,true) adjust the initial magnification of the pdf
when displayed
pdftitle (={text}) define the title that gets displayed in the Document
Info window of Acrobat
pdfauthor (={text}) the name of the PDF’s author
pdfnewwindow (=false,true) define whether a new window should be
opened when a link leads out of the current document
colorlinks (=false,true) surround the links by colour frames (false)
or colour the text of the links (true). The colour of these links can be
configured using the following options (default colours are shown):
linkcolor (=red) colour of internal links (sections, pages, etc.)
citecolor (=green) colour of citation links (bibliography)
filecolor (=magenta) colour of file links
urlcolor (=cyan) colour of URL links (mail, web)
8
It is worth noting that the hyperref package is not limited to work with pdfT
E
X. It
can also be configured to embed PDF-specific information into the DVI output of normal
L
A
T
E
X, which then gets put into the PS file by dvips and is finally picked up by the pdf
convertor when turning the PS file into PDF.
4.7 Working with pdf L
A
T
E
X 95
If you are happy with the defaults, use
\usepackage[pdftex]{hyperref}
To have the bookmark list open and links in colour (the =true values
are optional):
\usepackage[pdftex,bookmarks,colorlinks]{hyperref}
When creating PDFs destined for printing, coloured links are not a good
thing as they end up in gray in the final output, making it difficult to read.
Use colour frames, which are not printed:
\usepackage{hyperref}
\hypersetup{colorlinks=false}
or make links black:
\usepackage{hyperref}
\hypersetup{colorlinks,%
citecolor=black,%
filecolor=black,%
linkcolor=black,%
urlcolor=black,%
pdftex}
When you just want to provide information for the Document Info
section of the PDF file:
\usepackage[pdfauthor={Pierre Desproges},%
pdftitle={Des femmes qui tombent},%
pdftex]{hyperref}
In addition to the automatic hyperlinks for cross references, it is possible
to embed explicit links using
\href{url }{text}
The code
The \href{http://www.ctan.org}{CTAN} website.
produces the output “CTAN”; a click on the word “CTAN” will take you to
the CTAN website.
If the destination of the link is not a URL but a local file, use the \href
command without the ’http://’ bit:
The complete document is \href{manual.pdf}{here}
96 Specialities
which produces the text “The complete document is here”. A click on the
word “here” will open the file manual.pdf. (The filename is relative to the
location of the current document).
The author of an article might want her readers to easily send email
messages by using the \href command inside the \author command on the
title page of the document:
\author{Mary Oetiker $<$\href{mailto:mary@oetiker.ch}%
{mary@oetiker.ch}$>$
Note that I have put the link so that my email address appears not only in
the link but also on the page itself. I did this because the link
\href{mailto:mary@oetiker.ch}{Mary Oetiker}
would work well within Acrobat, but once the page is printed the email
address would not be visible anymore.
4.7.5 Problems with Links
Messages like the following:
! pdfTeX warning (ext4): destination with the same
identifier (name{page.1}) has been already used,
duplicate ignored
appear when a counter gets reinitialized, for example by using the command
\mainmatter provided by the book document class. It resets the page number
counter to 1 prior to the first chapter of the book. But as the preface of the
book also has a page number 1 all links to “page 1” would not be unique
anymore, hence the notice that “duplicate has been ignored.”
The counter measure consists of putting plainpages=false into the
hyperref options. This unfortunately only helps with the page counter. An
even more radical solution is to use the option
hypertexnames=false, but this will cause the page links in the index to
stop working.
4.7.6 Problems with Bookmarks
The text displayed by bookmarks does not always look like you expect it to
look. Because bookmarks are “just text,” fewer characters are available for
bookmarks than for normal L
A
T
E
X text. Hyperref will normally notice such
problems and put up a warning:
Package hyperref Warning:
Token not allowed in a PDFDocEncoded string:
4.7 Working with pdf L
A
T
E
X 97
Work around this problem by providing a text string for the bookmarks,
which replaces the offending text:
\texorpdfstring{T
E
X text}{Bookmark Text}
Math expressions are a prime candidate for this kind of problem:
\section{\texorpdfstring{$E=mc^2$}%
{E = mc ** 2}}
which turns \section{$E=mc^2$} to “E = mc ** 2” in the bookmark area.
If you write your document in Unicode and use the unicode option for
the hyperref package to use Unicode characters in bookmarks, this will give
you a much larger selection of characters to pick from when when using
\texorpdfstring.
4.7.7 Source Compatibility Between L
A
T
E
X and pdf L
A
T
E
X
Ideally your document would compile equally well with L
A
T
E
X and pdfL
A
T
E
X.
The main problem in this respect is the inclusion of graphics. The simple
solution is to systematical ly drop the file extension from \includegraphics
commands. They will then automatically look for a file of a suitable format
in the current directory. All you have to do is create appropriate versions of
the graphics files. L
A
T
E
X will look for .eps, and pdfL
A
T
E
X will try to include
a file with the extension .png, .pdf, .jpg or .mps (in that order).
For the cases where you want to use different code for the PDF version
of your document, simply add the package ifpdf
9
to your preamble. Chances
are that you already have it installed; if not then you’re probably using
MiKT
E
X which will install it for you automatically the first time you try to
use it. This package defines the special command \ifpdf that will allow you
to write conditional code easily. In this example, we want the PostScript
version to be black and white due to the printing costs but we want the PDF
version for online viewing to be colourful.
\RequirePackage{ifpdf} % are we producing PDF ?
\documentclass[a4paper,12pt]{book}
\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
\usepackage{lmodern}
\usepackage[bookmarks, % tune hyperref
colorlinks,
plainpages=false]{hyperref}
\usepackage{graphicx}
9
If you want the whole story on why to use this package then go to the T
E
X FAQ under
the item http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=ifpdf.
98 Specialities
\ifpdf
\hypersetup{linkscolor=blue}
\else
\hypersetup{linkscolors=black}
\fi
\usepackage[english]{babel}
...
In the example above I have included the hyperref package even in the
non-PDF version. The effect of this is to make the \href command work in
all cases, which saves me from wrapping every occurrence into a conditional
statement.
Note that in recent T
E
X distributions (like T
E
XLive, MacT
E
X and
MiKT
E
X), the normal T
E
X program is actually pdfT
E
X and it will au-
tomatically switch between producing pdf and dvi according to the name it
is called with: use the pdflatex command to get pdf output and latex for
normal dvi output.
4.8 Working with X
E
L
A
T
E
X
By Axel Kielhorn <A.Kielhorn@web.de>
Most of the things said about pdfL
A
T
E
X are valid for X
E
L
A
T
E
X as well.
There is a Wiki at http://wiki.xelatex.org/doku.php that collects
information relevant to X
E
T
E
X and X
E
L
A
T
E
X.
4.8.1 The Fonts
In addition to the normal tfm based fonts, X
E
L
A
T
E
X is able to use any font
known to the operating system. If you have the Linux Libertine fonts
installed, you can simply say
\usepackage{fontspec}
\setmainfont[Ligatures=TeX]{Linux Libertine}
in the preamble. This will normally detect the italic and bold versions as
well, so \textit and \textbf will work as usual. When the font is using
OpenType technology you have access to many features which required
switching to a separate font or using virtual fonts in the past. The main
feature is the extended character set; a font may contain Latin, Greek and
Cyrillic characters and the corresponding ligatures.
Many fonts contain at least two kinds of numerals, the normal lining
numerals and so called old style (or lower case) numerals, which partly extend
below the baseline. They may contain proportional numerals (the “1” takes
less space than the “0”) or monospaced numerals which are suitable for
tables.
4.8 Working with X
E
L
A
T
E
X 99
\newfontfamily\LLln[Numbers=Lining]{(font)}
\newfontfamily\LLos[Numbers=OldStyle]{(font)}
\newfontfamily\LLlnm[Numbers=Lining,Numbers=Monospaced]{(font)}
\newfontfamily\LLosm[Numbers=OldStyle,Numbers=Monospaced]{(font)}
Almost all OpenType fonts contain the standard ligatures (fl fi ffi) but
there are also some rare or historical ligatures like st, ct and tz. You may
not want to use them in a technical report but they are fine for a novel. To
enable these ligatures use either of the following lines:
\setmainfont[Ligatures=Rare]{(font)}
\setmainfont[Ligatures=Historic]{(font)}
\setmainfont[Ligatures=Historic,Ligature=Rare]{(font)}
Not every font contains both sets of ligature, consult the font documen-
tation or just try it out. Sometimes these ligatures are language dependent;
for example a ligature used in Polish (fk) is not used in English. You have
to add
\setmainfont[Language=Polish]{(font)}
to enable the Polish ligatures.
Some fonts (like the commercial Adobe Garamond Premier Pro) contain
alternative glyphs that are activated by default in X
E
L
A
T
E
X distributed with
T
E
XLive 2010
10
. The result is a stylish “Q” with a descender reaching below
the following “u”. To disable this feature you have to define the font with
disabled contextuals:
\setmainfont[Contextuals=NoAlternate]{(font)}
To learn about fonts in X
E
L
A
T
E
X read the fontspec manual.
Where do I get OpenType fonts?
If you have TeXLive installed, you already have some at .../texmf-dist/
fonts/opentype, just install them in your operating system. This collection
does not include DejaVu, which is available at http://dejavu-fonts.org/.
Make sure that each font is only installed once, otherwise interesting
results may happen.
You can use every font installed on your computer, but remember that
other users may not have these fonts. The Zapfino font used in the fontspec
manual is included in Mac OSX, but is not available on Windows computers.
11
10
The behavior has changed with this version, it was off by default in earlier releases.
11
A commercial version of the font called Zapfino Extra is available.
100 Specialities
Entering Unicode Characters
The number of characters in a font has grown but the number of keys on a
regular keyboard has not. So, how do I enter non-ASCII characters?
If you write a large amount of text in a foreign language, you can install
a keyboard for that language and print out the character positions. (Most
operatings system have some sort of virtual keyboard, just make a screenshot.)
If you rarely need an exotic character, you can simply pick it in the
character palette.
Some environments (e. g. the X Window System) offer many methods to
enter non-ASCII characters. Some editors (e. g. Vim and Emacs) offer ways
to enter these characters. Read the manual for the tools you are using.
4.8.2 Compatibility Between X
E
L
A
T
E
X and pdfL
A
T
E
X
There are a few things that are different between X
E
L
A
T
E
X and pdfL
A
T
E
X.
• A X
E
L
A
T
E
X document has to be written in Unicode (UTF-8) while
pdfL
A
T
E
X may use different input encodings.
• The microtype packages does not work with X
E
L
A
T
E
X yet, support for
character protrusion is already under development.
• Everything font related has to be reviewed. (Unless you want to stick
to Latin Modern.)
4.9 Creating Presentations
By Daniel Flipo <Daniel.Flipo@univ-lille1.fr>
You can present the results of your scientific work on a blackboard, with
transparencies, or directly from your laptop using some presentation software.
pdfL
A
T
E
X combined with the beamer class allows you to create presenta-
tions in PDF, looking much like something you might be able to generate
with LibreOffice or PowerPoint if you had a very good day, but much more
portable because PDF readers are available on many more systems.
The beamer class uses graphicx, color and hyperref with options adapted
to screen presentations.
When you compile the code presented in figure 4.2 with pdfL
A
T
E
X you
get a PDF file with a title page and a second page showing several items
that will be revealed one at a time as you step though your presentation.
One of the advantages of the beamer class is that it produces a PDF
file that is directly usable without first going through a PostScript stage
like prosper or requiring additional post processing like presentations created
with the ppower4 package.
4.9 Creating Presentations 101
\documentclass[10pt]{beamer}
\mode<beamer>{%
\usetheme[hideothersubsections,
right,width=22mm]{Goettingen}
}
\title{Simple Presentation}
\author[D. Flipo]{Daniel Flipo}
\institute{U.S.T.L. \& GUTenberg}
\titlegraphic{\includegraphics[width=20mm]{USTL}}
\date{2005}
\begin{document}
\begin{frame}<handout:0>
\titlepage
\end{frame}
\section{An Example}
\begin{frame}
\frametitle{Things to do on a Sunday Afternoon}
\begin{block}{One could \ldots}
\begin{itemize}
\item walk the dog\dots \pause
\item read a book\pause
\item confuse a cat\pause
\end{itemize}
\end{block}
and many other things
\end{frame}
\end{document}
Figure 4.2: Sample code for the beamer class
102 Specialities
With the beamer class you can produce several versions (modes) of your
document from the same input file. The input file may contain special
instructions for the different modes in angular brackets. The following modes
are available:
beamer for the presentation PDF discussed above.
trans for transparencies.
handout for the printed version.
The default mode is beamer, change it by setting a different mode as a
global option, like \documentclass[10pt,handout]{beamer} to print the
handouts for example.
The look of the screen presentation depends on the theme you choose.
Pick one of the themes shipped with the beamer class or create your own.
See the beamer class documentation in beameruserguide.pdf for more
information on this.
Let’s have a closer look at the code in figure 4.2.
For the screen version of the presentation \mode<beamer> we have chosen
the Goettingen theme to show a navigation panel integrated into the table
of contents. The options allow us to choose the size of the panel (22 mm in
this case) and its position (on the right side of the body text). The option
hideothersubsections, shows the chapter titles, but only the subsections of
the present chapter. There are no special settings for \mode<trans> and
\mode<handout>. They appear in their standard layout.
The commands \title{}, \author{}, \institute{}, and
\titlegraphic{} set the content of the title page. The optional arguments
of \title[]{} and \author[]{} let you specify a special version of the title
and the author name to be displayed on the panel of the Goettingen theme.
The titles and subtitles in the panel are created with normal \section{}
and \subsection{} commands that you place outside the frame environ-
ment.
The tiny navigation icons at the bottom of the screen also allow to
navigate the document. Their presence is not dependent on the theme you
choose.
The contents of each slide or screen has to be placed inside a frame
environment. There is an optional argument in angular brackets (< and
>), it allows us to suppress a particular frame in one of the versions of the
presentation. In the example the first page would not be shown in the
handout version due to the <handout:0> argument.
It is highly recommended to set a title for each slide apart from the
title slide. This is done with the command \frametitle{}. If a subtitle is
necessary use the block environment as shown in the example. Note that
the sectioning commands \section{} and \subsection{} do not produce
output on the slide proper.
4.9 Creating Presentations 103
The command \pause in the itemize environment lets you reveal the
items one by one. For other presentation effects check out the commands
\only, \uncover, \alt and \temporal. In many place it is possible to use
angular brackets to further customize the presentation.
In any case make sure to read through the beamer class documentation
beameruserguide.pdf to get a complete picture of what is in store for you.
This package is being actively developed, check out their website to get the
latest information. (http://latex-beamer.sourceforge.net/)
Chapter 5
Producing Mathematical
Graphics
Most people use L
A
T
E
X for typesetting their text. And since the structure oriented
approach to authoring is so convenient, L
A
T
E
X also offers a, if somewhat restricted,
means for producing graphical output from textual descriptions. Furthermore,
quite a number of L
A
T
E
X extensions have been created in order to overcome
these restrictions. In this section, you will learn about a few of them.
5.1 Overview
Creating graphical output with L
A
T
E
X has a long tradition. It started out
with the picture environment which allows you to create graphics by cleverly
placing predefined elements onto the canvas. A complete description can
be found in the L
A
T
E
X Manual [1]. The picture environment of L
A
T
E
X2
ε
brings with it the \qbezier command, “q” meaning “quadratic”. Many
frequently used curves such as circles, ellipses, or catenaries can be satisfac-
torily approximated by quadratic Bézier curves, although this may require
some mathematical toil. If, in addition, a programming language is used
to generate \qbezier blocks of L
A
T
E
X input files, the picture environment
becomes quite powerful.
Although programming pictures directly in L
A
T
E
X is severely restricted,
and often rather tiresome, there are still reasons for doing so. The documents
thus produced are “small” with respect to bytes, and there are no additional
graphics files to be dragged along.
This has been the state of things until a few years ago when Till Tantau of
beamer fame came up with the Portable Grafics Format pgf and its companion
package TikZ (tikz). This system lets you create high quality vector graphics
with all current T
E
X systems including full support for pdf.
Building on these basic, numerous packages have been written for specific
106 Producing Mathematical Graphics
purposes. A wide variety of these packages is described in detail in The
L
A
T
E
X Graphics Companion [4].
Perhaps the most advanced graphical tool related with L
A
T
E
X is META-
POST. It is a stand-alone application based on Donald E. Knuth’s META-
FONT. METAPOST has the very powerful and mathematically sophisticated
programming language of METAFONT but contrary to METAFONT, it gener-
ates encapsulated PostScript files, which can be imported in L
A
T
E
X and even
pdfL
A
T
E
X. For an introduction, see A User’s Manual for METAPOST [15],
or the tutorial on [17].
A very thorough discussion of L
A
T
E
X and T
E
X strategies for graphics
(and fonts) can be found in T
E
X Unbound [16].
5.2 The picture Environment
By Urs Oswald <osurs@bluewin.ch>
As mentioned above the picture environment is part of standard L
A
T
E
X
and it is great for simple tasks and also if you want to control the exact
positoning of individual elements on a page. But if you are about to do any
serious graphics work, you should look at TikZ as presented in section 5.3
on page 115.
5.2.1 Basic Commands
A picture environment
1
is created with one of the two commands
\begin{picture}(r, j). . . \end{picture}
or
\begin{picture}(r, j)(r
0
, j
0
). . . \end{picture}
The numbers r, j, r
0
, j
0
refer to \unitlength, which can be reset any
time (but not within a picture environment) with a command such as
\setlength{\unitlength}{1.2cm}
The default value of \unitlength is 1pt. The first pair, (r, j), effects the
reservation, within the document, of rectangular space for the picture. The
optional second pair, (r
0
, j
0
), assigns arbitrary coordinates to the bottom
left corner of the reserved rectangle.
1
Believe it or not, the picture environment works out of the box, with standard L
A
T
E
X2
ε
no package loading necessary.
5.2 The picture Environment 107
Most drawing commands have one of the two forms
\put(r, j){object}
or
\multiput(r, j)(∆r, ∆j){n}{object}
Bézier curves are an exception. They are drawn with the command
\qbezier(r
1
, j
1
)(r
2
, j
2
)(r
3
, j
3
)
5.2.2 Line Segments
\setlength{\unitlength}{5cm}
\begin{picture}(1,1)
\put(0,0){\line(0,1){1}}
\put(0,0){\line(1,0){1}}
\put(0,0){\line(1,1){1}}
\put(0,0){\line(1,2){.5}}
\put(0,0){\line(1,3){.3333}}
\put(0,0){\line(1,4){.25}}
\put(0,0){\line(1,5){.2}}
\put(0,0){\line(1,6){.1667}}
\put(0,0){\line(2,1){1}}
\put(0,0){\line(2,3){.6667}}
\put(0,0){\line(2,5){.4}}
\put(0,0){\line(3,1){1}}
\put(0,0){\line(3,2){1}}
\put(0,0){\line(3,4){.75}}
\put(0,0){\line(3,5){.6}}
\put(0,0){\line(4,1){1}}
\put(0,0){\line(4,3){1}}
\put(0,0){\line(4,5){.8}}
\put(0,0){\line(5,1){1}}
\put(0,0){\line(5,2){1}}
\put(0,0){\line(5,3){1}}
\put(0,0){\line(5,4){1}}
\put(0,0){\line(5,6){.8333}}
\put(0,0){\line(6,1){1}}
\put(0,0){\line(6,5){1}}
\end{picture}

/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/

'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
´
´
´
´
´
´
´
´
´
´
´
´
´
´
´
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/

/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..

´
´
´
´
´
´
´
´
´
´
´
´
´
´
´

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

´
´
´
´
´
´
´
´
´
´
´
´
´
´
´

108 Producing Mathematical Graphics
Line segments are drawn with the command
\put(r, j){\line(r
1
, j
1
){|cnpt/}}
The \line command has two arguments:
1. a direction vector,
2. a length.
The components of the direction vector are restricted to the integers
−6, −5, . . . , 5, 6,
and they have to be coprime (no common divisor except 1). The figure
illustrates all 25 possible slope values in the first quadrant. The length is
relative to \unitlength. The length argument is the vertical coordinate in
the case of a vertical line segment, the horizontal coordinate in all other
cases.
5.2.3 Arrows
\setlength{\unitlength}{0.75mm}
\begin{picture}(60,40)
\put(30,20){\vector(1,0){30}}
\put(30,20){\vector(4,1){20}}
\put(30,20){\vector(3,1){25}}
\put(30,20){\vector(2,1){30}}
\put(30,20){\vector(1,2){10}}
\thicklines
\put(30,20){\vector(-4,1){30}}
\put(30,20){\vector(-1,4){5}}
\thinlines
\put(30,20){\vector(-1,-1){5}}
\put(30,20){\vector(-1,-4){5}}
\end{picture}
¸ .
.
.
..

>
>
>
>
>
>
>

`
ˆ
ˆ
ˆ
ˆ
ˆ
ˆ
ˆy
g
g
g
g
gy
»

·
Arrows are drawn with the command
\put(r, j){\vector(r
1
, j
1
){|cnpt/}}
For arrows, the components of the direction vector are even more narrowly
restricted than for line segments, namely to the integers
−4, −3, . . . , 3, 4.
Components also have to be coprime (no common divisor except 1). Notice
the effect of the \thicklines command on the two arrows pointing to the
upper left.
5.2 The picture Environment 109
5.2.4 Circles
\setlength{\unitlength}{1mm}
\begin{picture}(60, 40)
\put(20,30){\circle{1}}
\put(20,30){\circle{2}}
\put(20,30){\circle{4}}
\put(20,30){\circle{8}}
\put(20,30){\circle{16}}
\put(20,30){\circle{32}}
\put(40,30){\circle{1}}
\put(40,30){\circle{2}}
\put(40,30){\circle{3}}
\put(40,30){\circle{4}}
\put(40,30){\circle{5}}
\put(40,30){\circle{6}}
\put(40,30){\circle{7}}
\put(40,30){\circle{8}}
\put(40,30){\circle{9}}
\put(40,30){\circle{10}}
\put(40,30){\circle{11}}
\put(40,30){\circle{12}}
\put(40,30){\circle{13}}
\put(40,30){\circle{14}}
\put(15,10){\circle*{1}}
\put(20,10){\circle*{2}}
\put(25,10){\circle*{3}}
\put(30,10){\circle*{4}}
\put(35,10){\circle*{5}}
\end{picture}
,¸_
`


,¸¸__


`

`

`

`


, g _
The command
\put(r, j){\circle{diameter}}
draws a circle with center (r, j) and diameter (not radius) diameter. The
picture environment only admits diameters up to approximately 14 mm,
and even below this limit, not all diameters are possible. The \circle*
command produces disks (filled circles).
As in the case of line segments, one may have to resort to additional
packages, such as eepic or pstricks. For a thorough description of these
packages, see The L
A
T
E
X Graphics Companion [4].
There is also a possibility within the picture environment. If one is not
afraid of doing the necessary calculations (or leaving them to a program),
arbitrary circles and ellipses can be patched together from quadratic Bézier
curves. See Graphics in L
A
T
E
X2
ε
[17] for examples and Java source files.
110 Producing Mathematical Graphics
5.2.5 Text and Formulas
\setlength{\unitlength}{0.8cm}
\begin{picture}(6,5)
\thicklines
\put(1,0.5){\line(2,1){3}}
\put(4,2){\line(-2,1){2}}
\put(2,3){\line(-2,-5){1}}
\put(0.7,0.3){$A$}
\put(4.05,1.9){$B$}
\put(1.7,2.95){$C$}
\put(3.1,2.5){$a$}
\put(1.3,1.7){$b$}
\put(2.5,1.05){$c$}
\put(0.3,4){$F=
\sqrt{s(s-a)(s-b)(s-c)}$}
\put(3.5,0.4){$\displaystyle
s:=\frac{a+b+c}{2}$}
\end{picture}
¨
¨
¨
¨
¨
¨
¨
r
r
r
r
r

¹
1
C
o
/
c
1 =
_
:(: −o)(: −/)(: −c)
: :=
o + / + c
2
As this example shows, text and formulas can be written into a picture
environment with the \put command in the usual way.
5.2.6 \multiput and \linethickness
\setlength{\unitlength}{2mm}
\begin{picture}(30,20)
\linethickness{0.075mm}
\multiput(0,0)(1,0){26}%
{\line(0,1){20}}
\multiput(0,0)(0,1){21}%
{\line(1,0){25}}
\linethickness{0.15mm}
\multiput(0,0)(5,0){6}%
{\line(0,1){20}}
\multiput(0,0)(0,5){5}%
{\line(1,0){25}}
\linethickness{0.3mm}
\multiput(5,0)(10,0){2}%
{\line(0,1){20}}
\multiput(0,5)(0,10){2}%
{\line(1,0){25}}
\end{picture}
The command
\multiput(r, j)(∆r, ∆j){n}{object}
has 4 arguments: the starting point, the translation vector from one object
5.2 The picture Environment 111
to the next, the number of objects, and the object to be drawn. The
\linethickness command applies to horizontal and vertical line segments,
but neither to oblique line segments, nor to circles. It does, however, apply
to quadratic Bézier curves!
5.2.7 Ovals
\setlength{\unitlength}{0.75cm}
\begin{picture}(6,4)
\linethickness{0.075mm}
\multiput(0,0)(1,0){7}%
{\line(0,1){4}}
\multiput(0,0)(0,1){5}%
{\line(1,0){6}}
\thicklines
\put(2,3){\oval(3,1.8)}
\thinlines
\put(3,2){\oval(3,1.8)}
\thicklines
\put(2,1){\oval(3,1.8)[tl]}
\put(4,1){\oval(3,1.8)[b]}
\put(4,3){\oval(3,1.8)[r]}
\put(3,1.5){\oval(1.8,0.4)}
\end{picture}
5
4
2
3
_

¸

5
4 3
2
3
§
¦
¤
¥
The command
\put(r, j){\oval(n, /)}
or
\put(r, j){\oval(n, /)[position]}
produces an oval centered at (r, j) and having width n and height /. The
optional position arguments b, t, l, r refer to “top”, “bottom”, “left”, “right”,
and can be combined, as the example illustrates.
Line thickness can be controlled by two kinds of commands:
\linethickness{length} on the one hand, \thinlines and \thicklines
on the other. While \linethickness{length} applies only to horizontal and
vertical lines (and quadratic Bézier curves), \thinlines and \thicklines
apply to oblique line segments as well as to circles and ovals.
112 Producing Mathematical Graphics
5.2.8 Multiple Use of Predefined Picture Boxes
\setlength{\unitlength}{0.5mm}
\begin{picture}(120,168)
\newsavebox{\foldera}
\savebox{\foldera}
(40,32)[bl]{% definition
\multiput(0,0)(0,28){2}
{\line(1,0){40}}
\multiput(0,0)(40,0){2}
{\line(0,1){28}}
\put(1,28){\oval(2,2)[tl]}
\put(1,29){\line(1,0){5}}
\put(9,29){\oval(6,6)[tl]}
\put(9,32){\line(1,0){8}}
\put(17,29){\oval(6,6)[tr]}
\put(20,29){\line(1,0){19}}
\put(39,28){\oval(2,2)[tr]}
}
\newsavebox{\folderb}
\savebox{\folderb}
(40,32)[l]{% definition
\put(0,14){\line(1,0){8}}
\put(8,0){\usebox{\foldera}}
}
\put(34,26){\line(0,1){102}}
\put(14,128){\usebox{\foldera}}
\multiput(34,86)(0,-37){3}
{\usebox{\folderb}}
\end{picture}
¸
¸ ¸

¸
¸ ¸

¸
¸ ¸

¸
¸ ¸

A picture box can be declared by the command
\newsavebox{name}
then defined by
\savebox{name}(width,height)[position]{content}
and finally arbitrarily often be drawn by
\put(r, j){\usebox{name}}
The optional position parameter has the effect of defining the ‘anchor
point’ of the savebox. In the example it is set to bl which puts the anchor
point into the bottom left corner of the savebox. The other position specifiers
are top and right.
5.2 The picture Environment 113
The name argument refers to a L
A
T
E
X storage bin and therefore is of a
command nature (which accounts for the backslashes in the current example).
Boxed pictures can be nested: In this example, \foldera is used within the
definition of \folderb.
The \oval command had to be used as the \line command does not
work if the segment length is less than about 3 mm.
5.2.9 Quadratic Bézier Curves
\setlength{\unitlength}{0.8cm}
\begin{picture}(6,4)
\linethickness{0.075mm}
\multiput(0,0)(1,0){7}
{\line(0,1){4}}
\multiput(0,0)(0,1){5}
{\line(1,0){6}}
\thicklines
\put(0.5,0.5){\line(1,5){0.5}}
\put(1,3){\line(4,1){2}}
\qbezier(0.5,0.5)(1,3)(3,3.5)
\thinlines
\put(2.5,2){\line(2,-1){3}}
\put(5.5,0.5){\line(-1,5){0.5}}
\linethickness{1mm}
\qbezier(2.5,2)(5.5,0.5)(5,3)
\thinlines
\qbezier(4,2)(4,3)(3,3)
\qbezier(3,3)(2,3)(2,2)
\qbezier(2,2)(2,1)(3,1)
\qbezier(3,1)(4,1)(4,2)
\end{picture}
¤
¤
¤
¤
¤
¤
$
$
$
$
$

'
'
'
'
'
'
As this example illustrates, splitting up a circle into 4 quadratic Bézier
curves is not satisfactory. At least 8 are needed. The figure again shows the
effect of the \linethickness command on horizontal or vertical lines, and of
the \thinlines and the \thicklines commands on oblique line segments.
It also shows that both kinds of commands affect quadratic Bézier curves,
each command overriding all previous ones.
Let 1
1
= (r
1
, j
1
), 1
2
= (r
2
, j
2
) denote the end points, and :
1
, :
2
the
respective slopes, of a quadratic Bézier curve. The intermediate control point
o = (r, j) is then given by the equations
_
¸
_
¸
_
:c|r =
:
2
r
2
−:
1
r
1
−(j
2
−j
1
)
:
2
−:
1
,
j = j
i
+ :
i
(r −r
i
) (i = 1, 2).
(5.1)
See Graphics in L
A
T
E
X2
ε
[17] for a Java program which generates the neces-
sary \qbezier command line.
114 Producing Mathematical Graphics
5.2.10 Catenary
\setlength{\unitlength}{1cm}
\begin{picture}(4.3,3.6)(-2.5,-0.25)
\put(-2,0){\vector(1,0){4.4}}
\put(2.45,-.05){$x$}
\put(0,0){\vector(0,1){3.2}}
\put(0,3.35){\makebox(0,0){$y$}}
\qbezier(0.0,0.0)(1.2384,0.0)
(2.0,2.7622)
\qbezier(0.0,0.0)(-1.2384,0.0)
(-2.0,2.7622)
\linethickness{.075mm}
\multiput(-2,0)(1,0){5}
{\line(0,1){3}}
\multiput(-2,0)(0,1){4}
{\line(1,0){4}}
\linethickness{.2mm}
\put( .3,.12763){\line(1,0){.4}}
\put(.5,-.07237){\line(0,1){.4}}
\put(-.7,.12763){\line(1,0){.4}}
\put(-.5,-.07237){\line(0,1){.4}}
\put(.8,.54308){\line(1,0){.4}}
\put(1,.34308){\line(0,1){.4}}
\put(-1.2,.54308){\line(1,0){.4}}
\put(-1,.34308){\line(0,1){.4}}
\put(1.3,1.35241){\line(1,0){.4}}
\put(1.5,1.15241){\line(0,1){.4}}
\put(-1.7,1.35241){\line(1,0){.4}}
\put(-1.5,1.15241){\line(0,1){.4}}
\put(-2.5,-0.25){\circle*{0.2}}
\end{picture}
¸
r
`
j
g
In this figure, each symmetric half of the catenary j = cosh r − 1 is
approximated by a quadratic Bézier curve. The right half of the curve ends
in the point (2, 2.7622), the slope there having the value : = 3.6269. Using
again equation (5.1), we can calculate the intermediate control points. They
turn out to be (1.2384, 0) and (−1.2384, 0). The crosses indicate points of
the real catenary. The error is barely noticeable, being less than one percent.
This example points out the use of the optional argument of the
\begin{picture} command. The picture is defined in convenient “mathe-
matical” coordinates, whereas by the command
\begin{picture}(4.3,3.6)(-2.5,-0.25)
its lower left corner (marked by the black disk) is assigned the coordinates
(−2.5, −0.25).
5.3 The PGF and TikZ Graphics Packages 115
5.2.11 Rapidity in the Special Theory of Relativity
\setlength{\unitlength}{0.8cm}
\begin{picture}(6,4)(-3,-2)
\put(-2.5,0){\vector(1,0){5}}
\put(2.7,-0.1){$\chi$}
\put(0,-1.5){\vector(0,1){3}}
\multiput(-2.5,1)(0.4,0){13}
{\line(1,0){0.2}}
\multiput(-2.5,-1)(0.4,0){13}
{\line(1,0){0.2}}
\put(0.2,1.4)
{$\beta=v/c=\tanh\chi$}
\qbezier(0,0)(0.8853,0.8853)
(2,0.9640)
\qbezier(0,0)(-0.8853,-0.8853)
(-2,-0.9640)
\put(-3,-2){\circle*{0.2}}
\end{picture}
¸
χ
`
β = ·,c = tanh χ
¿
The control points of the two Bézier curves were calculated with formulas
(5.1). The positive branch is determined by 1
1
= (0, 0), :
1
= 1 and 1
2
=
(2, tanh 2), :
2
= 1, cosh
2
2. Again, the picture is defined in mathematically
convenient coordinates, and the lower left corner is assigned the mathematical
coordinates (−3, −2) (black disk).
5.3 The PGF and TikZ Graphics Packages
Today every L
A
T
E
X output generation system can create nice vector graphics,
it’s just the interfaces that are rather diverse. The pgf package provides an
abstraction layer over these interface. The pdf package comes with its own
500+ page documentation [18]. So we are only going to scratch the surface
of the package with this little section.
The pgf package comes with a high level access language provided by the
tikz package. TikZ provides highly efficient commands to draw graphics right
from inside your document. Use the tikzpicture environment to wrap your
TikZ commands.
As mentioned above, there is an excellent manual for pgf and friends.
So instead of actually explaining how it works, I will just show you a few
examples so that you can get a first impression of how this tool works.
First a simple non-sense diagram.
116 Producing Mathematical Graphics
\begin{tikzpicture}[scale=3]
\clip (-0.1,-0.2)
rectangle (1.8,1.2);
\draw[step=.25cm,gray,very thin]
(-1.4,-1.4) grid (3.4,3.4);
\draw (-1.5,0) -- (2.5,0);
\draw (0,-1.5) -- (0,1.5);
\draw (0,0) circle (1cm);
\filldraw[fill=green!20!white,
draw=green!50!black]
(0,0) -- (3mm,0mm)
arc (0:30:3mm) -- cycle;
\end{tikzpicture}
Note the semicolon (;) character. It separates the individual commands.
A simple Venn diagram.
\shorthandoff{:}
\begin{tikzpicture}
\node[circle,draw,
minimum size=3cm,
label=120:{economics}]
at (0,0) {};
\node[circle,draw,
minimum size=3cm,
label=60:{psychology}]
at (1,0) {};
\node (i) at (0.5,-1) {};
\node at (0.6,-2.5)
{behavioral economics}
edge[->,thick,
out=60,in=-60] (i);
\end{tikzpicture}
economics
psychology
behavioral economics
If you are using tikz in connection with babel some of the characters used
in the TikZ language may get modified by babel, leading to odd errors. To
counteract this, add the \shorthandoff command to your code.
Note the foreach loops in the next example.
5.3 The PGF and TikZ Graphics Packages 117
\begin{tikzpicture}[scale=0.8]
\tikzstyle{v}=[circle, minimum size=2mm,inner sep=0pt,draw]
\foreach \i in {1,...,8}
\foreach \j in {1,...,3}
\node[v]
(G-\i-\j) at (\i,\j) {};
\foreach \i in {1,...,8}
\foreach \j/\o in {1/2,2/3}
\draw[->]
(G-\i-\j) -- (G-\i-\o);
\foreach \i/\n in
{1/2,2/3,3/4,4/5,5/6,6/7,7/8}
\foreach \j/\o in {1/2,2/3} {
\draw[->] (G-\i-\j) -- (G-\n-\o);
\draw[->] (G-\n-\j) -- (G-\i-\o);
}
\end{tikzpicture}
With the \usetikzlibrary command in the preamble you can enable a
wide variety of additional features for drawing special shapes, like this box
which is slightly bent.
\usetikzlibrary{%
decorations.pathmorphing}
\begin{tikzpicture}[
decoration={bent,aspect=.3}]
\draw [decorate,fill=lightgray]
(0,0) rectangle (5.5,4);
\node[circle,draw]
(A) at (.5,.5) {A};
\node[circle,draw]
(B) at (5,3.5) {B};
\draw[->,decorate] (A) -- (B);
\draw[->,decorate] (B) -- (A);
\end{tikzpicture}
A
B
118 Producing Mathematical Graphics
\usetikzlibrary{positioning}
\begin{tikzpicture}[xscale=6,
yscale=8,>=stealth]
\tikzstyle{v}=[circle,
minimum size=1mm,draw,thick]
\node[v] (a) {$1$};
\node[v] (b) [right=of a] {$2$};
\node[v] (c) [below=of a] {$2$};
\node[v] (d) [below=of b] {$1$};
\draw[thick,->]
(a) to node {} (c);
\draw[thick,->]
(a) to node {} (d);
\draw[thick,->]
(b) to node {} (d);
\end{tikzpicture}
1 2
2 1
You can even draw syntax diagrams that look as if they came straight
from a book on Pascal programming. The code is a bit more daunting than
the example above, so I will just show you the result. If you have a look at
the pdf documentation you will find a detailed tutorial on drawing this exact
diagram.
+
unsigned integer
. digit E unsigned integer
-
And there is more, if you have to draw plots of numerical data or functions,
you should have a closer look at the pgfplot package. It provides everything
you need to draw plots. It can even call the external gnuplot command to
evaluate actual functions you wrote into the graph.
For more inspiration make sure to visit Kjell Magne Fauske’s excellent
http://www.texample.net/tikz/. it contains an ever expanding store of
beautiful graphs and other L
A
T
E
X code.
Chapter 6
Customising L
A
T
E
X
Documents produced with the commands you have learned up to this point will
look acceptable to a large audience. While they are not fancy-looking, they obey
all the established rules of good typesetting, which will make them easy to read
and pleasant to look at.
However, there are situations where L
A
T
E
X does not provide a command or
environment that matches your needs, or the output produced by some existing
command may not meet your requirements.
In this chapter, I will try to give some hints on how to teach L
A
T
E
X new tricks
and how to make it produce output that looks different from what is provided
by default.
6.1 New Commands, Environments and Packages
You may have noticed that all the commands I introduce in this book are
typeset in a box, and that they show up in the index at the end of the book.
Instead of directly using the necessary L
A
T
E
X commands to achieve this, I
have created a package in which I defined new commands and environments
for this purpose. Now I can simply write:
\begin{lscommand}
\ci{dum}
\end{lscommand}
\dum
In this example, I am using both a new environment called
lscommand, which is responsible for drawing the box around the command,
and a new command named \ci, which typesets the command name and
makes a corresponding entry in the index. Check this out by looking up the
\dum command in the index at the back of this book, where you’ll find an
entry for \dum, pointing to every page where I mentioned the \dum command.
120 Customising L
A
T
E
X
If I ever decide that I do not like the commands to be typeset in a box
any more, I can simply change the definition of the lscommand environment
to create a new look. This is much easier than going through the whole
document to hunt down all the places where I have used some generic L
A
T
E
X
commands to draw a box around some word.
6.1.1 New Commands
To add your own commands, use the
\newcommand{name}[num]{definition}
command. Basically, the command requires two arguments: the name of
the command you want to create, and the definition of the command. The
num argument in square brackets is optional and specifies the number of
arguments the new command takes (up to 9 are possible). If missing it
defaults to 0, i.e. no argument allowed.
The following two examples should help you to get the idea. The first
example defines a new command called \tnss. This is short for “The Not
So Short Introduction to L
A
T
E
X2
ε
.” Such a command could come in handy
if you had to write the title of this book over and over again.
\newcommand{\tnss}{The not
so Short Introduction to
\LaTeXe}
This is ‘‘\tnss’’ \ldots{}
‘‘\tnss’’
This is “The not so Short Introduction to
L
A
T
E
X2
ε
” . . . “The not so Short Introduc-
tion to L
A
T
E
X2
ε

The next example illustrates how to define a new command that takes
one argument. The #1 tag gets replaced by the argument you specify. If you
wanted to use more than one argument, use #2 and so on.
\newcommand{\txsit}[2]
{This is the \emph{#1}
#2 Introduction to \LaTeXe}
% in the document body:
\begin{itemize}
\item \txsit{not so}{short}
\item \txsit{very}{long}
\end{itemize}
• This is the not so short Introduction
to L
A
T
E
X2
ε
• This is the very long Introduction
to L
A
T
E
X2
ε
L
A
T
E
X will not allow you to create a new command that would overwrite
an existing one. But there is a special command in case you explicitly
want this: \renewcommand. It uses the same syntax as the \newcommand
command.
6.1 New Commands, Environments and Packages 121
In certain cases you might also want to use the \providecommand com-
mand. It works like \newcommand, but if the command is already defined,
L
A
T
E
X2
ε
will silently ignore it.
There are some points to note about whitespace following L
A
T
E
X com-
mands. See page 5 for more information.
6.1.2 New Environments
Just as with the \newcommand command, there is a command to create
your own environments. The \newenvironment command uses the following
syntax:
\newenvironment{name}[num]{before}{after}
Again \newenvironment can have an optional argument. The material
specified in the before argument is processed before the text in the environ-
ment gets processed. The material in the after argument gets processed
when the \end{name} command is encountered.
The example below illustrates the usage of the \newenvironment com-
mand.
\newenvironment{king}
{\rule{1ex}{1ex}%
\hspace{\stretch{1}}}
{\hspace{\stretch{1}}%
\rule{1ex}{1ex}}
\begin{king}
My humble subjects \ldots
\end{king}
My humble subjects . . .
The num argument is used the same way as in the \newcommand command.
L
A
T
E
X makes sure that you do not define an environment that already exists.
If you ever want to change an existing command, use the \renewenvironment
command. It uses the same syntax as the \newenvironment command.
The commands used in this example will be explained later. For the \rule
command see page 135, for \stretch go to page 129, and more information
on \hspace can be found on page 129.
6.1.3 Extra Space
When creating a new environment you may easily get bitten by extra spaces
creeping in, which can potentially have fatal effects, for example when you
want to create a title environment which supresses its own indentation as well
as the one on the following paragraph. The \ignorespaces command in the
begin block of the environment will make it ignore any space after executing
122 Customising L
A
T
E
X
the begin block. The end block is a bit more tricky as special processing
occurs at the end of an environment. With the \ignorespacesafterend
L
A
T
E
X will issue an \ignorespaces after the special ‘end’ processing has
occured.
\newenvironment{simple}%
{\noindent}%
{\par\noindent}
\begin{simple}
See the space\\to the left.
\end{simple}
Same\\here.
See the space
to the left.
Same
here.
\newenvironment{correct}%
{\noindent\ignorespaces}%
{\par\noindent%
\ignorespacesafterend}
\begin{correct}
No space\\to the left.
\end{correct}
Same\\here.
No space
to the left.
Same
here.
6.1.4 Commandline L
A
T
E
X
If you work on a Unix-like OS, you might be using Makefiles to build
your L
A
T
E
X projects. In that connection it might be interesting to produce
different versions of the same document by calling L
A
T
E
X with commandline
parameters. If you add the following structure to your document:
\usepackage{ifthen}
\ifthenelse{\equal{\blackandwhite}{true}}{
% "black and white" mode; do something..
}{
% "color" mode; do something different..
}
Now call L
A
T
E
X like this:
latex ’\newcommand{\blackandwhite}{true}\input{test.tex}’
First the command \blackandwhite gets defined and then the actual
file is read with input. By setting \blackandwhite to false the color version
of the document would be produced.
6.2 Fonts and Sizes 123
6.1.5 Your Own Package
If you define a lot of new environments and commands, the preamble of your
document will get quite long. In this situation, it is a good idea to create a
L
A
T
E
X package containing all your command and environment definitions. Use
the \usepackage command to make the package available in your document.
% Demo Package by Tobias Oetiker
\ProvidesPackage{demopack}
\newcommand{\tnss}{The not so Short Introduction
to \LaTeXe}
\newcommand{\txsit}[1]{The \emph{#1} Short
Introduction to \LaTeXe}
\newenvironment{king}{\begin{quote}}{\end{quote}}
Figure 6.1: Example Package.
Writing a package basically consists of copying the contents of your
document preamble into a separate file with a name ending in .sty. There
is one special command,
\ProvidesPackage{package name}
for use at the very beginning of your package file. \ProvidesPackage tells
L
A
T
E
X the name of the package and will allow it to issue a sensible error
message when you try to include a package twice. Figure 6.1 shows a small
example package that contains the commands defined in the examples above.
6.2 Fonts and Sizes
6.2.1 Font Changing Commands
L
A
T
E
X chooses the appropriate font and font size based on the logical structure
of the document (sections, footnotes, . . . ). In some cases, one might like
to change fonts and sizes by hand. To do this, use the commands listed in
Tables 6.1 and 6.2. The actual size of each font is a design issue and depends
on the document class and its options. Table 6.3 shows the absolute point
size for these commands as implemented in the standard document classes.
{\small The small and
\textbf{bold} Romans ruled}
{\Large all of great big
\textit{Italy}.}
The small and bold Romans ruled all of
great big Italy.
124 Customising L
A
T
E
X
One important feature of L
A
T
E
X2
ε
is that the font attributes are inde-
pendent. This means that issuing size or even font changing commands, and
still keep bold or slant attributes set earlier.
In math mode use the font changing commands to temporarily exit math
mode and enter some normal text. If you want to switch to another font
for math typesetting you need another special set of commands; refer to
Table 6.4.
In connection with the font size commands, curly braces play a significant
role. They are used to build groups. Groups limit the scope of most L
A
T
E
X
commands.
He likes {\LARGE large and
{\small small} letters}.
He likes large and small letters.
The font size commands also change the line spacing, but only if the
paragraph ends within the scope of the font size command. The closing curly
brace } should therefore not come too early. Note the position of the \par
command in the next two examples.
1
1
\par is equivalent to a blank line
Table 6.1: Fonts.
\textrm{...} roman \textsf{...} sans serif
\texttt{...} typewriter
\textmd{...} medium \textbf{...} bold face
\textup{...} upright \textit{...} italic
\textsl{...} slanted \textsc{...} Small Caps
\emph{...} emphasized \textnormal{...} document font
Table 6.2: Font Sizes.
\tiny tiny font
\scriptsize very small font
\footnotesize quite small font
\small small font
\normalsize normal font
\large large font
\Large larger font
\LARGE very large font
\huge huge
\Huge largest
6.2 Fonts and Sizes 125
Table 6.3: Absolute Point Sizes in Standard Classes.
size 10pt (default) 11pt option 12pt option
\tiny 5pt 6pt 6pt
\scriptsize 7pt 8pt 8pt
\footnotesize 8pt 9pt 10pt
\small 9pt 10pt 11pt
\normalsize 10pt 11pt 12pt
\large 12pt 12pt 14pt
\Large 14pt 14pt 17pt
\LARGE 17pt 17pt 20pt
\huge 20pt 20pt 25pt
\Huge 25pt 25pt 25pt
Table 6.4: Math Fonts.
\mathrm{...} Roman Font
\mathbf{...} Boldface Font
\mathsf{...} Sans Serif Font
\mathtt{...} Typewriter Font
\mathit{...} Italic Font
\mathcal{...} CALLIGRAPHIC FONT
\mathnormal{...} ·o::o| 1ont
126 Customising L
A
T
E
X
{\Large Don’t read this!
It is not true.
You can believe me!\par}
Don’t read this! It is not true.
You can believe me!
{\Large This is not true either.
But remember I am a liar.}\par
This is not true either. But
remember I am a liar.
If you want to activate a size changing command for a whole paragraph
of text or even more, you might want to use the environment syntax for font
changing commands.
\begin{Large}
This is not true.
But then again, what is these
days \ldots
\end{Large}
This is not true. But then
again, what is these days . . .
This will save you from counting lots of curly braces.
6.2.2 Danger, Will Robinson, Danger
As noted at the beginning of this chapter, it is dangerous to clutter your
document with explicit commands like this, because they work in opposition
to the basic idea of L
A
T
E
X, which is to separate the logical and visual markup
of your document. This means that if you use the same font changing
command in several places in order to typeset a special kind of information,
you should use \newcommand to define a “logical wrapper command” for the
font changing command.
\newcommand{\oops}[1]{%
\textbf{#1}}
Do not \oops{enter} this room,
it’s occupied by \oops{machines}
of unknown origin and purpose.
Do not enter this room, it’s occupied by
machines of unknown origin and purpose.
This approach has the advantage that you can decide at some later
stage that you want to use a visual representation of danger other than
\textbf, without having to wade through your document, identifying all the
occurrences of \textbf and then figuring out for each one whether it was
used for pointing out danger or for some other reason.
Please note the difference between telling L
A
T
E
X to emphasize something
and telling it to use a different font. The \emph command is context aware,
while the font commands are absolute.
6.3 Spacing 127
\textit{You can also
\emph{emphasize} text if
it is set in italics,}
\textsf{in a
\emph{sans-serif} font,}
\texttt{or in
\emph{typewriter} style.}
You can also emphasize text if it is set
in italics, in a sans-serif font, or in
typewriter style.
6.2.3 Advice
To conclude this journey into the land of fonts and font sizes, here is a little
word of advice:
Remember! The MORE fonts you use in a document, the
more readable and beautiful it becomes.
6.3 Spacing
6.3.1 Line Spacing
If you want to use larger inter-line spacing in a document, change its value
by putting the
\linespread{factor}
command into the preamble of your document. Use \linespread{1.3}
for “one and a half” line spacing, and \linespread{1.6} for “double” line
spacing. Normally the lines are not spread, so the default line spread factor
is 1.
Note that the effect of the \linespread command is rather drastic and
not appropriate for published work. So if you have a good reason for changing
128 Customising L
A
T
E
X
the line spacing you might want to use the command:
\setlength{\baselineskip}{1.5\baselineskip}
{\setlength{\baselineskip}%
{1.5\baselineskip}
This paragraph is typeset with
the baseline skip set to 1.5 of
what it was before. Note the par
command at the end of the
paragraph.\par}
This paragraph has a clear
purpose, it shows that after the
curly brace has been closed,
everything is back to normal.
This paragraph is typeset with the base-
line skip set to 1.5 of what it was before.
Note the par command at the end of the
paragraph.
This paragraph has a clear purpose, it
shows that after the curly brace has been
closed, everything is back to normal.
6.3.2 Paragraph Formatting
In L
A
T
E
X, there are two parameters influencing paragraph layout. By placing
a definition like
\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}
\setlength{\parskip}{1ex plus 0.5ex minus 0.2ex}
in the preamble of the input file, you can change the layout of paragraphs.
These two commands increase the space between two paragraphs while setting
the paragraph indent to zero.
The plus and minus parts of the length above tell T
E
X that it can
compress and expand the inter-paragraph skip by the amount specified, if
this is necessary to properly fit the paragraphs onto the page.
In continental Europe, paragraphs are often separated by some space and
not indented. But beware, this also has its effect on the table of contents.
Its lines get spaced more loosely now as well. To avoid this, you might
want to move the two commands from the preamble into your document to
some place below the command \tableofcontents or to not use them at
all, because you’ll find that most professional books use indenting and not
spacing to separate paragraphs.
6.3 Spacing 129
If you want to indent a paragraph that is not indented, use
\indent
at the beginning of the paragraph.
2
Obviously, this will only have an effect
when \parindent is not set to zero.
To create a non-indented paragraph, use
\noindent
as the first command of the paragraph. This might come in handy when you
start a document with body text and not with a sectioning command.
6.3.3 Horizontal Space
L
A
T
E
X determines the spaces between words and sentences automatically. To
add horizontal space, use:
\hspace{length}
If such a space should be kept even if it falls at the end or the start of
a line, use \hspace* instead of \hspace. The length in the simplest case is
just a number plus a unit. The most important units are listed in Table 6.5.
This\hspace{1.5cm}is a space
of 1.5 cm.
This is a space of 1.5 cm.
The command
\stretch{n}
generates a special rubber space. It stretches until all the remaining space
on a line is filled up. If multiple \hspace{\stretch{n}} commands are
issued on the same line, they occupy all available space in proportion of their
respective stretch factors.
x\hspace{\stretch{1}}
x\hspace{\stretch{3}}x
x x x
When using horizontal space together with text, it may make sense to
make the space adjust its size relative to the size of the current font. This
can be done by using the text-relative units em and ex:
2
To indent the first paragraph after each section head, use the indentfirst package in
the ‘tools’ bundle.
Table 6.5: T
E
X Units.
mm millimetre ≈ 1,25 inch
cm centimetre = 10 mm
in inch = 25.4 mm
pt point ≈ 1,72 inch ≈
1
3
mm
em approx width of an ‘M’ in the current font
ex approx height of an ‘x’ in the current font
{\Large{}big\hspace{1em}y}\\
{\tiny{}tin\hspace{1em}y}
big y
tin y
6.3.4 Vertical Space
The space between paragraphs, sections, subsections, . . . is determined
automatically by L
A
T
E
X. If necessary, additional vertical space between two
paragraphs can be added with the command:
\vspace{length}
This command should normally be used between two empty lines. If the
space should be preserved at the top or at the bottom of a page, use the
starred version of the command, \vspace*, instead of \vspace.
The \stretch command, in connection with \pagebreak, can be used
to typeset text on the last line of a page, or to centre text vertically on a
page.
Some text \ldots
\vspace{\stretch{1}}
This goes onto the last line of the page.\pagebreak
Additional space between two lines of the same paragraph or within a
table is specified with the
\\[length]
command.
With \bigskip and \smallskip you can skip a predefined amount of
vertical space without having to worry about exact numbers.
6.4 Page Layout 131
6.4 Page Layout
L
A
T
E
X2
ε
allows you to specify the paper size in the \documentclass com-
mand. It then automatically picks the right text margins, but sometimes
you may not be happy with the predefined values. Naturally, you can change
them. Figure 6.2 shows all the parameters that can be changed. The figure
was produced with the layout package from the tools bundle.
3
WAIT! . . . before you launch into a “Let’s make that narrow page a bit
wider” frenzy, take a few seconds to think. As with most things in L
A
T
E
X,
there is a good reason for the page layout to be as it is.
Sure, compared to your off-the-shelf MS Word page, it looks awfully
narrow. But take a look at your favourite book
4
and count the number of
characters on a standard text line. You will find that there are no more than
about 66 characters on each line. Now do the same on your L
A
T
E
X page.
You will find that there are also about 66 characters per line. Experience
shows that the reading gets difficult as soon as there are more characters
on a single line. This is because it is difficult for the eyes to move from the
end of one line to the start of the next one. This is also why newspapers are
typeset in multiple columns.
So if you increase the width of your body text, keep in mind that you
are making life difficult for the readers of your paper. But enough of the
cautioning, I promised to tell you how you do it . . .
L
A
T
E
X provides two commands to change these parameters. They are
usually used in the document preamble.
The first command assigns a fixed value to any of the parameters:
\setlength{parameter}{length}
The second command adds a length to any of the parameters:
\addtolength{parameter}{length}
This second command is actually more useful than the \setlength
command, because it works relative to the existing settings. To add one
centimetre to the overall text width, I put the following commands into the
document preamble:
\addtolength{\hoffset}{-0.5cm}
\addtolength{\textwidth}{1cm}
In this context, you might want to look at the calc package. It allows
you to use arithmetic operations in the argument of \setlength and other
places where numeric values are entered into function arguments.
3
macros/latex/required/tools
4
I mean a real printed book produced by a reputable publisher.
132 Customising L
A
T
E
X
Header
Body
Footer
Margin
Notes
_
8
¡ ¸
_
7
·
`
_
1
¡ ¸
¡ ¸ _
3
_
10
¡ ¸
¡ ¸ _
9
`
·
_
11
_
2
·
`
_
4
`
·
_
5
`
·
_
6
`
·
1 one inch + \hoffset 2 one inch + \voffset
3 \oddsidemargin = 22pt 4 \topmargin = 22pt
or \evensidemargin
5 \headheight = 12pt 6 \headsep = 19pt
7 \textheight = 595pt 8 \textwidth = 360pt
9 \marginparsep = 7pt 10 \marginparwidth = 106pt
11 \footskip = 27pt \marginparpush = 5pt (not shown)
\hoffset = 0pt \voffset = 0pt
\paperwidth = 597pt \paperheight = 845pt
Figure 6.2: Layout parameters for this book. Try the layouts package to
print the layout of your own document.
6.5 More Fun With Lengths 133
6.5 More Fun With Lengths
Whenever possible, I avoid using absolute lengths in L
A
T
E
X documents. I
rather try to base things on the width or height of other page elements. For
the width of a figure this could be \textwidth in order to make it fill the
page.
The following 3 commands allow you to determine the width, height and
depth of a text string.
\settoheight{variable}{text}
\settodepth{variable}{text}
\settowidth{variable}{text}
The example below shows a possible application of these commands.
\flushleft
\newenvironment{vardesc}[1]{%
\settowidth{\parindent}{#1:\ }
\makebox[0pt][r]{#1:\ }}{}
\begin{displaymath}
a^2+b^2=c^2
\end{displaymath}
\begin{vardesc}{Where}$a$,
$b$ -- are adjoin to the right
angle of a right-angled triangle.
$c$ -- is the hypotenuse of
the triangle and feels lonely.
$d$ -- finally does not show up
here at all. Isn’t that puzzling?
\end{vardesc}
o
2
+ /
2
= c
2
Where: o, / – are adjoin to the right
angle of a right-angled triangle.
c – is the hypotenuse of the
triangle and feels lonely.
d – finally does not show up here
at all. Isn’t that puzzling?
6.6 Boxes
L
A
T
E
X builds up its pages by pushing around boxes. At first, each letter is
a little box, which is then glued to other letters to form words. These are
again glued to other words, but with special glue, which is elastic so that a
series of words can be squeezed or stretched as to exactly fill a line on the
page.
I admit, this is a very simplistic version of what really happens, but the
point is that T
E
X operates on glue and boxes. Letters are not the only things
that can be boxes. You can put virtually everything into a box, including
134 Customising L
A
T
E
X
other boxes. Each box will then be handled by L
A
T
E
X as if it were a single
letter.
In the past chapters you have already encountered some boxes, although
I did not tell you. The tabular environment and the \includegraphics,
for example, both produce a box. This means that you can easily arrange
two tables or images side by side. You just have to make sure that their
combined width is not larger than the textwidth.
You can also pack a paragraph of your choice into a box with either the
\parbox[pos]{width}{text}
command or the
\begin{minipage}[pos]{width} text \end{minipage}
environment. The pos parameter can take one of the letters c, t or b to
control the vertical alignment of the box, relative to the baseline of the
surrounding text. width takes a length argument specifying the width of the
box. The main difference between a minipage and a \parbox is that you
cannot use all commands and environments inside a parbox, while almost
anything is possible in a minipage.
While \parbox packs up a whole paragraph doing line breaking and
everything, there is also a class of boxing commands that operates only
on horizontally aligned material. We already know one of them; it’s called
\mbox. It simply packs up a series of boxes into another one, and can be
used to prevent L
A
T
E
X from breaking two words. As boxes can be put inside
boxes, these horizontal box packers give you ultimate flexibility.
\makebox[width][pos]{text}
width defines the width of the resulting box as seen from the outside.
5
Besides the length expressions, you can also use \width, \height, \depth,
and \totalheight in the width parameter. They are set from values obtained
by measuring the typeset text. The pos parameter takes a one letter value:
center, flushleft, flushright, or spread the text to fill the box.
The command \framebox works exactly the same as \makebox, but it
draws a box around the text.
The following example shows you some things you could do with the
\makebox and \framebox commands.
5
This means it can be smaller than the material inside the box. You can even set
the width to 0pt so that the text inside the box will be typeset without influencing the
surrounding boxes.
6.7 Rules 135
\makebox[\textwidth]{%
c e n t r a l}\par
\makebox[\textwidth][s]{%
s p r e a d}\par
\framebox[1.1\width]{Guess I’m
framed now!} \par
\framebox[0.8\width][r]{Bummer,
I am too wide} \par
\framebox[1cm][l]{never
mind, so am I}
Can you read this?
c e n t r a l
s p r e a d
Guess I’m framed now!
Bummer, I am too wide
never mind, so am I Can you read this?
Now that we control the horizontal, the obvious next step is to go for the
vertical.
6
No problem for L
A
T
E
X. The
\raisebox{lift}[extend-above-baseline][extend-below-baseline]{text}
command lets you define the vertical properties of a box. You can use \width,
\height, \depth, and \totalheight in the first three parameters, in order
to act upon the size of the box inside the text argument.
\raisebox{0pt}[0pt][0pt]{\Large%
\textbf{Aaaa\raisebox{-0.3ex}{a}%
\raisebox{-0.7ex}{aa}%
\raisebox{-1.2ex}{r}%
\raisebox{-2.2ex}{g}%
\raisebox{-4.5ex}{h}}}
she shouted, but not even the next
one in line noticed that something
terrible had happened to her.
Aaaa
a
aa
r
g
h
she shouted, but not
even the next one in line noticed that some-
thing terrible had happened to her.
6.7 Rules
A few pages back you may have noticed the command
\rule[lift]{width}{height}
In normal use it produces a simple black box.
\rule{3mm}{.1pt}%
\rule[-1mm]{5mm}{1cm}%
\rule{3mm}{.1pt}%
\rule[1mm]{1cm}{5mm}%
\rule{3mm}{.1pt}
6
Total control is only to be obtained by controlling both the horizontal and the vertical
. . .
136 Customising L
A
T
E
X
This is useful for drawing vertical and horizontal lines. The line on the title
page, for example, has been created with a \rule command.
The End.
Appendix A
Installing L
A
T
E
X
Knuth published the source to T
E
X back in a time when nobody knew about
OpenSource and/or Free Software. The License that comes with T
E
X lets you
do whatever you want with the source, but you can only call the result of your
work T
E
X if the program passes a set of tests Knuth has also provided. This has
lead to a situation where we have free T
E
X implementations for almost every
Operating System under the Sun. In this chapter you will give some hints on
what to install on Linux, Mac OS X and Windows to get T
E
X working.
A.1 What to Install
For using LaTeX on any computer system, you need several programs.
1. The T
E
X/L
A
T
E
X program for processing your L
A
T
E
X source files into
typeset PDF or DVI documents.
2. A text editor for editing your LaTeX source files. Some products even
let you start the latex program from within the editor.
3. A PDF/DVI viewer program for previewing and printing your docu-
ments.
4. A program to handle PostScript files and images for inclusion into
your documents.
For all platforms there are many programs that fit the requirements above.
Here we just tell about the ones we know, like and have some experience
with.
138 Installing L
A
T
E
X
A.2 T
E
X on Mac OS X
A.2.1 Get a T
E
X Distribution
Just download MacTeX. It is a pre-compiled LaTeX distribution for OS X.
MacTeX provides a full LaTeX installation plus a number of additional tools.
Get MaxTeX from http://www.tug.org/mactex/.
If you are already using Macports or Fink for installing Unix software
under OS X, install LaTeX using these package managers. Macport users
install LaTeX with port install texlive , Fink users use the command
fink install texlive .
A.2.2 Picking an Editor
The most popular open source editor for L
A
T
E
X on the mac seems to be
T
E
Xshop. Get a copy from http://www.uoregon.edu/~koch/texshop. It
is also contained in the MacTeX distribution.
Another fine editor is Texmaker. Apart from being a useful editor it
has the advantage of running on Windows, Mac and Unix/Linux equally
well. Go to http://www.xm1math.net/texmaker for further Information.
Note there is also a forked version of Texmaker called TexmakerX on http:
//texmakerx.sourceforge.net/ it promises additional functionality.
Recent T
E
XLive distributions contain the T
E
Xworks editor http://
texworks.org/ which is a multi-platform editor based on the T
E
XShop
design. Since T
E
Xworks uses the Qt toolkit, it is available on any platform
supported by this toolkit (MacOS X, Windows, Linux.)
A.2.3 Treat yourself to PDFView
Use PDFView for viewing PDF files generated by LaTeX, it integrates tightly
with your LaTeX text editor. PDFView is an open-source application can
be downloaded from the PDFView website on
http://pdfview.sourceforge.net/. Download and install PDFView. Open
PDFViews preferences dialog and make sure that the automatically reload
documents option is enabled and that PDFSync support is set to the Text-
Mate preset.
A.3 T
E
X on Windows
A.3.1 Getting T
E
X
First, get a copy of the excellent MiKT
E
X distribution from
http://www.miktex.org/. It contains all the basic programs and files
required to compile L
A
T
E
X documents. The coolest feature in my eyes, is
that MiKTeX will download missing L
A
T
E
X packages on the fly and install
A.4 T
E
X on Linux 139
them magically while compiling a document. Alternatively you can also use
the TeXlive distribution which exists for Windows, Unix and Mac OS to get
your base setup going http://www.tug.org/texlive/.
A.3.2 A L
A
T
E
X editor
L
A
T
E
X is a programming language for text documents. TeXnicCenter uses
many concepts from the programming-world to provide a nice and efficient
L
A
T
E
X writing environment in Windows. Get your copy from
http://http://www.texniccenter.org/. TeXnicCenter integrates nicely
with MiKTeX. Version 2.0 of TeXnicCenter will support Unicode, the recent
alpha version seems to be quite stable.
Other excellent choice is the editor provided by the LEd project available
on http://www.latexeditor.org.
See the note on Texmaker in the Mac section above for a third choice.
Recent T
E
XLive distributions contain the T
E
Xworks Editor http://
texworks.org/. It supports Unicode and requires at least Windows XP.
A.3.3 Document Preview
You will most likely be using Yap for DVI preview as it gets installed
with MikTeX. For PDF you may want to look at Sumatra PDF http:
//blog.kowalczyk.info/software/sumatrapdf/. I mention Sumatra PDF
because it lets you jump from any position in the pdf document back into
corresponding position in your source document.
A.3.4 Working with graphics
Working with high quality graphics in L
A
T
E
X means that you have to use
Encapsulated PostScript (eps) or PDF as your picture format. The
program that helps you deal with this is called GhostScript. You can get
it, together with its own front-end GhostView, from http://www.cs.wisc.
edu/~ghost/.
If you deal with bitmap graphics (photos and scanned material), you may
want to have a look at the open source photoshop alternative Gimp available
from http://gimp-win.sourceforge.net/.
A.4 T
E
X on Linux
If you work with Linux, chances are high that L
A
T
E
X is already installed on
your system, or at least available on the installation source you used to setup.
Use your package manager to install the following packages:
• texlive – the base T
E
X/L
A
T
E
X setup.
140 Installing L
A
T
E
X
• emacs (with auctex) – a Linux editor that integrates tightly with L
A
T
E
X
through the add-on AucTeX package.
• ghostscript – a PostScript preview program.
• xpdf and acrobat – a PDF preview program.
• imagemagick – a free program for converting bitmap images.
• gimp – a free photoshop look-a-like.
• inkscape – a free illustrator/corel draw look-a-like.
If you are looking for a more windows like graphical editing environment,
check out Texmaker or T
E
Xworks. See the note in the Mac section above.
Most Linux distros insist on splitting up their T
E
X environments into a
large number of optional packages, so if something is missing after your first
install, go check again.
Bibliography
[1] Leslie Lamport. L
A
T
E
X: A Document Preparation System. Addison-
Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, second edition, 1994, ISBN 0-201-
52983-1.
[2] Donald E. Knuth. The T
E
Xbook, Volume A of Computers and Type-
setting, Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, second edition, 1984,
ISBN 0-201-13448-9.
[3] Frank Mittelbach, Michel Goossens, Johannes Braams, David Carlisle,
Chris Rowley. The L
A
T
E
X Companion, (2nd Edition). Addison-Wesley,
Reading, Massachusetts, 2004, ISBN 0-201-36299-6.
[4] Michel Goossens, Sebastian Rahtz and Frank Mittelbach. The L
A
T
E
X
Graphics Companion. Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1997,
ISBN 0-201-85469-4.
[5] Each L
A
T
E
X installation should provide a so-called L
A
T
E
X Local Guide,
which explains the things that are special to the local system. It should
be contained in a file called local.tex. Unfortunately, some lazy sysops
do not provide such a document. In this case, go and ask your local
L
A
T
E
X guru for help.
[6] L
A
T
E
X3 Project Team. L
A
T
E
X2
ε
for authors. Comes with the L
A
T
E
X2
ε
distribution as usrguide.tex.
[7] L
A
T
E
X3 Project Team. L
A
T
E
X2
ε
for Class and Package writers. Comes
with the L
A
T
E
X2
ε
distribution as clsguide.tex.
[8] L
A
T
E
X3 Project Team. L
A
T
E
X2
ε
Font selection. Comes with the L
A
T
E
X2
ε
distribution as fntguide.tex.
[9] D. P. Carlisle. Packages in the ‘graphics’ bundle. Comes with the
‘graphics’ bundle as grfguide.tex, available from the same source your
L
A
T
E
X distribution came from.
[10] Rainer Schöpf, Bernd Raichle, Chris Rowley. A New Implementation
of L
A
T
E
X’s verbatim Environments. Comes with the ‘tools’ bundle as
142 BIBLIOGRAPHY
verbatim.dtx, available from the same source your L
A
T
E
X distribution
came from.
[11] Vladimir Volovich, Werner Lemberg and L
A
T
E
X3 Project Team. Cyril lic
languages support in L
A
T
E
X. Comes with the L
A
T
E
X2
ε
distribution as
cyrguide.tex.
[12] Graham Williams. The TeX Catalogue is a very complete listing of
many T
E
X and L
A
T
E
X related packages. Available online from CTAN:
//help/Catalogue/catalogue.html
[13] Keith Reckdahl. Using EPS Graphics in L
A
T
E
X2
ε
Documents, which
explains everything and much more than you ever wanted to know
about EPS files and their use in L
A
T
E
X documents. Available online from
CTAN://info/epslatex.ps
[14] Kristoffer H. Rose. X
Y
-pic User’s Guide. Downloadable from CTAN
with X
Y
-pic distribution
[15] John D. Hobby. A User’s Manual for METAPOST. Downloadable from
http://cm.bell-labs.com/who/hobby/
[16] Alan Hoenig. T
E
X Unbound. Oxford University Press, 1998, ISBN
0-19-509685-1; 0-19-509686-X (pbk.)
[17] Urs Oswald. Graphics in L
A
T
E
X2
ε
, containing some Java source files for
generating arbitrary circles and ellipses within the picture environment,
and METAPOST - A Tutorial. Both downloadable from http://www.
ursoswald.ch
[18] Till Tantau. TikZ&PGF Manual. Download from CTAN://graphics/
pgf/base/doc/generic/pgf/pgfmanual.pdf
[19] François Charette. Polyglossia: A Babel Replacement for X
E
L
A
T
E
X.
Comes with the T
E
XLive distribution as polyglossia.pdf. (Type
texdoc polyglossia on the command line.)
[20] François Charette. An ArabT
E
X-like interface for typesetting languages
in Arabic script with X
E
L
A
T
E
X. Comes with the T
E
XLive distribution as
arabxetex.pdf. (Type texdoc arabxetex on the command line.)
[21] Will Robertson and Khaled Hosny. The fontspec package. Comes with
the T
E
XLive distribution as fontspec.pdf. (Type texdoc fontspec
on the command line.)
[22] Apostolos Syropoulos. The xgreek package. Comes with the T
E
XLive
distribution as xgreek.pdf. (Type texdoc xgreek on the command
line.)
BIBLIOGRAPHY 143
[23] Vafa Khalighi. The bidi package. Comes with the T
E
XLive distribution
as bidi.pdf. (Type texdoc bidi on the command line.
[24] Vafa Khalighi. The XePersian package. Comes with the T
E
XLive
distribution as xepersian-doc.pdf. (Type texdoc xepersian on the
command line.
[25] Wenchang Sun. The xeCJK package. Comes with the T
E
XLive distribu-
tion as xeCJK.pdf. (Type texdoc xecjk on the command line.
Index
Symbols
\!, 69
", 21
"’, 34
"-, 34
"---, 34
"<, 34
"=, 34
">, 34
"‘, 34
$, 53
\,, 55, 69
-, 22
−, 22
\-, 21
–, 22
—, 22
., space after, 39
. . . , 24
\:, 66, 69
\;, 69
\@, 39
\[, 54, 55
\\, 19, 44, 45, 47, 130
\\*, 19
\], 54
~, 39
A
A4 paper, 11
A5 paper, 11
å, 25
abstract, 45
accent, 24
Acrobat Reader, 91
acute, 25
\addtolength, 131
advantages of L
A
T
E
X, 3
æ, 25
align, 62
\Alph, 34
\alph, 34
\Alpha, 75
American Mathematical Society, 53
amsbsy, 71
amsfonts, 70, 79
amsmath, 53, 59, 60, 68, 69, 71
amssymb, 56, 70, 75
amsthm, 71, 72
\and, 41
ansinew, 26
apostrophe, 58
\appendix, 40, 41
applemac, 26
Arabic, 38
arabxetex, 38
\arccos, 58
\arcsin, 58
\arctan, 58
\arg, 58
array, 67, 68
\arraystretch, 48
arrow symbols, 58
article class, 10
\Asbuk, 34
\asbuk, 34
\author, 41, 96
B
B5 paper, 11
babel, 20, 25, 33–36, 116
\backmatter, 41
INDEX 145
backslash, 5
\bar, 58
base font size, 11
beamer, 100–102, 105
\begin, 43, 106, 114
\Beta, 75
\bibitem, 85
bibliography, 85
bicig, 35
bidi, 38
\Big, 60
\big, 60
\big(, 66
\Bigg, 60
\bigg, 60
\bigskip, 130
binary relations, 59
\binom, 59
binomial coefficient, 59
blackboard bold, 56
block, 102
bm, 71
Bmatrix, 68
bmatrix, 68
\bmod, 58
bold face, 124
bold symbols, 56, 71
\boldmath, 71
\boldsymbol, 71
book class, 10
brace
horizontal, 57
bracketing, 60
brazilian, 28
C
calc, 131
\caption, 51, 52
cases, 68
\cdot, 57
\cdots, 57
center, 44
\chapter, 40
\chaptermark, 89
Chinese, 39
\ci, 119
\circle, 109
\circle*, 109
\cite, 85
CJK package, 31
\cleardoublepage, 52
\clearpage, 52
\cline, 47
color, 100
coloured text, 10
comma, 24
commands, 5
\!, 69
\,, 55, 69
\-, 21
\:, 66, 69
\;, 69
\@, 39
\[, 54, 55
\\, 19, 44, 45, 47, 130
\\*, 19
\], 54
\addtolength, 131
\Alph, 34
\alph, 34
\Alpha, 75
\and, 41
\appendix, 40, 41
\arccos, 58
\arcsin, 58
\arctan, 58
\arg, 58
\arraystretch, 48
\Asbuk, 34
\asbuk, 34
\author, 41, 96
\backmatter, 41
\bar, 58
\begin, 43, 106, 114
\Beta, 75
\bibitem, 85
\Big, 60
\big, 60
146 INDEX
\big(, 66
\Bigg, 60
\bigg, 60
\bigskip, 130
\binom, 59
\bmod, 58
\boldmath, 71
\boldsymbol, 71
\caption, 51, 52
\cdot, 57
\cdots, 57
\chapter, 40
\chaptermark, 89
\ci, 119
\circle, 109
\circle*, 109
\cite, 85
\cleardoublepage, 52
\clearpage, 52
\cline, 47
\cos, 58
\cosh, 58
\cot, 58
\coth, 58
\csc, 58
\date, 41
\ddots, 57
\DeclareMathOperator, 58
\deg, 58
\depth, 134, 135
\det, 58, 66
\dfrac, 59
\dim, 58
\displaystyle, 70
\documentclass, 9, 14, 20
\dq, 30
\dum, 119
\emph, 43, 124, 126
\end, 43, 106
\enumBul, 34
\enumEng, 34
\enumLat, 34
\eqref, 54
\exp, 58
\fbox, 21
\flq, 30
\flqq, 30
\foldera, 113
\folderb, 113
\footnote, 42, 52
\footskip, 132
\frac, 59
\framebox, 134
\frenchspacing, 33, 39
\frontmatter, 41
\frq, 30
\frqq, 30
\fussy, 20
\gcd, 58
\hat, 58
\headheight, 132
\headsep, 132
\height, 134, 135
\hline, 47
\hom, 58
\href, 95, 96, 98
\hspace, 121, 129
\hyphenation, 20
\idotsint, 69
\IEEEeqnarraymulticol, 65
\IEEEmulticol, 67
\IEEEnonumber, 66
\IEEEyesnumber, 67
\IEEEyessubnumber, 67
\ifpdf, 97
\ignorespaces, 121, 122
\ignorespacesafterend, 122
\iiiint, 69
\iiint, 69
\iint, 69
\include, 14, 15
\includegraphics, 84, 93, 97,
134
\includeonly, 15
\indent, 129
\index, 86, 87
\inf, 58
\input, 15
INDEX 147
\int, 60, 66
\item, 43
\ker, 58
\label, 42, 51, 54
\LaTeX, 21
\LaTeXe, 21
\ldots, 24, 57
\left, 60, 66
\lefteqn, 63, 65
\leftmark, 87, 89
\lg, 58
\lim, 58
\liminf, 58
\limsup, 58
\line, 108, 113
\linebreak, 19
\linespread, 127
\linethickness, 110, 111, 113
\listoffigures, 51
\listoftables, 51
\ln, 58
\log, 58, 66
\mainmatter, 41, 96
\makebox, 134
\makeindex, 86
\maketitle, 41
\marginparpush, 132
\marginparsep, 132
\marginparwidth, 132
\mathbb, 56
\max, 58, 66
\mbox, 21, 24, 134
\min, 58
\multicolumn, 48
\multicolumns, 65
\multiput, 107, 110
\newcommand, 69, 120, 121
\newenvironment, 121
\newline, 19
\newpage, 19
\newsavebox, 112
\newtheorem, 71
\noindent, 129
\nolinebreak, 19
\nombre, 29
\nonumber, 66
\nopagebreak, 19
\not, 76
\oddsidemargin, 132
\oval, 111, 113
\overbrace, 57
\overleftarrow, 58
\overline, 57
\overrightarrow, 58
\pagebreak, 19
\pageref, 42, 90
\pagestyle, 13
\paperheight, 132
\paperwidth, 132
\par, 124
\paragraph, 40
\parbox, 134
\parindent, 128
\parskip, 128
\part, 40
\partial, 59
\phantom, 52, 70
\pmod, 58
\Pr, 58
\printindex, 87
\prod, 60
\protect, 52
\providecommand, 121
\ProvidesPackage, 123
\put, 107–112
\qbezier, 105, 107, 113
\qedhere, 73
\qquad, 55, 69
\quad, 55, 65, 69
\raisebox, 135
\ref, 42, 51, 90
\renewcommand, 120
\renewenvironment, 121
\right, 60, 66, 67
\right., 60
\rightmark, 87, 89
\rule, 49, 121, 135, 136
\savebox, 112
148 INDEX
\scriptscriptstyle, 70
\scriptstyle, 70
\sec, 58
\section, 40, 52
\sectionmark, 89
\selectlanguage, 26
\setlength, 106, 128, 131
\settodepth, 133
\settoheight, 133
\settowidth, 133
\shorthandoff, 116
\sin, 58, 66
\sinh, 58
\slash, 22
\sloppy, 20
\smallskip, 130
\smash, 55
\sqrt, 57
\stackrel, 59
\stretch, 121, 129
\subparagraph, 40
\subsection, 40
\subsectionmark, 89
\substack, 60
\subsubsection, 40
\sum, 60, 66
\sup, 58
\tabcolsep, 48
\tableofcontents, 40
\tag, 54
\tan, 58
\tanh, 58
\TeX, 21
\texorpdfstring, 97
\textbackslash, 5
\textcelsius, 23
\textdegree, 23
\texteuro, 23
\textheight, 132
\textstyle, 70
\textwidth, 132
\tfrac, 59
\theoremstyle, 71
\thicklines, 108, 111, 113
\thinlines, 111, 113
\thispagestyle, 13
\title, 41
\tnss, 120
\today, 21
\topmargin, 132
\totalheight, 134, 135
\ud, 69
\underbrace, 57
\underline, 43, 57
\unitlength, 106, 108
\usebox, 112
\usepackage, 10, 13, 23, 25–27,
34, 123
\usetikzlibrary, 117
\vdots, 57
\vec, 58
\vector, 108
\verb, 46
\verbatiminput, 89
\vspace, 130
\widehat, 58
\widetilde, 58
\width, 134, 135
comment, 6
comments, 6
\cos, 58
\cosh, 58
\cot, 58
\coth, 58
cp1251, 26, 35
cp850, 26
cp866nav, 26
cross-references, 42
\csc, 58
curly braces, 5, 124
Cyrillic, 37
D
dash, 22
\date, 41
dcolumn, 48
\ddots, 57
decimal alignment, 48
INDEX 149
\DeclareMathOperator, 58
\deg, 58
degree symbol, 22
delimiters, 60
\depth, 134, 135
description, 43
\det, 58, 66
Deutsch, 29
\dfrac, 59
diagonal dots, 57
\dim, 58
dimensions, 129
display style, 53, 55
displaymath, 54
\displaystyle, 70
doc, 12
document font size, 11
document title, 11
\documentclass, 9, 14, 20
dot, 57
dotless ı and , 25
dots, 57
three, 57
double line spacing, 127
double sided, 11
\dq, 30
\dum, 119
E
eepic, 109
ellipsis, 24
em-dash, 22
\emph, 43, 124, 126
empty, 13
en-dash, 22
Encapsulated PostScript, 83, 93,
139
encodings
font
LGR, 27
OT1, 27
T1, 27, 33
T2*, 33
T2A, 27, 33
T2B, 27
T2C, 27
X2, 27
input
ansinew, 26
applemac, 26
cp1251, 26, 35
cp850, 26
cp866nav, 26
koi8-ru, 26, 33
latin1, 26
macukr, 26
mn, 35
utf8, 26, 27, 35
\end, 43, 106
\enumBul, 34
\enumEng, 34
enumerate, 43
\enumLat, 34
environments
Bmatrix, 68
IEEEeqnarray, 61, 62, 64
Vmatrix, 68
abstract, 45
align, 62
array, 67, 68
block, 102
bmatrix, 68
cases, 68
center, 44
comment, 6
description, 43
displaymath, 54
enumerate, 43
eqnarray, 62
equation*, 54, 55, 61
equation, 54, 55, 61, 63
figure, 50, 51
flushleft, 44
flushright, 44
frame, 102
itemize, 43
lscommand, 119
matrix, 68
150 INDEX
minipage, 134
multline*, 61
multline, 61, 63
parbox, 134
picture, 105, 106, 109, 110
pmatrix, 68
proof, 72
quotation, 45
quote, 45
table, 50, 51
tabular, 46, 134
thebibliography, 85
tikzpicture, 115
verbatim, 46, 89
verse, 45
vmatrix, 68
eqnarray, 62
\eqref, 54
equation, 53
L
A
T
E
X, 54
amsmath, 54
multiple, 62
equation, 54, 55, 61, 63
equation*, 54, 55, 61
eurosym, 23
executive paper, 11
\exp, 58
exponent, 56
exscale, 12
extension, 13
.aux, 14
.cls, 14
.dtx, 13
.dvi, 14, 84
.eps, 84
.fd, 14
.idx, 14, 86
.ilg, 14
.ind, 14, 86
.ins, 14
.lof, 14
.log, 14
.lot, 14
.sty, 13, 90
.tex, 8, 13
.toc, 14
F
fancyhdr, 87–89
\fbox, 21
figure, 50, 51
file types, 13
floating bodies, 49
\flq, 30
\flqq, 30
flushleft, 44
flushright, 44
\foldera, 113
\folderb, 113
font, 123
\footnotesize, 124
\Huge, 124
\huge, 124
\LARGE, 124
\Large, 124
\large, 124
\mathbf, 125
\mathcal, 125
\mathit, 125
\mathnormal, 125
\mathrm, 125
\mathsf, 125
\mathtt, 125
\normalsize, 124
\scriptsize, 124
\small, 124
\textbf, 124
\textit, 124
\textmd, 124
\textnormal, 124
\textrm, 124
\textsc, 124
\textsf, 124
\textsl, 124
\texttt, 124
\textup, 124
\tiny, 124
font encoding, 12
INDEX 151
font encodings, 27
LGR, 27
OT1, 27
T1, 27, 33
T2*, 33
T2A, 27, 33
T2B, 27
T2C, 27
X2, 27
font size, 123, 124
fontenc, 12, 27, 33
fontspec, 36, 99
footer, 13
\footnote, 42, 52
\footnotesize, 124
\footskip, 132
\frac, 59
fraction, 59
fragile commands, 52
frame, 102
\framebox, 134
French, 28
frenchb, 29
\frenchspacing, 33, 39
\frontmatter, 41
\frq, 30
\frqq, 30
\fussy, 20
G
\gcd, 58
geometry, 89
German, 26, 29
GhostScript, 9, 83, 139
GhostView, 139
Gimp, 139
graphics, 10, 83
graphicx, 83, 93, 100
grave, 25
Greek, 32, 37
Greek letters, 56
grouping, 124
H
HL
A
T
E
X, 31
hL
A
T
E
Xp, 31
\hat, 58
header, 13
\headheight, 132
textttheadings, 13
\headsep, 132
Hebrew, 38
\height, 134, 135
\hline, 47
\hom, 58
horizontal
brace, 57
dots, 57
line, 57
space, 129
\href, 95, 96, 98
\hspace, 121, 129
\Huge, 124
\huge, 124
hyperref, 38, 91, 93, 94, 97, 98, 100
hypertext, 90
hyphen, 22
hyphenat, 89
\hyphenation, 20
I
\idotsint, 69
IEEEeqnarray, 61, 62, 64
\IEEEeqnarraymulticol, 65
\IEEEmulticol, 67
\IEEEnonumber, 66
IEEEtrantools, 64
\IEEEyesnumber, 67
\IEEEyessubnumber, 67
ifpdf, 97
\ifpdf, 97
ifthen, 12
\ignorespaces, 121, 122
\ignorespacesafterend, 122
\iiiint, 69
\iiint, 69
\iint, 69
152 INDEX
\include, 14, 15
\includegraphics, 84, 93, 97, 134
\includeonly, 15
\indent, 129
indentfirst, 129
index, 86
\index, 86, 87
\inf, 58
\input, 15
input encodings
ansinew, 26
applemac, 26
cp1251, 26, 35
cp850, 26
cp866nav, 26
koi8-ru, 26, 33
latin1, 26
macukr, 26
mn, 35
utf8, 26, 27, 35
input file, 7
inputenc, 12, 26, 27, 33
\int, 60, 66
integral operator, 60
international, 25
italic, 124
\item, 43
itemize, 43
J
Japanese, 39
Jawi, 38
K
kashida, 38
Kashmiri, 38
\ker, 58
Knuth, Donald E., 1
koi8-ru, 26, 33
Korean, 30, 39
Korean font
UHC font, 31
Korean input files, 30
Kurdish, 38
L
\label, 42, 51, 54
Lamport, Leslie, 2
language, 25
\LARGE, 124
\Large, 124
\large, 124
\LaTeX, 21
L
A
T
E
X3, 4
\LaTeXe, 21
latexsym, 12
latin1, 26
layout, 131
layouts, 132
\ldots, 24, 57
\left, 60, 66
left aligned, 44
\lefteqn, 63, 65
\leftmark, 87, 89
legal paper, 11
letter paper, 11
\lg, 58
LGR, 27
ligature, 24
\lim, 58
\liminf, 58
\limsup, 58
line
horizontal, 57
\line, 108, 113
line break, 19
line spacing, 127
\linebreak, 19
\linespread, 127
\linethickness, 110, 111, 113
\listoffigures, 51
\listoftables, 51
\ln, 58
\log, 58, 66
long equations, 61
longtable, 48
lscommand, 119
INDEX 153
M
MacTeX, 138
macukr, 26
\mainmatter, 41, 96
\makebox, 134
makeidx, 12, 86
makeidx package, 86
\makeindex, 86
makeindex program, 86
\maketitle, 41
Malay, 38
\marginparpush, 132
\marginparsep, 132
\marginparwidth, 132
margins, 131
math mode, 55
math spacing, 69
\mathbb, 56
\mathbf, 125
\mathcal, 125
mathematical
accents, 57
delimiter, 60
functions, 58
minus, 22
mathematics, 53
\mathit, 125
\mathnormal, 125
\mathrm, 125
mathrsfs, 79
\mathsf, 125
mathtext, 33
\mathtt, 125
matrix, 68
matrix, 68
\max, 58, 66
\mbox, 21, 24, 134
METAPOST, 93
mhchem, 70
microtype, 100
MiKT
E
X, 138
\min, 58
minimal class, 10
minipage, 134
minus sign, 22
Mittelbach, Frank, 2
mn, 35
modulo function, 58
\multicolumn, 48
\multicolumns, 65
\multiput, 107, 110
multline, 61, 63
multline*, 61
N
\newcommand, 69, 120, 121
\newenvironment, 121
\newline, 19
\newpage, 19
\newsavebox, 112
\newtheorem, 71
\noindent, 129
\nolinebreak, 19
\nombre, 29
\nonumber, 66
\nopagebreak, 19
\normalsize, 124
\not, 76
ntheorem, 72
numprint, 29
O
\oddsidemargin, 132
œ, 25
one column, 11
option, 9
optional parameters, 5
OT1, 27
Ottoman, 38
\oval, 111, 113
\overbrace, 57
overfull hbox, 20
\overleftarrow, 58
\overline, 57
\overrightarrow, 58
P
package, 7, 10, 119
packages
154 INDEX
amsbsy, 71
amsfonts, 70, 79
amsmath, 53, 59, 60, 68, 69, 71
amssymb, 56, 70, 75
amsthm, 71, 72
arabxetex, 38
babel, 20, 25, 33–36, 116
beamer, 100–102, 105
bicig, 35
bidi, 38
bm, 71
calc, 131
color, 100
dcolumn, 48
doc, 12
eepic, 109
eurosym, 23
exscale, 12
fancyhdr, 87–89
fontenc, 12, 27, 33
fontspec, 36, 99
frenchb, 29
geometry, 89
graphicx, 83, 93, 100
hyperref, 38, 91, 93, 94, 97, 98,
100
hyphenat, 89
IEEEtrantools, 64
ifpdf, 97
ifthen, 12
indentfirst, 129
inputenc, 12, 26, 27, 33
latexsym, 12
layout, 131
layouts, 132
longtable, 48
makeidx, 12, 86
mathrsfs, 79
mathtext, 33
mhchem, 70
microtype, 100
ntheorem, 72
numprint, 29
pdf, 115, 118
pgf, 105, 115
pgfplot, 118
polyglossia, 36–38
ppower4, 100
prosper, 100
pstricks, 109
pxfonts, 93
showidx, 87
syntonly, 12, 15
textcomp, 23
tikz, 105, 115, 116
txfonts, 93
verbatim, 6, 89
xalx, 34
xeCJK, 39
xepersian, 38
xgreek, 37
page layout, 131
page style, 13
empty, 13
headings, 13
plain, 13
\pagebreak, 19
\pageref, 42, 90
\pagestyle, 13
paper size, 11, 91, 131
\paperheight, 132
\paperwidth, 132
\par, 124
paragraph, 17
\paragraph, 40
parameter, 5
\parbox, 134
parbox, 134
\parindent, 128
\parskip, 128
\part, 40
\partial, 59
partial derivative, 59
Pashto, 38
PDF, 90, 98
pdf, 115, 118
pdfL
A
T
E
X, 92, 100
pdfL
A
T
E
X, 91
INDEX 155
pdfT
E
X, 91
PDFView, 138
period, 24
Persian, 38
pgf, 105, 115
pgfplot, 118
\phantom, 52, 70
picture, 105, 106, 109, 110
piecewise function, 67
placement specifier, 50
plain, 13
pmatrix, 68
\pmod, 58
polyglossia, 36–38
Português, 27
Portuguese, 27
PostScript, 3, 9, 31, 52, 83, 84, 92,
97, 100, 106, 137, 140
Encapsulated, 83, 93, 139
ppower4, 100
\Pr, 58
preamble, 7
prime, 58
\printindex, 87
proc class, 10
\prod, 60
product operator, 60
proof, 72
prosper, 100
\protect, 52
\providecommand, 121
\ProvidesPackage, 123
pstricks, 109
\put, 107–112
pxfonts, 93
Q
\qbezier, 105, 107, 113
\qedhere, 73
\qquad, 55, 69
\quad, 55, 65, 69
quotation, 45
quotation marks, 21
quote, 45
R
\raisebox, 135
\ref, 42, 51, 90
\renewcommand, 120
\renewenvironment, 121
report class, 10
reserved characters, 5
\right, 60, 66, 67
right-aligned, 44
\right., 60
\rightmark, 87, 89
roman, 124
\rule, 49, 121, 135, 136
Russian, 37
S
sans serif, 124
\savebox, 112
Scandinavian letters, 25
\scriptscriptstyle, 70
\scriptsize, 124
\scriptstyle, 70
\sec, 58
\section, 40, 52
\sectionmark, 89
\selectlanguage, 26
\setlength, 106, 128, 131
\settodepth, 133
\settoheight, 133
\settowidth, 133
\shorthandoff, 116
showidx, 87
\sin, 58, 66
Sindhi, 38
single sided, 11
\sinh, 58
slanted, 124
Slash, 22
\slash, 22
slides class, 10
\sloppy, 20
\small, 124
Small Caps, 124
\smallskip, 130
156 INDEX
\smash, 55
space, 4
spacing
math mode, 55
special character, 24
\sqrt, 57
square brackets, 5
square root, 57
\stackrel, 59
\stretch, 121, 129
structure, 7
strut, 49
\subparagraph, 40
subscript, 56
\subsection, 40
\subsectionmark, 89
\substack, 60
\subsubsection, 40
\sum, 60, 66
sum operator, 60
\sup, 58
superscript, 56
syntonly, 12, 15
T
T1, 27, 33
T2*, 33
T2A, 27, 33
T2B, 27
T2C, 27
\tabcolsep, 48
table, 46
table, 50, 51
table of contents, 40
\tableofcontents, 40
tabular, 46, 134
\tag, 54
\tan, 58
\tanh, 58
\TeX, 21
TeXnicCenter, 139
\texorpdfstring, 97
text style, 53, 55
\textbackslash, 5
\textbf, 124
\textcelsius, 23
textcomp, 23
\textdegree, 23
\texteuro, 23
\textheight, 132
\textit, 124
\textmd, 124
\textnormal, 124
\textrm, 124
\textsc, 124
\textsf, 124
\textsl, 124
\textstyle, 70
\texttt, 124
\textup, 124
\textwidth, 132
\tfrac, 59
thebibliography, 85
\theoremstyle, 71
\thicklines, 108, 111, 113
\thinlines, 111, 113
\thispagestyle, 13
tikz, 105, 115, 116
tikzpicture, 115
tilde, 22, 57
tilde ( ~), 39
\tiny, 124
title, 11, 41
\title, 41
\tnss, 120
\today, 21
\topmargin, 132
\totalheight, 134, 135
Turkish, 38
two column, 11
txfonts, 93
U
\ud, 69
Uighur, 38
umlaut, 25
\underbrace, 57
underfull hbox, 20
INDEX 157
\underline, 43, 57
\unitlength, 106, 108
units, 129, 130
upright, 124
Urdu, 38
URL link, 22
\usebox, 112
\usepackage, 10, 13, 23, 25–27, 34,
123
\usetikzlibrary, 117
utf8, 26, 27, 35
V
\vdots, 57
\vec, 58
\vector, 108
vectors, 58
\verb, 46
verbatim, 6, 89
verbatim, 46, 89
\verbatiminput, 89
verse, 45
vertical
dots, 57
vertical space, 130
Vmatrix, 68
vmatrix, 68
\vspace, 130
W
whitespace, 4
after commands, 5
at the start of a line, 4
\widehat, 58
\widetilde, 58
\width, 134, 135
Word, 87
WYSIWYG, 2, 3
X
X2, 27
xalx, 34
xeCJK, 39
X
E
L
A
T
E
X, 98
xepersian, 38
X
E
T
E
X, 98
xgreek, 37
Xpdf, 91

ii
Copyright ©1995-2011 Tobias Oetiker and Contributors. All rights reserved. This document is free; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. This document is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but without any warranty; without even the implied warranty of merchantability or fittness for a particular purpose. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this document; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.

Thank you!
Much of the material used in this introduction comes from an Austrian A introduction to L TEX 2.09 written in German by: Hubert Partl Irene Hyna <partl@mail.boku.ac.at> <Irene.Hyna@bmwf.ac.at> <noemail>
Zentraler Informatikdienst der Universität für Bodenkultur Wien Bundesministerium für Wissenschaft und Forschung Wien

Elisabeth Schlegl
in Graz

If you are interested in the German document, you can find a version A updated for L TEX 2ε by Jörg Knappen at CTAN://info/lshort/german

Erik Frisk. Hendrik Maryns. Arlo Griffiths. Marc Bevand. Rémi Letot. David Jones. Salvatore Bonaccorso. Eric Abrahamsen. Kurt Rosenfeld. Miles Spielberg. David Frey. it must have been one of the people below dropping me a line. Martien Hulsen. and Mikhail Zotov. Joseph Hilferty. Pierre Chardaire. Rick Zaccone. Urs Oswald. Axel Kielhorn. Laszlo Szathmary. Morten Høgholm. David Carlisle. Jörg Knappen. Chris Rowley. Vera Marún. Nikos Pothitos. Carl-Gustav Werner. Jakob. Claus Malten. Robin Fairbairns. Graversen. Craig Schlenter. Lenimar Nunes de Andrade. Matthieu Stigler. Robert Funnell. Chris McCormack. Rockrush Engch. Pietro Braione. Cyril Goutte. Kevin Van Maren. . Byron Jones. Fritz Zaucker. Risto Saarelma. Alain Kessi. David Dureisseix. Bernd Rosenlecher. all the mistakes you’ll find in this book are mine. Eilinger August. Wim van Dam. Lan Thuy Pham. Chris York. suggestions and material to improve this paper. Mike Lee. Markus Brühwiler.iv Thank you! The following individuals helped with corrections. Daniel Flipo. Mic Milic Frederickx. Moser. Josef Tkadlec. Martin Maechler. Carl Cerecke. If you ever find a word that is spelled correctly. Alan Jeffrey. Eric Jacoboni. They put in a big effort to help me get this document into its present shape. Flori Lambrechts. Fabian Wernli. Brian Ripley. Axel Liljencrantz. Scott Veirs. Friedemann Brauer. Maik Lehradt. Demerson Andre Polli. Aleksandar S Milosevic. Maksym Polyakov Hubert Partl. Manuel Oetiker. Matt Kraai. Christopher Sawtell. András Salamon. Greg Gamble. Nils Kanning. Sander de Kievit. Hans Ehrbar. I would like to sincerely thank all of them. Jordi Serra i Solanich. Kasper B. Michael Koundouros. Jan Busa. Christopher Chin. Björn Hvittfeldt. Andy Goth. Andrzej Kawalec. Frank Fischli. Kjetil Kjernsmo. Johan Lundberg. Rosemary Bailey. Marcelo Pasin. Tobias Klauser. Neil Hammond. Alexandre Guimond. Hans Fugal. Rasmus Borup Hansen. Alexander Mai. Johannes-Maria Kaltenbach. Young U. Gilles Schintgen. Henrik Mitsch. Ryu. Elliot. Tobias Krewer. Breno Pietracci. Richard Nagy. Benjamin Deschwanden Jan Dittberner. Werner Icking. David Woodhouse. Matthias Dreier. Frank. Jörg Fischer. Neil Carter. Barbara Beeton. Stefan M. John Refling. Christian Kern. Michael John Downes. Philipp Nagele. J. Didier Verna. Martin Pfister. José Carlos Santos. Mike Ressler. Geoffrey Swindale. Hanspeter Schmid. Matthew Widmann. Mike Chapman. Diego Clavadetscher. Baron Schwartz. Boris Tobotras. Robert Funnell. I. Naturally.

A This short introduction describes L TEX 2ε and should be sufficient for A most applications of L TEX. Chapter 6 contains some potentially dangerous information about how to A alter the standard document layout produced by L TEX. Refer to [1. A Chapter 5 shows how to use L TEX for creating graphics. Chapter 4 explains indexes. 3] for a complete description of the A X system. It explains A most of the essential L TEX commands and environments. After reading this chapter. You A will also learn a bit about the history of L TEX. you should have a rough understanding how L TEX works. A Chapter 3 explains how to typeset formulae with L TEX.Preface A L TEX [1] is a typesetting system that is very suitable for producing scientific and mathematical documents of high typographical quality. At the end demonstrate how to use one of L TE of the chapter are tables listing all mathematical symbols available in A L TEX. depending on your abilities. Chapter 2 goes into the details of typesetting your documents. you describe the picture and have L TEX draw it for you. saving it to a file and then A A including it into L TEX. After reading this A chapter. you will be able to write your first documents. Instead of drawing a picture with some graphics program. L TE This introduction is split into 6 chapters: A Chapter 1 tells you about the basic structure of L TEX 2ε documents. It will tell you A how to change things such that the beautiful output of L TEX turns ugly or stunning. bibliography generation and inclusion of EPS A graphics. Many examples A X’s main strengths. It is also suitable for producing all sorts of other documents. . from simple letters to complete A books. L TEX uses TEX [2] as its formatting engine. It introduces creation of PDF documents with pdfL TEX and presents some handy extension packages.

If you have ideas for something to be added. removed or altered in this document. I just wrote CTAN: followed by whatever location within the CTAN tree you should go to. If you have problems getting started.vi Preface It is important to read the chapters in order—the book is not that big.org. Tobias Oetiker <tobi@oetiker. please let me know. On many university computer clusters you will find that A a L TEX installation is available. The homepage is at http://www. A If you want to run L TEX on your own computer. have a look at one of the Comprehensive TEX Archive Network (CTAN) sites. Instead of writing down complete urls. You will find other references to CTAN throughout the book. ready to use. but to teach you how to write your documents so that they A can be processed by L TEX. take a look at what is available from CTAN://systems.ctan. from the PC and Mac to large UNIX and VMS systems. A L TEX is available for most computers. especially pointers to software and documents you might want to download.ch> OETIKER+PARTNER AG Aarweg 15 4600 Olten Switzerland The current version of this document is available on CTAN://info/lshort . after all. ask the person who gave you this booklet. Be sure to carefully read the examples. A If you need to get hold of any L TEX related material. Information on how to access A the local L TEX installation should be provided in the Local Guide [5]. The scope of this document is not to tell you how to install and set up a A L TEX system. I am especially interested in feedback from A L TEX novices about which bits of this intro are easy to understand and which could be explained better. because a lot of the information is in the examples placed throughout the book.

.2. . . . . . . . .2 Basics . . . . 1. . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 The Structure of Text and Language 2. . . .4 Input File Structure . . . . . . A 1.1 Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Layout Design . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Document Classes . .1 Author. . . .8 Big Projects . . . . . .2. . .3 L TEX Input Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Special Characters and Symbols . 2. . . .3 Ready-Made Strings . 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Packages .7 Files You Might Encounter . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . 1. . .5 A Typical Command Line Session . . . . . . . . . . . A 1. 2 Typesetting Text 2. . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . .1 TEX . . . . . . . . . . 1. . . . . . . . . . . . 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. . . . . . . .6 The Layout of the Document . . . .3. . . .6. . .2. . . . 1. . . . .3 L TEX Commands . .6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A 1.2 L TEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. . . . . . . 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Hyphenation .1 The Name of the Game . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. . iii v 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 4 4 5 5 6 7 7 9 9 10 13 13 14 17 17 19 19 20 21 21 . and Typesetter 1. . . . . . . . 2. . . . . Book Designer. . . . 1. . . . 1. . . . . .6. . . . . .3 Page Styles . . . . . . . . . 1. . . . . . . . . . . .2 Special Characters .2 Line Breaking and Page Breaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Contents Thank you! Preface 1 Things You Need to Know 1. . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . 1. . .3 Advantages and Disadvantages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Justified Paragraphs . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. . . . . . . . .

. . . . Emphasized Words . . . . . .9 Accents and Special Characters . . .4. . . . . . and Verse . .2 Dashes and Hyphens . . . . . . . . . . . 2. . . . .6 2. . . . . . .3 Common Usage . . . . . . . . . . . 2. . Flushright. . . . . . 3. . . . . . . . .1 Math Mode . .4. . . CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 The Euro Currency Symbol (e) . . and Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . . . . . . . . . . . .11. . .3 Tilde (∼) . .8 The Unicode option . . . . . 2. and Description 2. . . . . . . . .5 Writing in Greek . .1 Problems with Traditional Commands 3. . . . . . . . . Environments . . . . .2 IEEEeqnarray Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Building Blocks of a Mathematical Formula . . . Cross References . . . . . .5 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Tabular . . . . . . . Titles. 3. . . . . . . .4.5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 The AMS-L TEX bundle .2 Single Equations . . . . .12 2. . . . . . . . .5 Degree Symbol (◦) . .7 Support for Mongolian . . . . 2. and Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . .6 Support for Cyrillic . . . 3. . . . . . . . .8 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Multiple Equations . . .11. . . . .11 2. . . . . 2.3 Support for German . ) . . . . . . . Footnotes . 2. .1 Support for Portuguese . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Support for Korean . . . . . . . . .1 Quotation Marks . . . Enumerate. . . . . 2. . . . . . 2. . . . 2. . . .5. . . .11. . . . 2. . . . . . 2. . . . . . . . .4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 2. . . .10 2. . . . . . . . . . 2. .6 Arrays and Matrices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floating Bodies . . . . 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . . . . . . . .4 Slash (/) . . . . . . 2. . . . . . . .5. . . . . The Space Between Words . . . 2. 3. . .5 Printing Verbatim .4. . 2. . .5. . . . . . . . . .7 Ellipsis (. . . . .5. . . . . . . . . . 3. . . . . . .5.viii 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11. . . . . . . .2 Flushleft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 22 22 22 22 23 24 24 24 25 27 28 29 30 32 33 34 35 39 40 42 42 43 43 43 44 45 45 46 46 49 52 53 53 53 55 56 61 62 62 64 64 67 2. . .5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11.5. . . .4 Abstract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5. . . 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Protecting Fragile Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Single Equations that are Too Long: multline 3. . . .4. 2. . . . . . 2. . . . . .2 Support for French . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11. .3 Quote. . .5. . .5. . . . . . . . . .1 Itemize. . . . . . . . . . .9 2. . . . 2. . . . . . . Quotation. . . . . . . 2. . . . . . . Chapters. International Language Support . .13 3 Typesetting Mathematical Formulae A 3. . . . .8 Ligatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .CONTENTS 3. . . . . . .2. . . . . . .3 The PGF and TikZ Graphics Packages . . . . . . . .6 Installing Extra Packages . . . .6 \multiput and \linethickness . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Fiddling with the Math Fonts . .8. . . . . . . . . . 5. .7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Hypertext Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10 List of Mathematical Symbols . . . . . . . . . . .1 Phantoms . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Creating Presentations . .8 Multiple Use of Predefined Picture Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Ovals . . . . . 4.9 Quadratic Bézier Curves . 5. . 4. . . . . . 5. . . 5 Producing Mathematical Graphics 5.2. . 5. . .7 Working with pdfL TEX . . .7. . . 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A A 4. .6 Problems with Bookmarks . . . .2 The picture Environment . . . . . .9.2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. . . .7. .1 The Fonts . . . . . . . . . 5. . . A 4. Symbol . . . . . 5. . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . 3. . . . . . . . . . . A X.2 Bibliography . . . . . . . . 4.2 Compatibility Between XEL TEX and pdfL TEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lemmas. . . . . . . . 4. .5 Text and Formulas . . . . . . . .8. . . .5 The Verbatim Package . . . . .2 The Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Theorems. . 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Arrows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. . . . . . . . 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Basic Commands . .2. . .7 Source Compatibility Between L TEX and pdfL TEX . . . . . . . 4.8. . . . . 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Using Graphics .7 Spacing in Math Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.4 Fancy Headers .1 Overview . . . .7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. . . . . . . . .1 Proofs and End-of-Proof 3. . . . .11 Rapidity in the Special Theory of Relativity 5. . . . . . . . . . .1 Bold Symbols . . 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . 5. . . . . . . 69 70 70 71 71 72 75 83 83 85 86 87 89 89 90 91 92 93 93 96 96 97 98 98 100 100 105 105 106 106 107 108 109 110 110 111 112 113 114 115 115 ix 4 Specialities 4. . . . . . . 5. . . . . .7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. . . . . . . . . 4. . . . . . .4 Circles . . .7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . .3 Indexing . . .1 Including Encapsulated PostScript . . . .10 Catenary . . . . .7. . . . . . . . . . . . A A 4. 4. . . . 4. . . . . . . . .2 Line Segments . . . 3. . . .8 Working with XEL TE 4. . . . . . . . .1 PDF Documents for the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Problems with Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .2 Danger. . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Extra Space .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. . . . . . . . . . A. . . . . . .5 More Fun With Lengths . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . .3. . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Line Spacing . . . . .1. 6.1.1. . . . . . . .4 Working with graphics . . . . .7 Rules . . . . . . . . . .1 New Commands . . . . . . . . A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. . . . . .3 TEX on Windows . . . . . .4 TEX on Linux . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Treat yourself to PDFView A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Advice . . . . . . 6. . . .2. . . 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 What to Install . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . .2 Picking an Editor . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Getting TEX . 6. . . . . .1 New Commands.3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . A A Installing L TEX A. . . .3 Spacing . . . . . . . . . . .3 Horizontal Space . . . . . . . CONTENTS 119 119 120 121 121 122 123 123 123 126 127 127 127 128 129 130 131 133 133 135 137 137 138 138 138 138 138 138 139 139 139 139 141 144 . . . . . . . . . . . A A.4 Vertical Space . . . . .1 Font Changing Commands . . . 6. . . A 6. . . . . .1 Get a TEX Distribution . . . . . . . .2. . . . . Will Robinson. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Boxes . . . 6. . . Danger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Page Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. . A. . . . . . . . . .3 Document Preview . . . . . . . . . 6. A. .2. . . . . . . 6. . . . . . . .2 New Environments . . . . . .1. . 6. .5 Your Own Package . . . . . . . A. . . . . Environments and Packages 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. .2 TEX on Mac OS X . . . . . . . . . . . .2 A L TEX editor . . . . . . . . . . .4 Commandline L TEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .x A 6 Customising L TEX 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. . . . . . . . . . . . A. . .2. Bibliography Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. .2 Fonts and Sizes . . . . . . . 6. . . .3.2 Paragraph Formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. . . . A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 6. . .1 6. . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Sample code for the beamer class . . . . . . . .1 1. .2 A A Minimal L TEX File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Example Package. .1 4. .List of Figures 1. 123 Layout parameters for this book. . . . 132 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example of a Realistic Journal Article. . 7 8 Example fancyhdr Setup. . . . .

.

. . . . . .17 3. Arrows as Accents. . . . Float Placing Permissions. . . . . . . . .5 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Greek Letters. . . . .1 1. . . . . . . . . AMS Binary Relations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Document Classes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 2. . . . . . .10 3. . . . . . .7 3. .16 3. . . . . . . Non-Mathematical Symbols. . Accents and Special Characters. . .List of Tables 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bulgarian. . . AMS Arrows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AMS Greek and Hebrew. . . . . . . Large Delimiters. .3 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 3. . . . . . .11 3. . . . . . . . . . . .2 3. . . . . . . .3 3. . . . .13 3. . . . Binary Relations. . . . . . . . . . .4 2. Math Mode Accents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . A L TEX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 3. . . . .6 3. . . . . . . . Greek Special Characters. . . A bag full of Euro symbols . . . . . Preamble for Portuguese documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preamble for Greek documents. .15 3. and Ukrainian . . . . . . . BIG Operators. . Delimiters. . . Math Alphabets. . . . . . . . .8 2. AMS Delimiters. . . . . . . . . . .5 2. . . . . .7 2. . . .4 3. AMS Negated Binary Relations . . . . . . . 10 11 12 13 23 25 28 29 30 33 33 34 50 75 75 76 76 77 77 77 78 78 78 78 79 79 79 79 80 81 82 . . Some of the Packages Distributed with A The Predefined Page Styles of L TEX. . . . . Binary Operators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 1. . . . . . . . . . . . Arrows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special commands for French. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AMS Binary Operators. . . . .9 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . German Special Characters. . . . . . . . . . . . .9 3. . . . Russian. . . . Document Class Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 2. . and Arrows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Miscellaneous Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .5 Key Names for graphicx Package. . . . . . . . . . Math Fonts. . . . . . . . . .3 6. . . . . . . . TEX Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 AMS Miscellaneous. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Absolute Point Sizes in Standard Classes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xiv LIST OF TABLES 3. . . . . Font Sizes. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 4. . . .4 6. . . .2 6. . . . . . . . . . . Fonts. . . . . . . . .1 6. . . . . Index Key Syntax Examples. . . . . . . . . 82 84 87 124 124 125 125 130 . . . . .

where you have the harsher ch of ach and Loch. which you will need to understand the rest of this book. Knuth [2]. Asked about this. .1. for running on many different kinds of computers.1 1.141592653. The second part focuses on the basic structures of a LTEX document. In german there are actually two pronounciations for “ch” and one might assume that the soft “ch” sound from “Pech” would be a more appropriate. TEX becomes TeX. 1 .Chapter 1 Things You Need to Know The first part of this chapter presents a short overview of the philosophy and A A history of LTEX 2ε . .” The “ch” originates from the Greek alphabet where X is the letter “ch” or “chi”. you should have a rough knowledge of A how LTEX works. with some slight enhancements added in 1989 to better support 8-bit characters and multiple languages. and in Germany many use a soft ch because the X follows the vowel e. TEX is also the first syllable of the Greek word τεκνολογία (technology). Knuth wrote in the German Wikipedia: I do not get angry when people pronounce TEX in their favorite way . TEX as we use it today was released in 1982. not the harder ch that follows the vowel a.1 The Name of the Game TEX TEX is a computer program created by Donald E.” with a “ch” as in the German word “Ach”1 or in the Scottish “Loch. It is aimed at typesetting text and mathematical formulae. pronounced ‘tyekh’. TEX is pronounced “Tech. In Russia. After reading this chapter. In an ASCII environment. 1. The version number of TEX is converging to π and is now at 3. ‘tex’ is a very common word. Knuth started writing the TEX typesetting engine in 1977 to explore the potential of the digital printing equipment that was beginning to infiltrate the publishing industry at that time. and for being virtually bug free. But I believe the most proper pronunciation is heard in Greece. TEX is renowned for being extremely stable. especially in the hope that he could reverse the trend of deteriorating typographical quality that he saw affecting his own books and articles.

authors give their typed manuscript to a publishing company. examples. citations. .2 Things You Need to Know 1. The book designer writes his instructions into the manuscript and then gives it to a typesetter. This information is written into A the text as “L TEX commands. using a predefined. but the final output can be previewed on the screen after A processing the file with L TEX. One of their book designers then decides the layout of the document (column width.2 A L TEX A L TEX enables authors to typeset and print their work at the highest typoA graphical quality. These days L TEX is maintained by Frank Mittelbach. A X is pronounced “Lay-tech” or “Lah-tech. But L TEX is “only” a program and therefore needs more guidance. fonts.2 Layout Design Typographical design is a craft. They can see on the screen how the final work will look when it is printed.” If you refer to L T X in A L TE E A an ASCII environment. The author has to provide additional information to describe the logical structure of his work. A When using L TEX it is not normally possible to see the final output while typing the text. A human book designer tries to find out what the author had in mind while writing the manuscript. L TEX takes the role of the book designer and A uses TEX as its typesetter. ). L TEX was originally written by Leslie Lamport [1]. such as MS Word or LibreOffice. Unskilled authors often commit serious formatting errors by assuming that book design is mostly a question of aesthetics—“If a document looks good artistically. it is well designed. and Typesetter To publish something. It uses the TEX formatter as its typesetting A engine. 1.2 1. formulae. He decides on chapter headings.1 Basics Author.2. . based on his professional knowledge and from the contents of the manuscript. authors specify the document layout interactively while typing text into the computer. A A In a L TEX environment. L TEX 2ε is pronounced “Lay-tech two e” and typed LaTeX2e. . take. who typesets the book according to these instructions. Then corrections can be made before actually sending the document to the printer.2.” This is quite different from the WYSIWYG2 approach that most modern word processors. space before and after headings. Book Designer. With these applications. .” But 2 What you see is what you get. professional layout.1. you type LaTeX. 1. etc.

the readability and understandability is much more important than the beautiful look of it. 3 1.1. But sometimes there is no escaping . and bibliographies can be generated easily.2 Basics as a document has to be read and not hung up in a picture gallery. . L TEX then chooses the most suitable layout.2.3 Advantages and Disadvantages A When people from the WYSIWYG world meet people who use L TEX. • Even complex structures such as footnotes. For example. A So here is some ammunition. L TEX prevents such formatting errors by forcing the author to declare the logical structure of his A document. Examples: • The font size and the numbering of headings have to be chosen to make the structure of chapters and sections clear to the reader. . . With WYSIWYG systems. Many of these add-on packages are described in A The L TEX Companion [3]. because this A is how L TEX works—by specifying structure. A • L TEX encourages authors to write well-structured texts.” • The typesetting of mathematical formulae is supported in a convenient way. They almost never need to tinker with the actual layout of the document. which make a document really look as if “printed. The best thing to do when such a discussion starts is to keep a low profile. • The line length has to be short enough not to strain the eyes of the reader. • Users only need to learn a few easy-to-understand commands that specify the logical structure of a document. while long enough to fill the page beautifully. The main advantages of L TEX over normal word processors are the following: • Professionally crafted layouts are available. packages are available to include PostScript graphics or to typeset bibliographies conforming to exact standards. since such discussions often get out of hand. they A often discuss “the advantages of L TEX over a normal word processor” or the opposite. • Free add-on packages exist for many typographical tasks not directly A supported by basic L TEX. table of contents. references. authors often generate aesthetically pleasing A documents with very little or inconsistent structure.

1 Spaces “Whitespace” characters. On Unix/Linux text files are pretty common.-) A • L TEX does not work well for people who have sold their souls .4 Things You Need to Know A • TEX. An empty line starts a new paragraph. On windows. . it will contain A a program for creating L TEX input files in text format. such as blank or tab. . and a single line break is treated as “whitespace. despite some encouraging first steps. A L TEX also has some disadvantages. • Your hamster might. On the left hand side is the text from the input file.” Whitespace at the start of a line is generally ignored. Therefore the system runs on almost any hardware platform available.” An empty line between two lines of text defines the end of a paragraph. and on the right hand side is the formatted output. • Although some parameters can be adjusted within a predefined document layout. 1. though I am sure other people can tell you hundreds .3 • It is very hard to write unstructured and disorganized documents. never be able to fully grasp the concept of Logical Markup. Several consecutive whitespace characters are treated as one “space. 3 It does not matter whether you enter one or several spaces after a word. are treated uniformly as A “space” by L TEX. and I guess it’s a bit difficult for me to find any sensible ones. It A contains the text of the document. An empty line starts a new paragraph. The text below is an example. Several empty lines are treated the same as one empty line. If you are working with a LaTeX IDE.3 A L TEX Input Files A The input for L TEX is a plain text file. . the formatting engine of L TEX 2ε . 1.3. one would use Notepad to create a text file. is highly portable and free. the design of a whole new layout is difficult and takes a lot of time. It does not matter whether you enter one or several spaces after a word. A LT Rumour says that this is one of the key elements that will be addressed in the upcoming EX3 system. as well as the commands that tell L TEX how to typeset the text.

A L TEX ignores whitespace after commands. Command names are terminated by a space. which has to be given between curly braces { } after the command name. they will normally not print.A 1.3. If you want to get a space after a command.3 A L TEX Commands A L TEX commands are case sensitive. I read that Knuth divides the people working with \TeX{} into \TeX{}nicians and \TeX perts.3 L TEX Input Files 5 1. • Many commands exist in a ‘starred variant’ where a star is appended to the command name. The backslash character \ can not be entered by adding another backslash in front of it (\\). this sequence is used for line breaking. you have to put either an empty parameter {} and a blank or a special spacing command after the command name. If you enter them A directly in your text.2 Special Characters The following symbols are reserved characters that either have a special A meaning under L TEX or are not available in all the fonts. 2011. but rather coerce L TEX to do things you did not intend. 1. The empty parameter A {} stops L TEX from eating up all the white space after the command name. # $ % ^ & _ { } ~ \ As you will see.3. a number or any other ‘non-letter. and take one of the following two formats: • They start with a backslash \ and then have a name consisting of letters only. Use the \textbackslash command instead. these characters can be used in your documents all the same by using a prefix backslash: \# \$ \% \^{} \& \_ \{ \} \~{} \textbackslash #$%ˆ&_{}˜\ The other symbols and many more can be printed with special commands in mathematical formulae or as accents. Some commands require a parameter.’ • They consist of a backslash and exactly one non-letter. Today is April 6.\\ Today is \today. . which are inserted after the command name in square brackets [ ]. Some commands take optional parameters. I read that Knuth divides the people working with TEX into TEXnicians and TEXperts.

they will be explained later. it ignores the rest of the present line. and all whitespace at the beginning of the next line. This is an % stupid % Better: instructive <---example: Supercal% ifragilist% icexpialidocious This is an example: Supercalifragilisticexpialidocious The % character can also be used to split long input lines where no whitespace or line breaks are allowed. . Add the line \usepackage{verbatim} to the preamble of your document as explained below to use this command. Note that this won’t work inside complex environments. start a new line right here! Thank you! 1. Don’t worry about them. You can \textsl{lean} on me! You can lean on me! Please.3. This is another \begin{comment} rather stupid. which will not show up in the printed version. This can be used to write notes into the input file.6 Things You Need to Know \command[optinal parameter]{parameter} A The next examples use some L TEX commands.4 Comments A When L TEX encounters a % character while processing an input file. This is another example for embedding comments in your document. the line break. start a new line right here!\newline Thank you! Please. For longer comments you could use the comment environment provided by the verbatim package. like math for example. but helpful \end{comment} example for embedding comments in your document.

.} When all the setup work is done. To load such a package you use the command \usepackage{. On other systems there might be 4 The area between \documentclass and \begin{document} is called the preamble. Anything that follows this A command will be ignored by L TEX.4 you start the body of the text with the command \begin{document} A Now you enter the text mixed with some useful L TEX commands. At the end of the document you add the \end{document} A command.1.. \end{document} A Figure 1. which tells L TEX to call it a day.2. It is just a program that crunches away at your input file.4 Input File Structure 7 1. Here is some help: L TE buttons to press. . A A Some L TEX installations feature a graphical front-end where there is a L TEX button to start compiling your input file.1 shows the contents of a minimal L TEX 2ε file.} This specifies what sort of document you intend to write. add commands to influence the style of the whole document..5 A Typical Command Line Session A I bet you must be dying to try out the neat small L TEX input file shown A X itself comes without a GUI or fancy on page 7. After that. or load packages A that add new features to the L TEX system.1: A Minimal L TEX File. it expects it to follow a certain structure.. 1. A Figure 1.4 Input File Structure A When L TEX 2ε processes an input file. \documentclass{article} \begin{document} Small is beautiful. Thus every input file must start with the command \documentclass{. A slightly more complicated input file is given in Figure 1.

On Unix all the editors will create just that. .-) \documentclass[a4paper. and .tex 3. There are several ways to do that. When your A input file has a bug L TEX will tell you about it and stop processing your input file. . so . \section{Good Bye World} \ldots{} and here it ends.~Partl} \title{Minimalism} \begin{document} % generates the title \maketitle % insert the table of contents \tableofcontents \section{Some Interesting Words} Well. latex foo. make sure it bears the extension . and here begins my lovely article. so here is how to coax L TEX into compiling your input file on a text based system. Now you may view the DVI file. . cd to the directory where your input file A is located and run L TEX on your input file.tex. .8 Things You Need to Know A some typing involved. Open a shell or cmd window. 2. \end{document} Figure 1. When picking a name for your file.2: Example of a Realistic Journal Article. 5 This is the case with most well groomed Unix Systems. . . Please note: this description assumes that a A working L TEX installation already sits on your computer. It may be necessary to run L TEX several times to get the table of contents and all internal references right. This file must be plain ASCII text. On Windows you might want to make sure that you save the file in ASCII or Plain Text format. Type ctrl-D to get back to the command line.dvi file. Real Men use Unix. Note that all the commands you see in this example will be explained later in the introduction. If successful you will end A up with a . Edit/Create your L TEX input file.5 A 1.11pt]{article} % define the title \author{H.

and to produce a layout suitable for double sided printing on A4 paper. Table 1. The options parameter customises the behaviour of the document class. \documentclass[options]{class} Here class specifies the type of document to be created. Convert the dvi file to PostScript for printing or viewing with GhostScript. The L TEX 2ε distribution provides additional classes for other documents.1 The Layout of the Document Document Classes A The first information L TEX needs to know when processing an input file is the type of document the author wants to create. If you are on Windows you might want to try yap (yet another previewer).dvi 1.6 The Layout of the Document Look at the file on screen with xdvi foo.dvi -o foo.1 lists the A document classes explained in this introduction. This is specified with the \documentclass command.1. A Example: An input file for a L TEX document could start with the line \documentclass[11pt. .a4paper]{article} A which instructs L TEX to typeset the document as an article with a base font size of eleven points. The most common options for the standard document classes are listed in Table 1.dvi & 9 This only works on Unix with X11. dvipdf foo.twoside. which allows you to convert your .2.6.6 1. The options have to be separated by commas. dvips -Pcmz foo.ps A If you are lucky your L TEX system even comes with the dvipdf tool.dvi files straight into pdf. including letters and slides.

where package is the name of the package and options is a list of keywords that trigger special features in the package. You may find more information on the packages installed at your A site in your Local Guide [5]. minimal is as small as it can get. Others are provided separately. Such enhancements are called packages. . proc a class for proceedings based on the article class. along with information of how to write your own extensions to A L TEX 2ε . It contains descriptions on hundreds of packages. PhD theses. you will probably find that there are some A areas where basic L TEX cannot solve your problem. It only sets a page size and a base font.3). . invitations.1: Document Classes. . report for longer reports containing several chapters. The prime source for information about L TEX A packages is The L TEX Companion [3]. article for articles in scientific journals. presentations. coloured text or source code from a file into your document. Modern TEX distributions come with a large number of packages preinstalled. Some packages come A with the L TEX 2ε base distribution (See Table 1. .2 Packages While writing your document. It is mainly used for debugging purposes.10 Things You Need to Know 1. If you want to include graphics. use the command texdoc for accessing package documentation. . short reports. program documentation. small books. The class uses big sans serif letters. you A need to enhance the capabilities of L TEX. Packages are activated with the \usepackage[options]{package} command. Table 1. . If you are working on a Unix system. You might want to consider using the Beamer class instead. . book for real books slides for slides.6.

11pt. oneside Specifies whether double or single sided output should be generated. 10pt. twoside. Defines the paper size. twocolumn Instructs L TEX to typeset the document in one column or two columns. titlepage. The report class by default starts chapters on the next page available and the book class starts them on right hand pages. 12pt Sets the size of the main font in the document. Note that this option concerns the style of the document only. openany Makes chapters begin either only on right hand pages or on the next page available. . and legalpaper can be specified. Changes the layout of the document to print in landscape openright. a4paper. letterpaper.2: Document Class Options. fleqn Typesets displayed formulae left-aligned instead of centred. landscape mode. while report and book do. . . A onecolumn. executivepaper. If no option is specified. The classes article and report are single sided and the book class is double sided by default. notitlepage Specifies whether a new page should be started after the document title or not. Besides that. 10pt is assumed.1.6 The Layout of the Document 11 Table 1. The default size is letterpaper. The option twoside does not tell the printer you use that it should actually make a two-sided printout. This does not work with the article class. as it does not know about chapters. . The article class does not start a new page by default. leqno Places the numbering of formulae on the left hand side instead of the right. a5paper. b5paper.

12

Things You Need to Know

A Table 1.3: Some of the Packages Distributed with L TEX.

A doc Allows the documentation of L TEX programs. a and in The L T X Companion [3]. A Described in doc.dtx E

exscale Provides scaled versions of the math extension font. Described in ltexscale.dtx.
A fontenc Specifies which font encoding L TEX should use. Described in ltoutenc.dtx.

ifthen Provides commands of the form ‘if. . . then do. . . otherwise do. . . .’ A Described in ifthen.dtx and The L TEX Companion [3].
A latexsym To access the L TEX symbol font, you should use the latexsym A package. Described in latexsym.dtx and in The L TEX Companion [3].

makeidx Provides commands for producing indexes. Described in section 4.3 A and in The L TEX Companion [3]. syntonly Processes a document without typesetting it. inputenc Allows the specification of an input encoding such as ASCII, ISO Latin-1, ISO Latin-2, 437/850 IBM code pages, Apple Macintosh, Next, ANSI-Windows or user-defined one. Described in inputenc.dtx.
a This file should be installed on your system, and you should be able to get a dvi file by typing latex doc.dtx in any directory where you have write permission. The same is true for all the other files mentioned in this table.

1.7 Files You Might Encounter

13

1.6.3

Page Styles

A L TEX supports three predefined header/footer combinations—so-called page styles. The style parameter of the

\pagestyle{style}

command defines which one to use. Table 1.4 lists the predefined page styles.
A Table 1.4: The Predefined Page Styles of L TEX.

plain prints the page numbers on the bottom of the page, in the middle of the footer. This is the default page style. headings prints the current chapter heading and the page number in the header on each page, while the footer remains empty. (This is the style used in this document) empty sets both the header and the footer to be empty.

It is possible to change the page style of the current page with the command
\thispagestyle{style}

A description how to create your own headers and footers can be found A in The L TEX Companion [3] and in section 4.4 on page 87.

1.7

Files You Might Encounter

A When you work with L TEX you will soon find yourself in a maze of files with various extensions and probably no clue. The following list explains the various file types you might encounter when working with TEX. Please note that this table does not claim to be a complete list of extensions, but if you find one missing that you think is important, please drop me a line. A .tex L TEX or TEX input file. Can be compiled with latex. A A .sty L TEX Macro package. Load this into your L TEX document using the \usepackage command. A .dtx Documented TEX. This is the main distribution format for L TEX style files. If you process a .dtx file you get documented macro code of the A L TEX package contained in the .dtx file.

14

Things You Need to Know .ins The installer for the files contained in the matching .dtx file. If you A download a L TEX package from the net, you will normally get a .dtx A and a .ins file. Run L TEX on the .ins file to unpack the .dtx file. .cls Class files define what your document looks like. They are selected with the \documentclass command.
A .fd Font description file telling L TEX about new fonts. A The following files are generated when you run L TEX on your input file: A .dvi Device Independent File. This is the main result of a L TEX compile run. Look at its content with a DVI previewer program or send it to a printer with dvips or a similar application.

.log Gives a detailed account of what happened during the last compiler run. .toc Stores all your section headers. It gets read in for the next compiler run and is used to produce the table of content. .lof This is like .toc but for the list of figures. .lot And again the same for the list of tables. .aux Another file that transports information from one compiler run to the next. Among other things, the .aux file is used to store information associated with cross-references.
A .idx If your document contains an index. L TEX stores all the words that go into the index in this file. Process this file with makeindex. Refer to section 4.3 on page 86 for more information on indexing.

.ind The processed .idx file, ready for inclusion into your document on the next compile cycle. .ilg Logfile telling what makeindex did.

1.8

Big Projects

When working on big documents, you might want to split the input file into A several parts. L TEX has two commands that help you to do that.
\include{filename}

Use this command in the document body to insert the contents of another file A named filename.tex. Note that L TEX will start a new page before processing the material input from filename.tex.

. but doesn’t produce any (DVI) output. no strings attached. A This makes L TEX skim through your document only checking for proper syntax and usage of the commands.. This is helpful when you use \includeonly.1. . only \include commands for the filenames that are listed in the argument of the \includeonly command will be executed. In this case. . even when some include files are omitted. It simply includes the file specified. } 15 After this command is executed in the preamble of the document. Note that there must be no spaces between the filenames and the commas.8 Big Projects The second command can be used in the preamble. Sometimes this might not be desirable. use the \input{filename} command. \includeonly{filename. Usage is very simple: \usepackage{syntonly} \syntaxonly When you want to produce pages. A As L TEX runs faster in this mode you may save yourself valuable time. because the page breaks will not move. It allows you to A instruct L TEX to only input some of the \included files. The \include command starts typesetting the included text on a new page. just comment out the second line (by adding a percent sign).filename. A To make L TEX quickly check your document use the syntonly package. No flashy suits.

.

The reader will understand the text better if these ideas are well-structured. It then derives the typographical form of the text according to the “rules” given in the document class file and in various style files. or one idea. In this chapter I will fill in the remaining structure you will need to know in order to produce real world material. \\. Therefore.Chapter 2 Typesetting Text After reading the previous chapter. If some totally new line of thought occurs in the same paragraph. If in doubt about paragraph breaks. but the old thought continues.g. you should know about the basic stuff of A which a LTEX 2ε document is made. if a new thought begins. A L TEX is different from other typesetting systems in that you just have to tell it the logical and semantical structure of a text. A The most important text unit in L TEX (and in typography) is the paragraph. Most people completely underestimate the importance of well-placed paragraph breaks. it should be removed.1 The Structure of Text and Language By Hanspeter Schmid <hanspi@schmid-werren. . only line breaks should be used. a new paragraph should begin. We call it “text unit” because a paragraph is the typographical form that should reflect one coherent thought. and will see and feel this structure much better if the typographical form reflects the logical and semantical structure of the content.g. or knowledge to the reader. If you have a paragraph break. information. a translation of the Swiss German UVA (Um’s Verrecken Anders). think about your text as a conveyor of ideas and thoughts. and if not. Many people do not even know what the meaning of 1 Different At All Cost. leaving an empty line in the source code. then it should be broken. 2. is to convey ideas.ch> The main point of writing a text (some modern DAAC1 literature excluded). and paragraph breaks with e. You will learn in the following sections how to force line breaks with e.

Most languages have very complicated punctuation rules. \begin{equation} I_D = I_F . The structuring of text even extends to parts of sentences. read the sentence aloud and take a short . \ldots The next smaller text unit is a sentence. This is explained later in this chapter. L TEX tries to figure out which one you wanted to have. % Example 2 \ldots from which follows Kirchhoff’s current law: \begin{equation} \sum_{k=1}^{n} I_k = 0 \. If A L TEX gets it wrong.) % Example 1 \ldots when Einstein introduced his formula \begin{equation} e = m \cdot c^2 \. In English texts. . . If you are not sure about where to put a comma. and then read this section again. there is a larger space after a period that ends a sentence than after one that ends an A abbreviation. you must tell it what you want. please read this and the following chapter. (If you don’t yet understand all commands well enough to understand these examples. especially in L TEX. you will get almost every comma right if you remember what it represents: a short stop in the flow of language.18 Typesetting Text A a paragraph break is. The latter mistake is especially easy to make if equations are used in the text. but in many languages (including German and English). and figure out why sometimes empty lines (paragraph breaks) are used before and after the equation. \end{equation} which is at the same time the most widely known and the least well understood physical formula. or. Look at the following examples.I_R \end{equation} is the core of a very different transistor model. introduce paragraph breaks without knowing it. \end{equation} Kirchhoff’s voltage law can be derived \ldots % Example 3 \ldots which has several advantages. and sometimes not.

as described in the next section. Finally. \newpage starts a new page. If this feels awkward at some place. L TEX still tries to even out the right border of the line and the total length of the page.g. \nopagebreak[n] suggest places where a break may (or may not) happen. this can lead to unpleasant gaps in your text. If necessary. if you feel the urge to breathe (or make a short stop) at some other place. However. it also hyphenates words that would not fit comfortably on a line. They enable the author to influence their actions with the optional argument n. \section{The Structure of Text and Language} is so obvious that it is almost self-evident how these high-level structures should be used. 19 2.3. Even when you give a “break” command.2 for more information. By setting n to a value below A 4. the paragraphs of a text should also be structured logically at a higher level. Do not confuse these “break” commands with the “new” A commands.2. and there is no additional space between two paragraphs. If you . you leave L TEX the option of ignoring your command if the result would look very bad. \pagebreak[n]. \nolinebreak[n]. A In special cases it might be necessary to order L TEX to break a line: \\ or \newline starts a new line without starting a new paragraph. How the paragraphs are typeset depends on the document class. subsections. and so on. the typographical effect of writing e. \linebreak[n]. delete that comma.2.1 Line Breaking and Page Breaking Justified Paragraphs A Books are often typeset with each line having the same length. insert a comma.2 Line Breaking and Page Breaking breath at every comma. L TEX inserts the necessary line breaks and spaces between words by optimizing the contents of a whole paragraph. \\* additionally prohibits a page break after the forced line break.2 2. which can be set to a number between zero and four. sections. by putting them into chapters. Normally the first line of a paragraph is indented. Refer to section 6.

If you place the command after the \begin{document} and you are using some package for national language support like babel. Example: \hyphenation{FORTRAN Hy-phen-a-tion} 2 A Although L TEX gives you a warning when that happens (Overfull \hbox) and displays the offending line. The hyphenation hints are stored for the language that is active when the hyphenation command occurs. It L TE prevents such over-long lines by increasing the inter-word spacing—even if the final output is not optimal. If it cannot find a way to break the lines in a manner that meets its high standards. these lines will be marked with a thick black line on the right margin. The example below will allow “hyphenation” to be hyphenated as well as “Hyphenation”. The A command \fussy brings L TEX back to its default behaviour. The argument of the command should only contain words built from normal letters.20 Typesetting Text really want to start a “new line” or a “new page”.2 Hyphenation A L TEX hyphenates words whenever necessary. If the hyphenation algorithm does not find the correct hyphenation points.2. The command \hyphenation{word list} causes the words listed in the argument to be hyphenated only at the points marked by “-”. remedy the situation by using the following commands to tell TEX about the exception. such lines are not always easy to find. This happens most often A when L TEX cannot find a suitable place to hyphenate a word. . then the hyphenation hints will be active in the language activated through babel. or rather signs that are considered to be normal A letters by L TEX. L TEX then complains (“overfull hbox”) while processing the input file. it A lets one line stick out on the right of the paragraph. Guess their names! A L TEX always tries to produce the best line breaks possible. then use the corresponding command. 2. This means that if you place a hyphenation command into the preamble of your document it will influence the English language hyphenation. No special characters or symbols are allowed in the argument.2 Instruct A X to lower its standards a little by giving the \sloppy command. If you use the option draft in the \documentclass command. In most such cases the result doesn’t look very good. In this case a warning (“underfull hbox”) is given to the user. and it prevents “FORTRAN”. “Fortran” and “fortran” from being hyphenated at all.

I think this is: su\-per\-cal\-% i\-frag\-i\-lis\-tic\-ex\-pi\-% al\-i\-do\-cious 21 I think this is: supercalifragilisticexpialidocious Several words can be kept together on one line with the command \mbox{text} It causes its argument to be kept together under all circumstances.g. A accented characters).3 Ready-Made Strings In some of the examples on the previous pages. It will be 0116 291 2319. A In publishing there are special opening and closing quotation marks. My phone number will change soon. you have seen some very A simple L TEX commands for typesetting special text strings: Command \today \TeX \LaTeX \LaTeXe Example April 6. \fbox is similar to \mbox. The parameter filename should contain the name of the file. use two (grave accent) for opening quotation marks and two (vertical quote) for closing quotation marks. 2011 TEX A L TEX A L TEX 2ε Description Current date Your favorite typesetter The Name of the Game The current incarnation 2.4. For single quotes you use just one of each. This command is especially useful for words containing special characters (e. .1 Special Characters and Symbols Quotation Marks You should not use the " for quotation marks as you would on a typewriter. because L TEX does not automatically hyphenate words containing special characters.2.3 Ready-Made Strings The command \. This also becomes the only point hyphenation is allowed in this word. In L TEX.inserts a discretionary hyphen into a word. but in addition there will be a visible box drawn around the content. It will be \mbox{0116 291 2319}.4 2. My phone number will change soon. 2. The parameter \mbox{\emph{filename}} should contain the name of the file.

it’s really a back-tick or grave accent ( ) for opening quotes and vertical quote ( ) for closing. 2. Access three of them with different number of consecutive dashes.2 Dashes and Hyphens A L TEX knows four kinds of dashes. 2.3 Tilde (∼) A character often seen in web addresses is the tilde. ‘–’ en-dash.edu/˜bush http://www.g. A read/write. ‘—’ em-dash and ‘−’ minus sign. 5 MB/s. 2. $1$ and $-1$ daughter-in-law. Try this instead: http://www.22 Typesetting Text ‘‘Please press the ‘x’ key. To overcome this. one can simply type e. X-rated pages 13–67 yes—or no? 0.4.clever. 1 and −1 The names for these dashes are: ‘-’ hyphen. X-rated\\ pages 13--67\\ yes---or no? \\ $0$. But normal ‘/’ character may be still used for ratios or units.g.4. despite what the font chosen might suggest.edu/$\sim$demo http://www. To generate this in A L TEX use \~{} but the result (˜) is not really what you want. Hyphenation is disabled for these two words.” Yes I know the rendering is not ideal. e. so there may be ‘overfull’ errors.4. but this makes L TEX treat the two words as one. use \slash.5 Degree Symbol (◦) A Printing the degree symbol in pure L TEX.’’ “Please press the ‘x’ key. For example type ‘read\slash write’ which allows hyphenation.4 Slash (/) In order to typeset a slash between two words.clever.rich.edu/∼demo 2. The fourth sign is actually not a dash at all—it is the mathematical minus sign: daughter-in-law. .rich.4.edu/\~{}bush \\ http://www.

The textcomp package makes the degree symbol also available as \textdegree or in combination with the C by using the \textcelsius. It provides the official Euro symbol: \usepackage[official]{eurosym} If you prefer a Euro symbol that matches your font. use the option gen in place of the official option.4 Special Characters and Symbols It’s $-30\. After loading the textcomp package in the preamble of your document \usepackage{textcomp} use the command \texteuro to access it.^{\circ}\mathrm{C}$. If your font does not provide its own Euro symbol or if you do not like the font’s Euro symbol. Many current fonts contain a Euro symbol. Table 2. 23 It’s −30 ◦ C.6 The Euro Currency Symbol (e) When writing about money these days. I will soon start to superconduct. 2.4. 30 is 86 °F. you have two more choices: First the eurosym package.2. 30 \textcelsius{} is 86 \textdegree{}F.1: A bag full of Euro symbols LM+textcomp eurosym [gen]eurosym \texteuro \euro \euro € € € e e e A A A C C C . I will soon start to super-conduct. you need the Euro symbol.

. . instead of ff fi fl ffi .. Naturally other letters work too. . Tokyo. This is accomplished by typing \i and \j. 2. . but by actually using special symbols. \Large Not shelfful\\ but shelf\mbox{}ful Not shelfful but shelfful 2. Budapest. na\"\i ve. élève. these characters occupy only a little space and are set very close to the preceding letter. ¡Señorita!. .9 Accents and Special Characters A L TEX supports the use of accents and special characters from many languages. These so-called ligatures can be prohibited by inserting an \mbox{} between the two letters in question. . a comma or a period takes the same amount of space as any other letter. . its dots have to be removed. Schönbrunner Schloß Straße . ff fi fl ffi.7 Ellipsis (.. To place an accent on top of an i or a j. \ldots Not like this . Instead. This might be necessary with words built from two words. ) On a typewriter. but like this:\\ New York..4.4. Tokyo.2 shows all sorts of accents being applied to the letter o. !‘Se\~norita!. In book printing. Therefore.\\ Sch\"onbrunner Schlo\ss{} Stra\ss e Hôtel. naïve.\\ sm\o rrebr\o d. . there is a special command for these dots. entering ‘ellipsis’ by just typing three dots would produce the wrong result.8 Ligatures Some letter combinations are typeset not just by setting the different letters one after the other. .4. but like this: New York. smørrebrød. Budapest. \’el\‘eve. . Table 2.24 Typesetting Text 2. H\^otel. It is called \ldots (low dots) Not like this .

ò o ¯ o ˘ o . Language specific typographic rules. there are three A areas where L TEX has to be configured appropriately: 1. . œ å ø ı \‘o \=o \u o \d o \oe \aa \o \i ó o ˙ o ˇ o ¯ Œ Å Ø  \’o \. For many languages. A list of the languages built into your A L TEX system will be displayed every time the compiler is started. there is a mandatory space before each colon character (:). 3 Table of Contents. activate the babel package by adding the command \usepackage[language]{babel} after the \documentclass command.2. which has quite a negative effect on the appearance of the typeset document. It means rebuilding the format file with different hyphenation patterns enabled. All automatically generated text strings3 have to be adapted to the new language. these changes can be accomplished by using the babel package by Johannes Braams. List of Figures. A 2.5 International Language Support 25 2.2: Accents and Special Characters. In French for example. A Getting hyphenation rules into L TEX is a bit more tricky. . 3. If your system is already configured appropriately. .5 International Language Support When you write documents in languages other than English. Table 2. If your L TEX format does not support hyphenation in the language of your choice. Babel will automatically activate the appropriate hyphenation rules for the language A you choose. L TEX needs to know the hyphenation rules for the new language. Your Local Guide [5] should give more information on this.o \v o \b o \OE \AA \O \j ô ö ő oo æ ł ¡ \^o \"o \H o \t oo \ae \l !‘ õ ç o ¸ Æ Ł ¿ \~o \c c \c o \AE \L ?‘ . babel will still work but will disable hyphenation.

while in Cyrillic encoding cp1251 for Windows this letter does not exist at all. If you call babel with multiple languages \usepackage[languageA. For example. for example. contains a lot of umlauts (äöü).26 Typesetting Text Babel also specifies new commands for some languages. you should consider that other people might not be able to display your input files on their computer. With babel loaded. the German umlaut ä on OS/2 is encoded as 132. OS/2 encodings western Latin Cyrillic applemac macukr latin1 koi8-ru ansinew cp1251 cp850 cp866nav \usepackage[utf8]{inputenc} A will enable you to create L TEX input files in utf8. which simplify the input of special characters. because they use a different encoding. The German language. languageB). Section 4.dtx and cyinpenc.6 tells how to produce package documentation.e. In order to handle a variety of input encodings used for different groups of languages and/or on different computer A platforms L TEX employs the inputenc package: \usepackage[encoding]{inputenc} When using this package. enter an ö by typing "o instead of \"o. Use the command \selectlanguage{languageA} to change the active language. 4 . To learn more about supported input encodings for Latin-based and Cyrillic-based languages. Most modern computer systems allow you to input letters of national alphabets directly from the keyboard. therefore you should use this feature with care. depending on the type of system you are working on4 Operating system Mac Unix Windows DOS. The following encodings may come in handy. on Unix systems using ISO-LATIN 1 it is encoded as 228.dtx respectively. a multi-byte encoding in which each character can be encoded in as little as one byte and as many as four bytes. read the documentation for inputenc.languageB]{babel} then the last language in the option list will be active (i.

shapes. T2C. several 8-bit CM-like font sets were created. which reduces the number of required font sets. TEX creates them by combining a normal character with an accent. If you need more A (non-latin) characters have a look at XEL TEX in section 4. the encoding of the original Computer Modern TEX font.ime. 2.1 Support for Portuguese By Demerson Andre Polli <polli@linux. A The default L TEX font encoding is OT1.br> To enable hyphenation and change all automatic text to Portuguese. MacOS X).8 a Unicode based TEX-engine. Multiple input encodings could be mapped into one font encoding. The LH font set contains letters necessary to typeset documents in languages using Cyrillic script. and optically scaled font sizes.5. It defines at which position inside a TEX-font each letter is stored. some Latin letters could not be created by combining a normal character with an accent. Font encodings are handled through fontenc package: \usepackage[encoding]{fontenc} 27 where encoding is font encoding.5 The CB bundle contains fonts in LGR encoding for the composition of Greek text. to say nothing about letters of non-Latin alphabets. . It contains only the 128 characters of the 7-bit ASCII character set. this approach stops the automatic hyphenation from working inside words containing accented characters. Font encoding is a different matter. Because of the large number of Cyrillic glyphs. they are arranged into four font encodings—T2A. To overcome these shortcomings.2.usp. such as Greek or Cyrillic. Besides. It is possible to load several encodings simultaneously. Improve/enable hyphenation in non-English documents by using these fonts. The utf8 encoding used by inputenc only defines the characters that are actually provided by the fonts used.5 International Language Support Since the turn of the Century most Operating Systems are based on Unicode (Windows XP. While the resulting output looks perfect. When accented characters are required. T2B. Extended Cork (EC) fonts in T1 encoding contains letters and punctuation characters for most of the European languages using Latin script. use the 5 Find a list of languages supported by each of these encodings in [11]. and X2. Another advantage of using new CM-like fonts is that they provide fonts of CM families in all weights. Therefore it is recommended to use utf8 for any new project.

2 Support for French By Daniel Flipo <daniel.dtx and read the produced file frenchb.5. Check out table 2.3: Preamble for Portuguese documents. if you have configured your L TEX system accordingly.4 for inspiration.flipo@univ-lille1. which allows you to write French input files more easily.3 for the preamble you need to write in the Portuguese language. \usepackage[portuguese]{babel} \usepackage[latin1]{inputenc} \usepackage[T1]{fontenc} command: \usepackage[portuguese]{babel} Or if you are in Brazil. .28 Typesetting Text Table 2. See table 2.fr> A Some hints for those creating French documents with L TEX: load French language support with the following command: \usepackage[francais]{babel} A This enables French hyphenation. Note that the example is for the latin1 input encoding. It also changes all automatic text into French: \chapter prints Chapitre. 2. For more information on what the francais option of babel A does and how to customize its behaviour. A set of new commands also becomes available.dvi. You will also notice that the layout of lists changes when switching to the French language. \today prints the current date in French and so on. Modern systems might be using utf8 instead. substitute brazilian as the language. As there are a lot of accents in Portuguese you might want to use \usepackage[latin1]{inputenc} to be able to input them correctly as well as \usepackage[T1]{fontenc} to get the hyphenation right. run L TEX on file frenchb.

1\iere{}. It also changes all automatic text into German. A major problem arises from the use of commands like \flq: If you use the OT1 font (which is the default font) the guillemets will look like the math symbol “ ”. on the other hand. 1\ieres{} 2\ieme{} 4\iemes{} \No 1.5 for inspiration. however.2. Check out table 2.” A set of new commands also becomes available. Dr 1er.4: Special commands for French. T1 encoded fonts. 45° M. make sure you use the T1 encoding. \no 2 20~\degres C. use them differently. typesetters use «guillemets» the same way the French do. In German books you often find French quotation marks («guillemets»). which turns a typesetter’s stomach. which allows you to write German input files more quickly even when you don’t use the inputenc package. Durand} \nombre{1234. “Chapter” becomes “Kapitel. 2. 45\degres \bsc{M. D\up{r} 1\ier{}.56789} « guillemets » Mme.3 Support for German A Some hints for those creating German documents with L TEX: load German language support with the following command: \usepackage[german]{babel} A This enables German hyphenation. all this becomes moot. \og guillemets \fg{} M\up{me}. So if you are using this type of quote. Durand 1 234. do contain the required symbols. German typesetters. A quote in a German book would look like »this«. 1re. but your text also is locked in a particular encoding world. With inputenc. if you have configured your L TEX system accordingly. Eg.5. (\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}) . no 2 20 °C.5 International Language Support 29 Table 2. 1res 2e 4es No 1.567 89 Recent versions of frenchb rely on numprint to implement the \nombre command. In the German speaking part of Switzerland.

7 Korean Hangul is an alphabetic script with 14 basic consonants and 10 basic vowels . Korean input files must be in plain text format. Big5. "a "‘ "< or \flqq \flq \dq ä „ « ‹ " "s "’ "> or \frqq \frq ß “ » › 2.30 Typesetting Text Table 2. This section was written by Karnes KIM on behalf of the Korean lshort translation team. The first has its MSB set. CP949/Windows-949/UHC. but because Korean uses its own character set outside the repertoire of US-ASCII.4 Support for Korean6 A To use L TEX for typesetting Korean. we need to solve three problems: 1. Hiraganas. On the other hand. These days all three major operating systems (Mac OS. Katakanas. or Shift_JIS. TEX and L TEX were originally written for scripts with no more than 256 characters in their alphabet. In these encodings each US-ASCII character represents its normal ASCII character similar to other ASCII compatible encodings such as ISO-8859-x. a subfont 6 A Considering a number of issues Korean L TEX users have to cope with.5. We must be able to edit Korean input files. The two most widely used encodings for Korean text files are EUC-KR and its upward compatible extension used in Korean MS-Windows. they will look rather strange with a normal ASCII editor. it took a considerable amount of time and effort to set up a Korean-capable environment under a non-localized (non-Korean) operating system. Greek and Cyrillic characters and other symbols and letters drawn from KS X 1001 are represented by two consecutive octets. Hangul syllables. Hanjas (Chinese characters as used in Korea). Windows) come equipped with pretty decent multilingual support and internationalization features so that editing Korean text file is not so much of a problem anymore.net/faq to get a glimpse of what it was like to use Korean under non-Korean OS in mid-1990’s. Hangul Jamos. A 2. even on non-Korean operating systems. It was translated into English by SHIN Jungshik and shortened by Tobi Oetiker. Skim through the now much-outdated http://jshin. To make them work for languages with considerably more characters such as Korean7 or Chinese. Until the mid-1990’s. Unix. EUC-JP.5: German Special Characters.

It divides a single CJK font with thousands or tens of thousands of glyphs into a set of subfonts with 256 glyphs A each. Each cluster represents a syllable. put some restrictions on the formation of these clusters.org/charts/ PDF/U1100.5 International Language Support mechanism was developed. Modern Korean orthographic standards (both in South Korea and North Korea). Therefore only a finite number of orthographically correct syllables exist. 8 They can be obtained at language/korean/HLaTeX/ language/korean/CJK/ and http://knot. albeit alphabetic. 31 . The CJK package is not specific to Korean.kr/htex/ 9 Korean Ministry of Culture. It can process input files in UTF-8 as well as in various CJK encodings including EUC-KR and CP949/Windows-949/UHC. They both can A process Korean input text files encoded in EUC-KR.8 HL TEX and hL TEXp are specific to Korean and provide Korean localization on top of the font support.unicode.pdf).unicode. The Korean Character encoding defines individual code points for each of these syllables (KS X 1001:1998 and KS X 1002:1992). is treated like the Chinese and Japanese writing systems with tens of thousands of ideographic/logographic characters.2. An unlimited number of syllables can be formed out of this finite set of vowels and consonants. The ultimate purpose of using typesetting programs like TEX and A L TEX is to get documents typeset in an ‘aesthetically’ satisfying way. ISO 10646/Unicode offers both ways of representing Hangul used for modern Korean by encoding Conjoining Hangul Jamos (alphabets: http://www. The HL TEX distribution includes UHC PostScript fonts of 10 different families and Munhwabu9 fonts (TrueType) of 5 different families.org/charts/PDF/UAC00. there are three widely used packages. HL TEX can even process input files encoded in CP949/Windows-949/UHC and UTF-8 when used along with Λ or Ω.pdf) in addition to encoding all the orthographically allowed Hangul syllables in modern Korean (http://www. the individual characters have to be arranged in rectangular clusters about the same size as Chinese characters. For Korean. Arguably the most important element in typesetting is a set of wellA designed fonts. Japanese and Korean). however.kaist.ac. it can be used to typeset documents with multilingual content (especially Chinese. So Hangul. Unlike Latin or Cyrillic scripts. One of the most A daunting challenges in Korean typesetting with L TEX and its related typesetting system is supporting Middle Korean—and possibly future Korean—syllables that can only be represented by conjoining Jamos in Unicode. The CJK package has no Korean localization such as the one offered by A HL TEX and it does not come with as many special Korean fonts as A X. hL TEXp by CHA Jaechoon and the CJK package by A A Werner Lemberg. (Jamos). HL TEX by A UN Koaunghi. It is hoped that future TEX engines like Ω and Λ will eventually provide solutions to this. The CJK package works with a set of fonts used by A earlier versions of HL TEX and it can use Bitstream’s cyberbit TrueType font. HL TE 3.

sections.} described in a previous section.kr/. instead. This preamble enables hyphenation and changes all automatic text to Greek.ktug. one can use the commands \textlatin{english text} and \textgreek{greek text} that both take one argument which is then typeset using the requested font encoding.or. refer to the HL TEX Guide.gr> See table 2.uoa. Check out the web site of the Korean TEX User Group (KTUG) at http://www.6 for the preamble you need to write in the Greek language. subsections.) Native Korean speakers have no problem picking the right particle. 10 . It takes a painstaking effort to place appropriate particles manually every time you add/remove references or simply shuffle A parts of your document around. A If you select the utf8x option for the package inputenc. table of content and table of figures are all translated into Korean and the formatting of the document is changed to follow Korean conventions.32 Typesetting Text A To use the HL TEX package for typesetting your Korean text. 2. which allows you to write Greek input files more easily. Use \euro for the Euro symbol.. put the following line in the preamble. Check out table 2.. \usepackage{hfont} A A For more details on typesetting Korean with HL TEX. there are pairs of post-fix particles grammatically equivalent but different in form. HL TEX relieves its users from this boring and error-prone process. There is also a Korean translation of this manual available. The headings of chapters.5. but it cannot be determined which particle to use for references and other automatic text that will change while you edit the document. put the following declaration into the preamble of your document: \usepackage{hangul} This command turns the Korean localization on. In order to temporarily switch to English and vice versa.5 Writing in Greek By Nikolaos Pothitos <pothitos@di. If you don’t need Korean localization features but just want to typeset Korean text. Otherwise use the command \selectlanguage{. (It is a bit more complex than this. Which of any given pair is correct depends on whether the preceding syllable ends with a vowel or a consonant.10 A set of new commands also becomes available. but this should give you a good picture. The package also provides automatic “particle selection. L TEX will understand Greek and polytonic Greek Unicode characters.7 for some Greek punctuation characters.” In Korean.

documents are not restricted to a single font encoding. you need to load mathtext package before fontenc:11 \usepackage{mathtext} \usepackage[T1. » ’ 2. and activating some language specific typographic rules (like \frenchspacing). (( ‘‘ · « ‘ ? )) ’’ . language specific punctuation is provided: The Cyrillic dash for the text (it is little narrower than Latin dash and surrounded 11 A If you use AMS-L TEX packages.6: Preamble for Greek documents.5. For multi-lingual documents using Cyrillic and Latin-based languages it makes sense to include Latin font encoding explicitly. \usepackage[english. For all three languages.bulgarian.russian.T2A]{fontenc} \usepackage[koi8-ru]{inputenc} \usepackage[english. babel will take care of switching to the appropriate font encoding when a different language is selected within the document.7: Greek Special Characters. translating automatically generated text strings. babel provides some commands allowing typesetting according to the standards of Bulgarian.greek]{babel} \usepackage[iso-8859-7]{inputenc} Table 2. However.6 Support for Cyrillic By Maksym Polyakov <polyama@myrealbox.5 International Language Support 33 Table 2. or Ukrainian languages. . But. Russian.7h of babel includes support for the T2* encodings and for typesetting Bulgarian. . Russian and Ukrainian texts using Cyrillic letters.com> Version 3. for the above three languages this is T2A.2. In addition to enabling hyphenations. babel will authomatically choose the default font encoding. if you are going to use Cyrillics in math mode.ukranian]{babel} Generally. A Support for Cyrillic is based on standard L TEX mechanisms plus the fontenc and inputenc packages. load them before fontenc and babel as well.

34 Typesetting Text by tiny spaces).Cyrillic emdash in plain text. . "an explicit hyphen sign. "--. The Russian and Ukrainian options of babel define the commands \Asbuk and \asbuk. and Ukrainian options of babel "| disable ligature at this position. . "--* Cyrillic emdash for denoting direct speech. "‘ for German left double quotes (looks like . which make \Alph and \alph produce letters of either Bulgarian or Latin (English) alphabets. The default behaviour of \Alph and \alph for the Bulgarian language option is to produce letters from the Bulgarian alphabet. but producing no hyphen sign (for compound words with "" hyphen. To write a complete document in the 12 the commands for turning counters into a.g.5. "--~ Cyrillic emdash in compound names (surnames). "> for French right double quotes (looks like > >). allowing hyphenation in the composing words. Choose the language option xalx to generate captions and dates in Modern Mongolian. "’ for German right double quotes (looks like “). MonTEX includes support for both Cyrillic and traditional Mongolian Script.). x-""y or some other signs as “disable/enable”). thinspace for initials with a breakpoint in following surname.7 Support for Mongolian A To use L TEX for typesetting Mongolian you have a choice between two packages: Multilingual Babel and MonTEX by Oliver Corff. ". Table 2. quotes. e. "~ for a compound word mark without a breakpoint. b. and commands to facilitate hyphenation. like "-. "= for a compound word mark with a breakpoint. which act like \Alph and \alph12 . Russian. . add: \usepackage[language. but produce capital and small letters of Russian or Ukrainian alphabets (whichever is the active language of the document). "< for French left double quotes (looks like < <). .encoding]{mls} to the preamble. allowing hyphenation in the rest of the word. 2. a dash for direct speech.. see Table 2. The Bulgarian option of babel provides the commands \enumBul and \enumLat (\enumEng).8.8: The extra definitions made by Bulgarian. c. In order to access the commands of MonTEX.

5.8 The Unicode option By Axel Kielhorn <A. The document language option bicig enables the “Simplified Transliteration” input method. Activate Mongolian language support with the following commands: \usepackage[T2A]{fontenc} \usepackage[mn]{inputenc} \usepackage[mongolian]{babel} where mn is the cp1251 input encoding. Mongolian Cyrillic script is supported by babel. Save the file as UTF-8 .2. A The following describes XEL TEX as distributed with TexLive 2010.de> Unicode is the way to go if you want to include several languages in one document. 2. It was first included into TexLive 2008. especially when these languages are not using the latin script. Enable and disable Latin Transliteration Mode with \SetDocumentEncodingLMC 35 and \SetDocumentEncodingNeutral More information about MonTEX is available from CTAN://language/ mongolian/montex/doc. Quickstart A A To convert an existing L TEX file to XEL TEX the following needs to be done: 1.Kielhorn@web.5 International Language Support traditional Mongolian script you have to choose bicig for the language option. It was first included into TexLive 2007. For a more modern approach invoke utf8 instead. There are two TEX-engines that are capable of processing Unicode input: XETEX was developed for MacOS X but is now available for all architectures. LuaTEX is the successor of pdfTEX.

Change \usepackage[languageA]{babel} to \usepackage{polyglossia} \setdefaultlanguage[babelshorthands]{languageA} 4. The option babelshorthands enables babel compatible shorthands for german and catalan. you have to fake them. The package polyglossia[19] is a replacement for babel. Remove \usepackage{inputenc} \usepackage{fontenc} \usepackage{textcomp} Typesetting Text from the preamble. Add \usepackage[Ligatures=TeX]{fontspec} to the preamble. The default font is Latin Modern Roman.. It is a little know fact that some TEX command are ligatures defined in the Computer Modern fonts. A The package fontspec[21] handles font loading for XEL TEX and LuaTEX. The option Ligatures=TeX defines the following ligatures: -– --. „ << « >> » . It takes care of the hyphenation patterns and automatically generated text strings. If you want to use them with a non-TEX font.— ’’ ” ‘‘ “ !‘ ¡ ?‘ ¿ .36 2. 3.

\begin{german} Deutscher Text.5 International Language Support It’s all Γρ κ to me So far there has been no advantage to using a Unicode TEX engine.. Since this document is written in Latin1-encoding. just specify the languages in the preamble: \setdefaultlanguage{english} \setotherlanguage[babelshorthands]{german} 37 To write a paragraph in German. you can use the German environment: Englisch text.. polyglossia will first check whether a font has been defined for that language. \end{german} More English text. Writing in different languages is easy. This may look unnecessary since the only advantage is a correct hyphenation. This changes when we leave the Latin script and move to a more interesting language like Greek and Russian. With a Unicode based system. \newfontfamily\russianfont[Script=Cyrillic. I cannot show the actual Cyrillic letters. you can simply13 enter the characters in your editor and TEX will understand them. but when the second language is a little bit more exotic it will be worth the effort. Whenever a new language is activated. The package xgreek[22] offers support for writing either ancient or modern (monotonic or politonic) greek. Sometimes the font used in the main document does not contain glyphs that are required in the second language14 .2.(. The solution is to define a font that will be used for that language. Latin Modern does not contain Cyrillic letters .)]{(font)} Now you can write \textrussian{Pravda} is a russian newspaper. If you just need a word in a foreign language you can use the \textlanguage command: Englisch text. 13 14 For small values of simple. \textgerman{Gesundheit} is actually a German word.

38 Right to Left (RTL) languages.

Typesetting Text

Some languages are written left to right, others are written right to left(RTL). polyglossia needs the bidi[23] package15 in order to support RTL languages. The bidi package should be the last package you load, even after hyperref which is usually the last package. (Since polyglossia loads bidi this means that polyglossia should be the last package loaded.) The package xepersian[24] offers support for the Persian language. It A supplies Persian L TEX-commands that allows you to enter commands like \section in Persian, which makes this really attractive to native speakers. A xepersian is the only package that supports kashida with XEL TEX. A package for Syriac which uses a similar algorithm is under development. The IranNastaliq font provided by the SCICT16 is available at their website http://www.scict.ir/Portal/Home/Default.aspx. The arabxetex[20] package supports several languages with an Arabic script: • arab (Arabic) • persian • urdu • sindhi • pashto • ottoman (turk) • kurdish • kashmiri • malay (jawi) • uighur
A It offers a font mapping that enables XEL TEX to process input using the ArabTEX ASCII transcription. Fonts that support several Arabic laguages are offered by the IRMUG17 at http://wiki.irmug.org/index.php/X_Series_2. There is no package available for Hebrew because none is needed. The Hebrew support in polyglossia should be sufficient. But you do need a suitable font with real Unicode Hebrew. SBL Hebrew is free for noncommercial use and available at http://www.sbl-site.org/educational/
15

bidi does not support LuaTEX. Supreme Council of Information and Communication Technology 17 Iranian Mac User Group
16

2.6 The Space Between Words biblicalfonts.aspx. Another font available under the Open Font License is Ezra SIL, available at http://www.sil.org/computing/catalog/show_ software.asp?id=76. Remember to select the correct script:
\newfontfamily\hebrewfont[Script=Hebrew]{SBL Hebrew} \newfontfamily\hebrewfont[Script=Hebrew]{Ezra SIL}

39

Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK) The package xeCJK[25] takes care of font selection and punctuation of these languages.

2.6

The Space Between Words

A To get a straight right margin in the output, L TEX inserts varying amounts of space between the words. It inserts slightly more space at the end of a A sentence, as this makes the text more readable. L TEX assumes that sentences end with periods, question marks or exclamation marks. If a period follows an uppercase letter, this is not taken as a sentence ending, since periods after uppercase letters normally occur in abbreviations. Any exception from these assumptions has to be specified by the author. A backslash in front of a space generates a space that will not be enlarged. A tilde ‘~’ character generates a space that cannot be enlarged and additionally prohibits a line break. The command \@ in front of a period specifies that this period terminates a sentence even when it follows an uppercase letter.

Mr.~Smith was happy to see her\\ cf.~Fig.~5\\ I like BASIC\@. What about you?

Mr. Smith was happy to see her cf. Fig. 5 I like BASIC. What about you?

The additional space after periods can be disabled with the command
\frenchspacing
A which tells L TEX not to insert more space after a period than after ordinary character. This is very common in non-English languages, except bibliographies. If you use \frenchspacing, the command \@ is not necessary.

40

Typesetting Text

2.7

Titles, Chapters, and Sections

To help the reader find his or her way through your work, you should divide A it into chapters, sections, and subsections. L TEX supports this with special commands that take the section title as their argument. It is up to you to use them in the correct order. The following sectioning commands are available for the article class:
\section{...} \subsection{...} \subsubsection{...} \paragraph{...} \subparagraph{...}

If you want to split your document in parts without influencing the section or chapter numbering use
\part{...}

When you work with the report or book class, an additional top-level sectioning command becomes available
\chapter{...}

As the article class does not know about chapters, it is quite easy to add articles as chapters to a book. The spacing between sections, the A numbering and the font size of the titles will be set automatically by L TEX. Two of the sectioning commands are a bit special: • The \part command does not influence the numbering sequence of chapters. • The \appendix command does not take an argument. It just changes the chapter numbering to letters.18
A L TEX creates a table of contents by taking the section headings and page numbers from the last compile cycle of the document. The command

\tableofcontents

expands to a table of contents at the place it is issued. A new document A has to be compiled (“L TEXed”) twice to get a correct table of contents. Sometimes it might be necessary to compile the document a third time. A L TEX will tell you when this is necessary.
18

For the article style it changes the section numbering.

This generates section headings that do not show up in the table of contents and are not numbered. Normally the section headings show up in the table of contents exactly as they are entered in the text. A “starred” version of a command is built by adding a star * after the command name. this has no visual effect. and Sections All sectioning commands listed above also exist as “starred” versions. for example. Chapters. \author{. After this command chapters will be numbered with letters. A Apart from the sectioning commands explained above.2 on page 8. would become \section*{Help}.. The commands alter chapter headings and page numbering to work as you would expect in a book: \frontmatter should be the very first command after the start of the document body (\begin{document}). shown in the text} The title of the whole document is generated by issuing a \maketitle 41 command. . Sometimes this is not possible. It will switch page numbering to Roman numerals and sections be non-enumerated as if you were using the starred sectioning commands (eg \chapter*{Preface}) but the sections will still show up in the table of contents..} before calling \maketitle. such as the bibliography and the index. \mainmatter comes right before the first chapter of the book. because the heading is too long to fit into the table of contents.}. \backmatter should be inserted before the very last items in your book. \chapter[Title for the table of contents]{A long and especially boring title.. \appendix marks the start of additional material in your book.7 Titles..} and optionally \date{.. L TEX 2ε introduced three additional commands for use with the book class. The entry for the table of contents can then be specified as an optional argument in front of the actual heading. In the argument to \author. In the standard document classes. They are useful for dividing your publication.2. The command \section{Help}. you can supply several names separated by \and commands. It turns on Arabic page numbering and restarts the page counter. An example of some of the commands mentioned above can be found in Figure 1. The contents of the title have to be defined by the commands \title{..

or theorem after which the corresponding \label command was issued. a Footnotes\footnote{This is a footnote. subsection. Footnotes referring to a sentence or part of it should therefore be put after the comma or period. A reference to this subsection \label{sec:this} looks like: ‘‘see section~\ref{sec:this} on page~\pageref{sec:this}. \pageref prints the page number of the page where the \label command occurred. \ref{marker} and \pageref{marker} A where marker is an identifier chosen by the user. Footnotes should always be put20 after the word or sentence they refer to. the numbers from the previous compile cycle are used. table.’’ A reference to this subsection looks like: “see section 2. reports and articles. everybody reads the footnotes—we are a curious species. A tables and special segments of text. L TEX replaces \ref by the number of the section.8 on page 42. 21 Note that footnotes distract the reader from the main body of your document. This is a footnote.} are often used by people using \LaTeX. After all. L TEX provides the following commands for cross referencing \label{marker}.” 2. \label just saves the last automatically generated number. figure.42 Typesetting Text 2.9 Footnotes With the command \footnote{footnote text} a footnote is printed at the foot of the current page.8 Cross References In books. there are often cross-references to figures.21 Footnotesa are often used by people using A L TEX. 19 . Note that these commands are not aware of what they refer to. 20 “put” is one of the most common English words.19 As with section titles and page numbers for the table of contents. so why not just integrate everything you want to say into the body of the document?22 22 A guidepost doesn’t necessarily go where it’s pointing to :-).

L TEX provides the command \emph{text} to emphasize text. 2. . Enumerate.10 Emphasized Words If a text is typed using a typewriter. important words are emphasized by underlining them. \begin{aaa}. then L TEX uses the normal font for emphasizing.. and Description The itemize environment is suitable for simple lists.\begin{bbb}.11. words are emphasized by typesetting them in A an italic font... What the command actually does with its argument depends on the context: \emph{If you use emphasizing inside a piece of emphasized text. 2.} If you use emphasizing inside a piece of A emphasized text.. the enumerate environment for enumerated lists..2..\end{bbb}.10 Emphasized Words 43 2. Environments can be nested within each other as long as the correct nesting order is maintained. and the description environment for descriptions. then \LaTeX{} uses the \emph{normal} font for emphasizing.\end{aaa} In the following sections all important environments are explained.1 Itemize. however.11 Environments text \end{environment} \begin{environment} Where environment is the name of the environment. \underline{text} In printed books.

\begin{flushleft} This text is\\ left-aligned. \LaTeX{} is not trying to make each line the same length. Flushright. The center environment generates centred A text. You can next the list environments to your taste: • But it might start to look silly. \end{description} \end{enumerate} Typesetting Text 1. and Center The environments flushleft and flushright generate paragraphs that are either left.44 \flushleft \begin{enumerate} \item You can next the list environments to your taste: \begin{itemize} \item But it might start to look silly. can be presented beautifully in a list. If you do not issue \\ to specify line breaks. \end{flushright} This text is rightA aligned. L TEX is not trying to make each line the same length.2 Flushleft. L TEX will automatically determine line breaks. can be presented beautifully in a list. 2. \begin{center} At the centre\\of the earth \end{center} At the centre of the earth . \begin{flushright} This text is right-\\aligned. though. . \LaTeX{} is not trying to make each line the same length. Smart things. \end{flushleft} This text is A left-aligned. Therefore remember: Stupid things will not become smart because they are in a list. L TEX is not trying to make each line the same length.11. \item[Smart] things.With a dash. 2. \item[-] With a dash. though. \end{itemize} \item Therefore remember: \begin{description} \item[Stupid] things will not become smart because they are in a list.or right-aligned.

A This is why L TEX pages have such large borders by default and also why multicolumn print is used in newspapers. There are two similar environments: the quotation and the verse environments. \end{abstract} The abstract abstract. The quotation environment is useful for longer quotes going over several paragraphs. no line should be longer than 66 characters. \begin{abstract} The abstract abstract. . All the King’s horses and all the King’s men Couldn’t put Humpty together again. no line should be longer than 66 characters.2. because it indents the first line of each paragraph.3 Quote. L TEX provides the abstract environment for this purpose. and Verse The quote environment is useful for quotes. Quotation.4 Abstract In scientific publications it is customary to start with an abstract which gives A the reader a quick overview of what to expect. It is about Humpty Dumpty. important phrases and examples. \begin{flushleft} \begin{verse} Humpty Dumpty sat on a wall:\\ Humpty Dumpty had a great fall. I know only one English poem by heart. It is about Humpty Dumpty. 2. \end{verse} \end{flushleft} I know only one English poem by heart. The verse environment is useful for poems where the line breaks are important.11 Environments 45 2.11. A typographical rule of thumb for the line length is: On average. The lines are separated by issuing a \\ at the end of a line and an empty line after each verse. Normally abstract is used in documents typeset with the article document class. A typographical rule of thumb for the line length is: \begin{quote} On average.\\ All the King’s horses and all the King’s men\\ Couldn’t put Humpty together again. Humpty Dumpty sat on a wall: Humpty Dumpty had a great fall.11. \end{quote} This is why \LaTeX{} pages have such large borders by default and also why multicolumn print is used in newspapers.

The table spec argument of the \begin{tabular}[pos]{table spec} command defines the format of the table. similar behavior can be accessed with \verb+text+ The + is just an example of a delimiter character.6 Tabular The tabular environment can be used to typeset beautiful tables with A optional horizontal and vertical lines. Use an l for a column of leftaligned text. and c for centred text.11. L TEX determines the width of the columns automatically. \begin{verbatim} 10 PRINT "HELLO WORLD ". The \verb|\ldots| command \ldots The \ldots command . 20 GOTO 10 \end{verbatim} 10 PRINT "HELLO WORLD ". . with all line breaks and A spaces.5 Printing Verbatim Text that is enclosed between \begin{verbatim} and \end{verbatim} will be directly printed. Within a paragraph. . r for right-aligned text. 20 GOTO 10 \begin{verbatim*} the starred version of the verbatim environment emphasizes the spaces in the text \end{verbatim*} the starred version of the verbatim environment emphasizes the spaces in the text The \verb command can be used in a similar fashion with a star: \verb*|like this :-) | like this :-) The verbatim environment and the \verb command may not be used within parameters of other commands. 2. without any L TEX command being executed.11. as if typed on a typewriter. p{width } . Use any character except A letters. * or space. Many L TEX examples in this booklet are typeset with this command.46 Typesetting Text 2.

We sincerely hope you’ll all enjoy the show.} construct. The column separator can be specified with the @{. and | for a vertical line. b and c to specify table alignment at the top. bottom or center. We sincerely hope you’ll all enjoy the show. This command kills the inter-column space and replaces it with whatever is between the curly braces. where i and j are the column numbers the line should extend over. The pos argument specifies the vertical position of the table relative to the baseline of the surrounding text. \begin{tabular}{@{} l @{}} \hline no leading space\\ \hline \end{tabular} no leading space . Another possible application is to suppress leading space in a table with @{} ..2.7cm}|} \hline Welcome to Boxy’s paragraph.11 Environments for a column containing justified text with line breaks. A If the text in a column is too wide for the page. Within a tabular environment.\\ \hline \end{tabular} Welcome to Boxy’s paragraph. \begin{tabular}{|r|l|} \hline 7C0 & hexadecimal \\ 3700 & octal \\ \cline{2-2} 11111000000 & binary \\ \hline \hline 1984 & decimal \\ \hline \end{tabular} 47 7C0 3700 11111000000 1984 hexadecimal octal binary decimal \begin{tabular}{|p{4. L TEX won’t automatically wrap it. Use one of the letters t . & jumps to the next column. One common use for this command is explained below in the decimal alignment problem.. Using p{width } you can define a special type of column which will wrap-around the text as in a normal paragraph. \\ starts a new line and \hline inserts a horizontal line. Add partial lines by using \cline{i-j}.

”. . So you may want to give them a bit more breathing space by setting a higher \arraystretch and \tabcolsep value.48 \begin{tabular}{l} \hline leading space left and right\\ \hline \end{tabular} Typesetting Text leading space left and right Since there is no built-in way to align numeric columns to a decimal point.46 80662. \begin{tabular}{c r @{. The @{. giving the appearance of a single.23 we can “cheat” and do it by using two columns: a right-aligned integer and a left-aligned fraction. A Sometimes the default L TEX tables do feel a bit cramped. If you want to typeset long tables. 23 If the ‘tools’ bundle is installed on your system.1416 36.7 \begin{tabular}{|c|c|} \hline \multicolumn{2}{|c|}{Ene} \\ \hline Mene & Muh! \\ \hline \end{tabular} Ene Mene Muh! Material typeset with the tabular environment always stays together on one page.} command in the \begin{tabular} line replaces the normal inter-column spacing with just a “. you might want to use the longtable environments. decimal-point-justified column. Don’t forget to replace the decimal point in your numbers with a column separator (&)! A column label can be placed above our numeric “column” by using the \multicolumn command. have a look at the dcolumn package.} l} Pi expression & \multicolumn{2}{c}{Value} \\ \hline $\pi$ & 3&1416 \\ $\pi^{\pi}$ & 36&46 \\ $(\pi^{\pi})^{\pi}$ & 80662&7 \\ \end{tabular} Pi expression π ππ (π π )π Value 3.

.5} \renewcommand{\tabcolsep}{0. this is called a strut. This approach would leave pages partially empty. A Otherwise floats may become a major source of frustration. while filling the current page with A body text.12 Floating Bodies Today most publications contain a lot of figures and tables. . one for tables and one for figures. These elements need special treatment. because L TEX never puts them where you want them to be. .5 on page 130.2cm} \begin{tabular}{|l|} \hline less cramped\\\hline table layout\\\hline \end{tabular}} 49 These lines are tight less cramped table layout If you just want to grow the height of a single row in your table add an invisible vertical bar24 . L TEX offers two environments for floating bodies. A Let’s first have a look at the commands L TEX supplies for floats: 24 In professional typesetting. because they cannot be broken across pages. 2. which looks very bad. To take full advantage of these two environments it is A important to understand approximately how L TEX handles floats internally. Use a zero width \rule to implement this trick. One method would be to start a new page every time a figure or a table is too large to fit on the present page. \begin{tabular}{|c|} \hline \rule{1pt}{4ex}Pitprop \ldots\\ \hline \rule{0pt}{4ex}Strut\\ \hline \end{tabular} Pitprop . The solution to this problem is to ‘float’ any figure or table that does not fit on the current page to a later page. Strut The pt and em in the example above are TEX units. Read more on units in table 6.2.12 Floating Bodies \begin{tabular}{|l|} \hline These lines\\\hline are tight\\\hline \end{tabular} {\renewcommand{\arraystretch}{1.

50 Typesetting Text Any material enclosed in a figure or table environment will be treated as floating matter. A placement specifier is constructed by building a string of float-placing permissions. . Therefore: A If L TEX is not placing the floats as you expected. it is often only one float jamming one of the two float queues.’ which is no longer possible).9. a table could be started with the following line \begin{table}[!hbp] A The placement specifier [!hbp] allows L TEX to place the table right here (h) or at the bottom (b) of some page or on a special floats page (p). This parameter is used to tell L TEX about the locations to which the float is allowed to be moved. Both float environments support an optional parameter \begin{figure}[placement specifier] or \begin{table}[. This is useful mainly for small floats. L TEX strictly maintains the original order of appearance for each type of float. Any new floats occurring in the text get placed A into the appropriate queues. L TEX first checks if it is possible to fill a special ‘float’ page with floats from the queues. and all this even if it does not look that good (!). here at the very place in the text where it occurred. Spec h t b p ! Permission to place the float .9: Float Placing Permissions. the first float A on each queue is treated as if it had just occurred in the text: L TEX tries again to place it according to its respective placement specifiers (except ‘h. . ] A called the placement specifier.25 When A a new page is started. That’s why a figure that cannot be placed pushes all further figures to the end of the document. . If no placement specifier is given. See Table 2. which could stop this float from being placed. the standard classes assume [tbp]. 25 These are FIFO—‘first in first out’—queues! Table 2. without considering most of the internal parametersa . For example. If a float cannot be placed on the current page it is deferred either to the figures queue or the tables queue. . If this is not possible. a Such as the maximum number of floats allowed on one page. A L TEX will place every float it encounters according to the placement specifier supplied by the author. . at the top of a page at the bottom of a page on a special page containing only floats.

These lists will display the whole caption. .12 Floating Bodies A While it is possible to give L TEX single-location placement specifiers. Use the \caption{caption text} command to define a caption for the float. A ever use the [h] option—it is so bad that in more recent versions of L TEX. printing a list of figures or tables.26 If this is not possible. 51 Having explained the difficult bit. You could use this if you wanted to reserve space for images you are going to paste into the finished document. it is automatically replaced by [ht].\label{white}} \end{figure} A In the example above. Figure~\ref{white} is an example of Pop-Art. blocking subsequent floats. \begin{figure}[!hbtp] \makebox[\textwidth]{\framebox[5cm]{\rule{0pt}{5cm}}} \caption{Five by Five in Centimetres. If there is not enough material for a 26 assuming the figure queue is empty. respectively. so if you tend to use long captions you must have a shorter version of the caption for the lists. L TEX will try really hard (!) to place the figure right here (h). In particular.2. it tries to place the figure at the bottom (b) of the page. \caption[Short]{LLLLLoooooonnnnnggggg} Use \label and \ref to create a reference to a float within your text. you should never. The two commands \listoffigures and \listoftables operate analogously to the \tableofcontents command. there are some more things to mention about the table and figure environments. If the float does not fit in the location specified it becomes stuck. A running number and the string A “Figure” or “Table” will be added by L TEX. it determines whether it is possible to create a float page containing this figure and maybe some tables from the tables queue. Note that the \label command must come after the \caption command since you want it to reference the number of the caption. this causes problems. This is accomplished by entering the short version in brackets after the \caption command. The following example draws a square and inserts it into the document. Failing to place the figure on the current page.

Under certain circumstances it might be necessary to use the \clearpage or even the \cleardoublepage A command. \footnote or \phantom. Now they will work properly even when used in moving arguments.13 Protecting Fragile Commands Text given as arguments of commands like \caption or \section may show up more than once in the document (e. Some commands will break when used in the argument of \section-like commands. These fragile commands need protection (don’t we all?). A You will learn how to include PostScript drawings in your L TEX 2ε documents later in this introduction. These commands are called fragile commands—for example. and once more treats the figure as if it had just occurred in the text. \section{I am considerate \protect\footnote{and protect my footnotes}} . It orders L TEX to immediately place all floats remaining in the queues and then start a new page. Compilation of your document will fail.52 Typesetting Text A special float page. In most cases a superfluous \protect won’t hurt. not even to its arguments. L TEX starts a new page. \cleardoublepage even goes to a new right-hand page. \protect only refers to the command that follows right behind. Protect them by putting the \protect command in front of them.g. in the table of contents as well as in the body of the document). 2.

we assume amsmath is loaded recent L TE in the preamble. We will mostly deal with the amsmath package which is a A part of the bundle. 3. you should use AMS-L TEX. A X bundle is a collection of packages and classes for mathematThe AMS-L TE ical typesetting. Mathematical equations within a paragraph are entered between $ and $: 1 If yours is missing it.2 Single Equations A mathematical formula can be typeset in-line within a paragraph (text style). It is A highly likely that your problem is addressed in AMS-LTEX. AMS-L TEX is produced by The American Mathematical A Society and it is used extensively for mathematical typesetting. we will attack the main strength of TEX: mathematical typesetting. . While the things explained here are sufficient for many people. A AMS-L TEX is a part of the required distribution and is provided with all A X distributions. this chapter only scratches the surface.1 In this chapter. don’t despair if you can’t find a solution to your mathematical typesetting needs here. \usepackage{amsmath}. or the paragraph can be broken and the formula typeset separately (display style). but they A are limited (or maybe it’s the other way around: AMS-L TEX is unlimited!) and in some cases inconsistent. go to CTAN://macros/latex/required/amslatex.1 A The AMS-L TEX bundle A If you want to typeset (advanced) mathematics. L TEX itself does provide some basic features and environments for mathematics. But be warned.Chapter 3 Typesetting Mathematical Formulae Now you are ready! In this chapter. 3.

enclose the equation in \[ and \]:3 2 This is an amsmath command. Add a squared and b squared to get c squared.1) Einstein says E = mc2 He didn’t say 1+1=3 This is a reference to (3. 3 A This is again from amsmath. or even easier. using a more mathematical approach \begin{equation} a^2 + b^2 = c^2 \end{equation} Einstein says \begin{equation} E = mc^2 \label{clever} \end{equation} He didn’t say \begin{equation} 1 + 1 = 3 \tag{dumb} \end{equation} This is a reference to \eqref{clever}. using a more mathematical approach a2 + b2 = c2 (3. Or. using a more mathematical approach: a2 + b2 = c2 \TeX{} is pronounced as $\tau\epsilon\chi$\\[5pt] 100~m$^{3}$ of water\\[5pt] This comes from my $\heartsuit$ TEX is pronounced as τ χ 100 m3 of water This comes from my ♥ If you want your larger equations to be set apart from the rest of the paragraph. Or.2). use the starred version of equation using an asterisk. you can use L TEX’s own displaymath environment instead.2) A If you don’t want L TEX to number the equations. Standard L TEX’s has only the equation environment without the star. you enclose them between \begin{equation} and \end{equation}. it is preferable to display them rather than to break the paragraph apart. Or. If you don’t have access to the package for some obscure A reason.2 You can then \label an equation number and refer to it somewhere else in the text by using the \eqref command. you \tag it instead. To do this. . equation*. If you want to name the equation something specific. Add $a$ squared and $b$ squared to get $c$ squared. using a more mathematical approach: $a^2 + b^2 = c^2$ Typesetting Mathematical Formulae Add a squared and b squared to get c squared. (dumb) (3.54 Add $a$ squared and $b$ squared to get $c$ squared. Or.

.2. Or. or have to be specified with special commands such as \.2 Single Equations Add $a$ squared and $b$ squared to get $c$ squared.7). it does not allow switching between numbered and not numbered style as easily as equation and equation*. Or. in math mode: 1.1 Math Mode There are also differences between math mode and text mode. as all spaces are either derived logically from the mathematical expressions. Most spaces and line breaks do not have any significance.3. Note the difference in typesetting style between text style and display style equations: This is text style: $\lim_{n \to \infty} \sum_{k=1}^n \frac{1}{k^2} = \frac{\pi^2}{6}$. And this is display style: \begin{equation} \lim_{n \to \infty} \sum_{k=1}^n \frac{1}{k^2} = \frac{\pi^2}{6} \end{equation} This is text style: limn→∞ And this is display style: n n→∞ n 1 k=1 k2 = π2 6 . A deep mathematical expression followed by a hi expression. As opposed to a smashed \smash{$d_{e_{e_p}}$} expression followed by a \smash{$h^{i^{g^h}}$} expression.3) In text style. see section 3. gh 3. For example. This keeps the line spacing even. As opposed to h a g smashed deep expression followed by a hi expression.. \quad or \qquad (we’ll get back to that later. enclose tall or deep math expressions or sub expressions A in \smash. using a more mathematical approach \begin{equation*} a^2 + b^2 = c^2 \end{equation*} or you can type less for the same effect: \[ a^2 + b^2 = c^2 \] 55 Add a squared and b squared to get c squared. using a more mathematical approach a2 + b2 = c2 or you can type less for the same effect: a2 + b2 = c2 While \[ is short and sweet. lim k=1 π2 1 = k2 6 (3. A $d_{e_{e_p}}$ mathematical expression followed by a $h^{i^{g^h}}$ expression. This makes L TEX ignore the height of these expressions.

it will be stated clearly)..14 on page 79 and Table 6. which is obtained using \mathbb from the package amssymb.\Phi.\Omega. uppercase letters are entered as \Gamma. Each letter is considered to be the name of a variable and will be typeset as such. 5 Take a look at Table 3.\theta.3 Building Blocks of a Mathematical Formula In this section. 3. Most math mode commands act only on the next character.} command (see also section 3. \beta. If you want to typeset normal text within a formula (normal upright font and normal spacing) then you have to enter the text using the \text{.. µ. Only one paragraph per formula. \Delta. Lowercase Greek letters are entered as \alpha. but load it anyway.\Delta$ λ. \mu. B. .4 The last example becomes $x^{2} \geq 0\qquad \text{for all } x \in \mathbb{R}$ x2 ≥ 0 for all x ∈ R See Table 3. $\lambda. $\forall x \in \mathbf{R}: \qquad x^{2} \geq 0$ ∀x ∈ R : x2 ≥ 0 $x^{2} \geq 0\qquad \text{for all }x\in\mathbf{R}$ x2 ≥ 0 for all x ∈ R Mathematicians can be very fussy about which symbols are used: it would be conventional here to use the ‘blackboard bold’ font. \gamma. ξ... Check your distribution or go to CTAN:/fonts/amsfonts/latex/ to obtain it. ∆ Exponents. Empty lines are not allowed. Ω. Superscripts and Subscripts can be specified using the ^ and the _ characters. π. defined in L TEX 2ε because it looks the same as a normal roman A. . . 3. 5 A There is no uppercase Alpha. Beta etc. you have to group them together using curly braces: {. θ. .\pi.8 on page 70). 4 A amssymb is not a part of the AMS-L TEX bundle. .4 on page 125 for more math fonts. Most of the commands in this section will not require amsmath (if they do.\xi.2 on page 75 for a list of Greek letters.}. so if you want a command to affect several characters. . . . Φ. but it is perhaps still a part of your A L TEX distribution. . .56 Typesetting Mathematical Formulae 2. we describe the most important commands used in mathematical typesetting.

If just the sign is needed.3 = 1/3 The commands \overbrace and \underbrace create long horizontal braces over or under an expression: 6 9 $\underbrace{\overbrace{a+b+c}^6 \cdot \overbrace{d+e+f}^9} _\text{meaning of life} = 42$ a + b + c · d + e + f = 42 meaning of life To add mathematical accents such as small arrows or tilde signs to variables.6 on page 77. There are more examples in section 3. n! = 1 · 2 · · · (n − 1) · n The commands \overline and \underline create horizontal lines directly over or under an expression: $0. . Use \cdot to typeset a single centered dot. $p^3_{ij} \qquad m_\text{Knuth}\qquad \sum_{k=1}^3 k \\[5pt] a^x+y \neq a^{x+y}\qquad e^{x^2} \neq {e^x}^2$ 57 p3 ij mKnuth 2 3 k=1 k ax + y = ax+y ex = ex 2 The square root is entered as \sqrt. the nth root is generated with A \sqrt[n]. Besides that.3 Building Blocks of a Mathematical Formula Table 3. See various kinds of arrows like → and on Table 3.3. $\sqrt{x} \Leftrightarrow x^{1/2} \quad \sqrt[3]{2} \quad \sqrt{x^{2} + \sqrt{y}} \quad \surd[x^2 + y^2]$ √ √ 3 √ √ x ⇔ x1/2 2 x2 + y [x2 + y 2 ] While the dot sign to indicate the multiplication operation is normally left out. The size of the root sign is determined automatically by L TEX.3 on page 76 lists a lot of binary relations like ⊆ and ⊥. it is sometimes written to help the eye in grouping a formula.6. $\Psi = v_1 \cdot v_2 \cdot \ldots \qquad n! = 1 \cdot 2 \cdots (n-1) \cdot n$ Ψ = v1 · v2 · . there are \vdots for vertical and \ddots for diagonal dots.1 on page 75 might be useful. the commands given in Table 3.\overline{3} = \underline{\underline{1/3}}$ 0. . Wide . use \surd. \cdots is three centered dots while \ldots sets the dots low (on the baseline).

The two commands \overrightarrow and \overleftarrow are useful to denote the vector from A to B: $\vec{a} \qquad \vec{AB} \qquad \overrightarrow{AB}$ − − → AB a AB Names of functions are often typeset in an upright font. This command works only in the preamble so the commented lines in the example below must be put into the preamble.58 Typesetting Mathematical Formulae hats and tildes covering several characters are generated with \widetilde and \widehat. and not in italics A as variables are. so L TEX supplies the following commands to typeset the most common function names: \arccos \cos \csc \exp \ker \limsup \arcsin \cosh \deg \gcd \lg \ln \arctan \cot \det \hom \lim \log \arg \coth \dim \inf \liminf \max \sinh \sup \tan \tanh \min \Pr \sec \sin \begin{equation*} \lim_{x \rightarrow 0} \frac{\sin x}{x}=1 \end{equation*} x→0 lim sin x =1 x For functions missing from the list. This is done with the \vec command. The apostrophe mark ’ gives a prime: $f(x) = x^2 \qquad f’(x) = 2x \qquad f’’(x) = 2\\[5pt] \hat{XY} \quad \widehat{XY} \quad \bar{x_0} \quad \bar{x}_0$ f (x) = x2 ˆ XY XY f (x) = 2x x0 ¯ x0 ¯ f (x) = 2 Vectors are often specified by adding small arrow symbols on the tops of variables. use the \DeclareMathOperator command. %\DeclareMathOperator{\argh}{argh} %\DeclareMathOperator*{\nut}{Nut} \begin{equation*} 3\argh = 2\nut_{x=1} \end{equation*} 3 argh = 2 Nut x=1 For the modulo function. There is even a starred version for functions with limits. Notice the difference between \hat and \widehat and the placement of \bar for a variable with subscript. there are two commands: \bmod for the binary operator “a mod b” and \pmod for expressions such as “x ≡ a (mod b):” .

is made with \dfrac. This style is obtainable in display style with \tfrac.e. i. the fraction is shrunk to fit the line. display style fraction in text.3 Building Blocks of a Mathematical Formula 59 $a\bmod b \\ x\equiv a \pmod{b}$ a mod b x ≡ a (mod b) A built-up fraction is typeset with the \frac{. \begin{equation*} f_n(x) \stackrel{*}{\approx} 1 \end{equation*} ∗ fn (x) ≈ 1 ... In in-line equations. Often the slashed form 1/2 is preferable.. because it looks better for small amounts of ‘fraction material:’ In display style: \begin{equation*} 3/8 \qquad \frac{3}{8} \qquad \tfrac{3}{8} \end{equation*} In display style: 3/8 3 8 3 8 In text style: $1\frac{1}{2}$~hours \qquad $1\dfrac{1}{2}$~hours 1 In text style: 1 2 hours 1 1 hours 2 Here the \partial command for partial derivatives is used: \begin{equation*} \sqrt{\frac{x^2}{k+1}}\qquad x^\frac{2}{k+1}\qquad \frac{\partial^2f} {\partial x^2} \end{equation*} x2 k+1 x k+1 2 ∂2f ∂x2 To typeset binomial coefficients or similar structures.}{.3. \stackrel{#1}{#2} puts the symbol given in #1 in superscript-like size over #2 which is set in its usual position.} command. The reverse.. use the command \binom from amsmath: Pascal’s rule is \begin{equation*} \binom{n}{k} =\binom{n-1}{k} + \binom{n-1}{k-1} \end{equation*} Pascal’s rule is n k = n−1 n−1 + k k−1 For binary relations it may be useful to stack symbols over each other.

\Big. \begin{equation*} {a. which can be done using the commands \big. Round and square brackets can be entered with the corresponding keys and curly braces with \{.b. If you don’t want anything on the right. j) = Q(i. and the product operator with \prod. j) 0<i<n j⊆i A L TEX provides all sorts of symbols for bracketing and other delimiters (e.c} \neq \{a.j) = Q(i. c = {a. but all other delimiters are generated with special commands (e.60 Typesetting Mathematical Formulae The integral operator is generated with \int. \bigg and \Bigg as prefixes to most delimiter commands: $\Big((x+1)(x-1)\Big)^{2}$\\ $\big( \Big( \bigg( \Bigg( \quad \big\} \Big\} \bigg\} \Bigg\} \quad \big\| \Big\| \bigg\| \Bigg\| \quad \big\Downarrow \Big\Downarrow \bigg\Downarrow \Bigg\Downarrow$ 2 (x + 1)(x − 1) .c\} \end{equation*} a. b. [ ).j) \end{equation*} n P (i. use the invisible “\right.”: \begin{equation*} 1 + \left(\frac{1}{1-x^{2}} \right)^3 \qquad \left. L TEX will automatically determine the correct size of the delimiter. c} If you put \left in front of an opening delimiter and \right in front of A a closing delimiter. \updownarrow). \ddagger \frac{~}{~}\right) \end{equation*} 1+ 1 1 − x2 3 ‡ In some cases it is necessary to specify the correct size of a mathematical delimiter by hand. amsmath provides the \substack command: \begin{equation*} \sum^n_{\substack{0<i<n \\ j\subseteq i}} P(i. the sum operator with \sum.g. The upper and lower limits are specified with ^ and _ like subscripts and superscripts: \begin{equation*} \sum_{i=1}^n \qquad \int_0^{\frac{\pi}{2}} \qquad \prod_\epsilon \end{equation*} n 0 π 2 i=1 To get more control over the placement of indices in complex expressions. b. Note that you must close every \left with a corresponding \right.b.g.

8 on page 78.4 Single Equations that are Too Long: multline For a list of all delimiters available. A wrap before an equality sign is preferable to a wrap before any operator. 3. see Table 3. Any other type of wrap should be avoided if at all possible. A wrap before a plus.or minus-operator is preferable to a wrap before a multiplication-operator. The multline environment creates the following output: 6 The multline-environment is from amsmath.4 Single Equations that are Too Long: multline If an equation is too long. we have to wrap it somehow. Unfortunately.5) Here it is actually the RHS that is too long to fit on one line.5) will yield better results. there are certain rules on how to do the wrapping: 1. This is done by putting a \\ on those places where the equation needs to be wrapped. To improve the readability. 2. The easiest way to achieve such a wrapping is the use of the multline environment:6 \begin{multline} a + b + c + d + e + f + g + h + i \\ = j + k + l + m + n \end{multline} a+b+c+d+e+f +g+h+i =j+k+l+m+n (3. In general one should always wrap an equation before an equality sign or an operator.3. 61 3. Similarly to equation* there also exists a multline* version for preventing an equation number. Consider the following situation: \begin{equation} a = b + c + d + e + f + g + h + i + j + k + l + m + n + o + p \label{eq:equation_too_long} \end{equation} a = b+c+d+e+f +g+h+i+j+k+l+m+n+o+p (3. Often the IEEEeqnarray environment (see section 3. wrapped equations are usually less easy to read than not wrapped ones. 4. .4) The difference from the equation environment is that an arbitrary line-break (or also multiple line-breaks) can be introduced.

Before we offer our suggestions on how to do this. Of course.7) (3. The better solution is provided by the IEEEeqnarray environment that will be discussed in detail in Section 3.5). 3.62 \begin{multline} a = b + c + d + e + f + g + h + i + j \\ + k + l + m + n + o + p \end{multline} Typesetting Mathematical Formulae a=b+c+d+e+f +g+h+i+j +k+l+m+n+o+p (3.11) =d+e+f +g+h+i+j+k+l Here + m should be below d and not below the equality sign.1 Problems with Traditional Commands To group multiple equations the align environment7 could be used: \begin{align} a & = b + c \\ & = d + e \end{align} a=b+c =d+e (3. we start with a few bad examples that show the biggest drawbacks of some common solutions. one could add some space (\hspace{. Here we need to work with vertical alignment in order to keep the array of equations in a nice and readable structure.6) This is better than (3.. .8) this approach fails once a single line is too long: \begin{align} a & = b + c & = d + e + + j + k + l & + m + n + & = p + q + \end{align} \\ f + g + h + i \nonumber \\ o \\ r + s a=b+c +m+n+o =p+q+r+s (3.5 Multiple Equations In the most general situation we have a sequence of several equalities that do not fit onto one line. ). .9) (3.5.10) (3. Another excellent use case for the IEEEeqnarray environment. but this will never yield a precise arrangement (and is bad style.. 7 . but it has the disadvantage that the equality sign loses its natural greater importance with respect to the plus operator in front of k. A better solution is offered by the eqnarray environment: The align-environment can also be used to group several blocks of equations beside each other. Try an argument like {rCl+rCl}.5.}). 3.

20) .18) = n + o + p + q + r + s (3. Particularly. .17) While the environment offers a command \lefteqn that can be used when the LHS is too long: \begin{eqnarray} \lefteqn{a + b + c + d + e + f + g + h}\nonumber\\ & = & i + j + k + l + m \\ & = & n + o + p + q + r + s \end{eqnarray} a+b+c+d+e+f +g+h = i+j+k+l+m (3.13) (3.15) .3. they are not the same as in the multline and equation environments: \begin{eqnarray} a & = & a = a \end{eqnarray} a = a=a (3.5 Multiple Equations \begin{eqnarray} a & = & b + c \\ & = & d + e + f + g + h + i + j + k + l \nonumber \\ && +\: m + n + o \\ & = & p + q + r + s \end{eqnarray} 63 a = b+c +m+n+o = p+q+r+s (3.16) = d+e+f +g+h +i +j (3.12) (3. and the expression sometimes overlaps with the equation number even though there would be enough room on the left: \begin{eqnarray} a & = & b + c \\ & = & d + e + f + g + h^2 + i^2 + j \label{eq:faultyeqnarray} \end{eqnarray} a = b+c 2 2 (3.14) = d+e+f +g+h+i+j+k+l This is still not optimal though as he spaces around the equality signs are too big.19) this is not optimal either as the RHS is too short and the array is not properly centered: \begin{eqnarray} \lefteqn{a + b + c + d + e + f + g + h} \nonumber \\ & = & i + j \end{eqnarray} a+b+c+d+e+f +g+h = i+j (3. .

the first column right-justified.3 Common Usage In the following we will describe how we use IEEEeqnarray to solve the most common problems. i. it can be found on CTAN. beside l. The part about IEEEeqnarray can be found in Appendix F.10 Note the spaces around the equality signs in contrast to the space produced by the eqnarray environment. 3. R for math mode entries there are also s. I can now stear you gently towards the glorious . in order to be able to use the IEEEeqnarray environment one needs to load the package9 IEEEtrantools.64 Typesetting Mathematical Formulae having badmouthed the competition sufficiently. 10 For more spacing types refer to Section 3.e. C. and right text mode entries.9. 9 The IEEEtrantools package may not be included in your setup.. left-justified column to use for comments. Moreover. this specification will be {rCl}. Include the following line in the header of your document: \usepackage[retainorgcmds]{IEEEtrantools} The strength of IEEEeqnarray is the ability to specify the number of columns in the equation array.2 IEEEeqnarray Environment The IEEEeqnarray environment is a very powerful command with many options. Additional space can be added with .5. For more information we refer to the manual. . centered. c.1.23) =d+e+f +g+h+i+j+k any number of columns can be specified: {c} will give only one column with all entries centered.22) (3. r. If a line overlaps with the equation number as in (3. L. the command 8 The official manual is called IEEEtran_HOWTO.pdf. Here. Usually. . and / and ? in increasing order. . we will only introduce its basic functionalities.21) (3. u for left. t.8 First of all. 3. three columns. or {rCll} would add a fourth.17).5. the middle one centered with a little more space around it (therefore we specify capital C instead of lower-case c) and the third column left-justified: \begin{IEEEeqnarray}{rCl} a & = & b + c \\ & = & d + e + f + g + h + i + j + k \nonumber\\ && +\: l + m + n + o \\ & = & p + q + r + s \end{IEEEeqnarray} a=b+c +l+m+n+o =p+q+r+s (3.

11 I think that one quad is the distance that looks good for most cases.26) = d + e + f + g + h + i + j + (3.28) If the LHS is too long. (3. \end{IEEEeqnarray} a=b+c = l + m + n. Note that by inserting \quad commands one can easily adapt the depth of the equation signs.27) (3. . IEEEeqnarray offers the \IEEEeqnarraymulticol command which works in all situations: \begin{IEEEeqnarray}{rCl} \IEEEeqnarraymulticol{3}{l}{ a + b + c + d + e + f + g + h }\nonumber\\ \quad & = & i + j \\ & = & k + l + m \end{IEEEeqnarray} a+b+c+d+e+f +g+h =i+j =k+l+m (3.29) = d + e + f + g + h + i + j + k (3.3.31) The usage is identical to the \multicolumns command in the tabularenvironment.30) (3.11 e.g.5 Multiple Equations \IEEEeqnarraynumspace 65 can be used: it has to be added in the corresponding line and makes sure that the whole equation array is shifted by the size of the equation numbers (the shift depends on the size of the number!): instead of \begin{IEEEeqnarray}{rCl} a & = & b + c \\ & = & d + e + f + g + h + i + j + k \\ & = & l + m + n \end{IEEEeqnarray} a=b+c =l+m+n (3. The first argument {3} specifies that three columns shall be combined into one which will be left-justified {l}.25) k we get \begin{IEEEeqnarray}{rCl} a & = & b + c \\ & = & d + e + f + g + h + i + j + k \IEEEeqnarraynumspace\\ & = & l + m + n.24) (3. as a replacement for the faulty \lefteqn command..

34) (3. it is necessary to add an additional space \: between the operator and the term: instead of \begin{IEEEeqnarray}{rCl} a & = & b + c \\ & = & d + e + f + g + h + i + j + k \nonumber\\ && + l + m + n + o \\ & = & p + q + r + s \end{IEEEeqnarray} a=b+c +l + m + n + o =p+q+r+s (3. the number can be suppressed using \nonumber (or \IEEEnonumber).36) =d+e+f +g+h+i+j+k we should write \begin{IEEEeqnarray}{rCl} a & = & b + c \\ & = & d + e + f + g + h + i + j + k \nonumber\\ && +\: l + m + n + o \\ & = & p + q + r + s \end{IEEEeqnarray} a=b+c +l+m+n+o =p+q+r+s (3. L TEX interprets the first + or − as a sign instead of operator.32) (3.37) (3. but must be an operator.g. If a particular line should not have an equation number.66 \begin{IEEEeqnarray}{rCl} \IEEEeqnarraymulticol{3}{l}{ a + b + c + d + e + f + g + h }\nonumber\\ \qquad\qquad & = & i + j \\ & = & k + l + m \end{IEEEeqnarray} Typesetting Mathematical Formulae a+b+c+d+e+f +g+h =i+j =k+l+m (3. • an integral \int or sum \sum.35) (3. a + or − cannot be a sign. Therefore.33) A If an equation is split into two or more lines. \sin.. In those situations A L TEX will add the correct spacing and no additional space is needed. \det.39) =d+e+f +g+h+i+j+k Note the space difference between + and l! And sometimes spacing just work e. in front of • an operator name like \log. etc.. • a bracket with adaptive size using \left and \right (this is in contrast to normal brackets or brackets with fixed size like \big( ). \max. If on such a line a .38) (3.

6 Arrays and Matrices To typeset arrays. In this case an equation number can be made to appear using the command \IEEEyesnumber: 67 \begin{IEEEeqnarray*}{rCl} a & = & b + c \\ & = & d + e \IEEEyesnumber\\ & = & f + g \end{IEEEeqnarray*} a=b+c =d+e =f +g (3.41a) (3.. Apart from improving the readability of the source code this prevents a compilation error in the situation of a \IEEEmulticol command after the label-definition. . The \\ command is used to break the lines: \begin{equation*} \mathbf{X} = \left( \begin{array}{ccc} x_1 & x_2 & \ldots \\ x_3 & x_4 & \ldots \\ \vdots & \vdots & \ddots \end{array} \right) \end{equation*} x1  x3 X= ..  x2 x4 .6 Arrays and Matrices label \label{eq:.. use the array environment.41b) 3.” as an invisible \right delimiter: .. Place the labels right before the line-break \\ or the next to the equation it belongs to. . The array environment can also be used to typeset piecewise functions by using a “.3. It works somewhat similar to the tabular environment..40) Sub-numbers are also easily possible using \IEEEyessubnumber: \begin{IEEEeqnarray}{rCl} a & = & b + c \IEEEyessubnumber\\ & = & d + e \nonumber\\ & = & f + g \IEEEyessubnumber \end{IEEEeqnarray} a=b+c =d+e =f +g (3. .. .. then this label is passed on further to the next equation number that is not suppressed. There also exists a *-version where all equation numbers are suppressed.} is defined.  . .   . .

.68 \begin{equation*} |x| = \left\{ \begin{array}{rl} -x & \text{if } x < 0.. The maximum number is 10.  .  .  . bmatrix [. pmn .  |x| = 0 if x = 0. \end{array} \right.\\ 0 & \text{if } x = 0.\\ x & \text{if } x > 0. \end{equation*} Typesetting Mathematical Formulae   −x 0 |x| =  x if x < 0. . but amsmath provides a better solution using the different matrix environments. pm2 .. but it is customisable (though it is not very often you need 10 columns!): \begin{equation*} \begin{matrix} 1 & 2 \\ 3 & 4 \end{matrix} \qquad \begin{bmatrix} p_{11} & p_{12} & & p_{1n} \\ p_{21} & p_{22} & & p_{2n} \\ \vdots & \vdots & & \vdots \\ p_{m1} & p_{m2} & & p_{mn} \end{bmatrix} \end{equation*} \ldots \ldots \ddots \ldots 1 3 2 4  p11  p21   .  p1n p2n   . There are six versions with different delimiters: matrix (none).. if x > 0. You don’t have to specify the number of columns as with array. pm1 p12 p22 .. . . \end{cases} \end{equation*}  −x if x < 0. so it is worth a look: \begin{equation*} |x| = \begin{cases} -x & \text{if } x < 0. Bmatrix {.\\ 0 & \text{if } x = 0. pmatrix (.\\ x & \text{if } x > 0.   x if x > 0. The cases environment from amsmath simplifies the syntax.. . . . if x = 0. Matrices can be typeset by array. vmatrix | and Vmatrix . ..

\iiiint. \begin{equation*} \int_1^2 \ln x \mathrm{d}x \qquad \int_1^2 \ln x \. you’ll discover that the spacing between the integrals is too wide. \newcommand{\ud}{\. we define a new command \ud (upright d) which produces “ d” (notice the spacing before the d). \! produces a negative 3 space of − 18 quad (− ). The escaped space character \ generates a medium sized space comparable to the interword spacing and \quad ( ) and \qquad ( ) produce large spaces.7 Spacing in Math Mode 69 3.tex (distributed with AMS-L TEX) A X Companion [3] for further details.\mathrm{d}} b \begin{equation*} \int_a^b f(x)\ud x \end{equation*} f (x) dx a If you want to typeset multiple integrals. and \idotsint commands. but amsmath provides an easier way for fine-tuning the spacing. In the next example. it can be 3 adjusted by inserting special spacing commands: \. or Chapter 8 of The L TE .3. namely the \iint. so we don’t have to write it every time.\mathrm{d}} \begin{IEEEeqnarray*}{c} \int\int f(x)g(y) \ud x \ud y \\ \int\!\!\!\int f(x)g(y) \ud x \ud y \\ \iint f(x)g(y) \ud x \ud y \end{IEEEeqnarray*} f (x)g(y) dx dy f (x)g(y) dx dy f (x)g(y) dx dy A See the electronic document testmath. The size of a \quad corresponds to the width of the character ‘M’ of the current font. The \newcommand is placed in the preamble. \newcommand{\ud}{\. for 18 quad ( ). \: for 4 5 18 quad ( ) and \.\mathrm{d}x \end{equation*} 2 2 ln xdx 1 1 ln x dx Note that ‘d’ in the differential is conventionally set in roman. for 18 quad ( ). You can correct it using \!. \iiint.7 Spacing in Math Mode A If the spacing within formulae chosen by L TEX is not satisfactory.

7. In math mode. Using the \phantom command you can reserve space for characters that do not show up in the final output.y)^2 \right]^{1/2}}} \end{equation*} n (xi − x)(yi − y) P = i=1 n n 1/2 2 i=1 2 (xi − x) i=1 (yi − y) Changing styles generally affects the way big operators and limits are displayed. the mhchem package is very useful for typesetting isotopes and chemical formulae too.1 Phantoms A When vertically aligning text using ^ and _ L TEX is sometimes just a little too helpful. $\Re \qquad \mathcal{R} \qquad \mathfrak{R} \qquad \mathbb{R} \qquad $ R R R The last two require amssymb or amsfonts. \textstyle (123).8 Fiddling with the Math Fonts Different math fonts are listed on Table 3.y)}} {\displaystyle{\left[ \sum_{i=1}^n(x_i-x)^2 \sum_{i=1}^n(y_i. . it’ll be typeset in text style unless you tell EX otherwise: \begin{equation*} P = \frac{\displaystyle{ \sum_{i=1}^n (x_i. A LT If is placed in a fraction. The easiest way to understand this is to look at an example: \begin{equation*} {}^{14}_{6}\text{C} \qquad \text{versus} \qquad {}^{14}_{\phantom{1}6}\text{C} \end{equation*} 14 6 C versus 14 6C If you want to typeset a lot of isotopes as in the example. 3. \scriptstyle (123) and \scriptscriptstyle (123).70 Typesetting Mathematical Formulae 3.14 on page 79.x) (y_i. A Sometimes you need to tell L TEX the correct font size. this is set with the following four commands: \displaystyle (123).

\mathbf{M}$ \qquad \boldmath{$\mu. which will be printed in the final document. Use the counter argument to specify the name of a previously declared “theorem”. After executing the \newtheorem command in the preamble of your document. \newtheorem{name}[counter]{text}[section] The name argument is a short keyword used to identify the “theorem”.9 Theorems. M µ. but these are roman (upright) whereas mathematical symbols are normally italic. this is probably intentional as amateur typesetters tend to overuse them. The section argument allows you to specify the sectional unit within which the “theorem” should get its numbers. Lemmas. There is a \boldmath command.1 Bold Symbols A It is quite difficult to get bold symbols in L TEX. M 3. M \qquad \mathbf{\mu}. M$} µ. . “Axioms” and similar structures. With the text argument you define the actual name of the “theorem”. The new “theorem” will then be numbered in the same sequence. M The package amsbsy (included by amsmath) as well as the package bm from the tools bundle make this much easier as they include a \boldsymbol command: $\mu. . . “Definitions”. 71 3.8. .3. though: $\mu. . They are both used to specify the numbering used on the “theorem”. you can use the following command within the document.9 Theorems. The arguments in square brackets are optional. . M \qquad \boldsymbol{\mu}. \boldsymbol{M}$ µ. M µ. Lemmas. M µ. It works for symbols too. \begin{name}[text] This is my interesting theorem \end{name} A The amsthm package (part of AMS-L TEX) provides the \theoremstyle{style} command which lets you define what the theorem is all about by picking . The font change command \mathbf gives bold letters. and furthermore it doesn’t work on lower case Greek letters. you probably need a way to typeset “Lemmas”. When writing mathematical documents. but this can only be used outside math mode.

plain (fat title. then someone will do it.72 Typesetting Mathematical Formulae from three predefined styles: definition (fat title. 3. the ntheorem package offers a plethora of options.9. No\end{marg} Law 1. If you want to customize your theorems down to the last dot. Margaret. Trivial. No The “Jury” theorem uses the same counter as the “Law” theorem.9. use E = mc2 . No. and make it clear that the \newtheorem environment is way too complex to understand. then someone will do it. use \begin{equation*} E=mc^2.\end{jury} \begin{marg}No. It could be you! So beware and see law 1.1 Proofs and End-of-Proof Symbol The amsthm package also provides the proof environment. You could also use another unit. Don’t hide in the witness box Jury 2 (The Twelve). roman body). The “Murphy” theorem gets a number that is linked to the number of the current section. The following examples should remove any remaining doubt. and one of those ways can result in a catastrophe. The argument in square brackets is used to specify a title or something similar for the theorem. \begin{proof} Trivial. so it gets a number that is in sequence with the other “Laws”. roman body). This should be enough theory. italic body) or remark (italic title. No.1. . for example chapter or subsection. No. \newtheorem{mur}{Murphy}[section] \begin{mur} If there are two or more ways to do something. \end{equation*} \end{proof} Proof. and one of those ways can result in a catastrophe. First define the theorems: \theoremstyle{definition} \newtheorem{law}{Law} \theoremstyle{plain} \newtheorem{jury}[law]{Jury} \theoremstyle{remark} \newtheorem*{marg}{Margaret} \begin{law} \label{law:box} Don’t hide in the witness box \end{law} \begin{jury}[The Twelve] It could be you! So beware and see law~\ref{law:box}.\end{mur} Murphy 3. If there are two or more ways to do something.

Comparing . we add an empty column x. use E = mc2 . This is a proof that ends with an equation array: a=b+c = d + e. . Lemmas. \qedhere \end{equation*} \end{proof} 73 Proof. Define the stretching explicitly! \begin{proof} This is a proof that ends with an equation array: \begin{IEEEeqnarray*}{+rCl+x*} a & = & b + c \\ & = & d + e.9 Theorems. use \begin{equation*} E=mc^2. Unfortunately. Note that the + in {+rCl+x*} denotes stretchable spaces. This column will only be needed on the last line if the \qedhere command is put there. The reason for this is the internal structure of IEEEeqnarray: it always puts two invisible columns at both sides of the array that only contain a stretchable space. . one on the left of the equations (which. Trivial. . will be done automatically by IEEEeqnarray!) and one on the right of the equations. With the command \qedhere you can move the ‘end of proof’ symbol around for situations where it would end up alone on a line. & \qedhere \end{IEEEeqnarray*} \end{proof} Proof. This is a proof that ends with an equation array: a=b+c = d + e. By this IEEEeqnarray ensures that the equation array is horizontally centered. \begin{proof} Trivial. There is a very simple remedy. if not specified. The \qedhere command should actually be put outside this stretchable space. we specify a *. this correction does not work for IEEEeqnarray: \begin{proof} This is a proof that ends with an equation array: \begin{IEEEeqnarray*}{rCl} a & = & b + c \\ & = & d + e. Finally. but this does not happen as these columns are invisible to the user. after the stretching column. This is a null-space that prevents IEEEeqnarray from adding another unwanted +-space! In the case of equation numbering. But now on the right. there is a similar problem. \qedhere \end{IEEEeqnarray*} \end{proof} Proof.3.

\end{equation} \end{proof} Typesetting Mathematical Formulae Proof. This is a proof that ends with an equation array: a=b+c = d + e.43) you notice that in the (correct) second version the P is much closer to the equation than in the first version. Similarly. (3.74 \begin{proof} This is a proof that ends with a numbered equation: \begin{equation} a = b + c.46) (3. (3. \qedhere \end{equation} \end{proof} Proof. the correct way of putting the QED-symbol at the end of an equation array is as follows: \begin{proof} This is a proof that ends with an equation array: \begin{IEEEeqnarray}{+rCl+x*} a & = & b + c \\ & = & d + e.45) which contrasts with \begin{proof} This is a proof that ends with an equation array: \begin{IEEEeqnarray}{rCl} a & = & b + c \\ & = & d + e.42) with \begin{proof} This is a proof that ends with a numbered equation: \begin{equation} a = b + c. \\ &&& \qedhere\nonumber \end{IEEEeqnarray} \end{proof} Proof. This is a proof that ends with a numbered equation: a = b + c.47) . (3. (3. This is a proof that ends with an equation array: a=b+c = d + e. This is a proof that ends with a numbered equation: a = b + c.44) (3. \end{IEEEeqnarray} \end{proof} Proof.

10 List of Mathematical Symbols The following tables demonstrate all the symbols normally accessible from math mode. 12 .3. An even more comprehensive list of symbols can be found at CTAN:info/symbols/comprehensive.1: Math Mode Accents. Table 3. because they look the same as normal roman letters: A. B. α β γ δ ε ζ η Γ ∆ Θ \alpha \beta \gamma \delta \epsilon \varepsilon \zeta \eta \Gamma \Delta \Theta θ ϑ ι κ λ µ ν ξ Λ Ξ Π \theta \vartheta \iota \kappa \lambda \mu \nu \xi \Lambda \Xi \Pi o π ρ σ ς τ Σ Υ Φ o \pi \varpi \rho \varrho \sigma \varsigma \tau \Sigma \Upsilon \Phi υ φ ϕ χ ψ ω \upsilon \phi \varphi \chi \psi \omega Ψ Ω \Psi \Omega The tables were derived from symbols. There is no uppercase of some of the letters like \Alpha. Note that some tables show symbols only accessible after loading the amssymb package in the preamble of your document12 . If the AMS package and fonts are not installed on your system. have a look at CTAN:macros/ latex/required/amslatex.2: Greek Letters.tex by David Carlisle and subsequently changed extensively as suggested by Josef Tkadlec.10 List of Mathematical Symbols 75 3. a ˆ a ` a ¯ ´ a ˚ a \hat{a} \grave{a} \bar{a} \acute{a} \mathring{a} a ˇ a ˙ a a ˘ \check{a} \dot{a} \vec{a} \breve{a} a ˜ a ¨ AAA AAA \tilde{a} \ddot{a} \widehat{AAA} \widetilde{AAA} Table 3. . \Beta and so on. .

\land \ominus \oslash \bigcirc \bigtriangledown \rhd a \unrhd a ∗ ◦ • £ ¤ † ‡ \triangleleft \triangleright \star \ast \circ \bullet \diamond \uplus \amalg \dagger \ddagger \wr .3: Binary Relations. = ∼ ≈ ∼ = I ∝ |= ⊥ = = \equiv \doteq \sim \simeq \approx \cong \Join a \bowtie \propto \models \perp \asymp \neq or \ne Use the latexsym package to access this symbol Table 3. < ≤ < \leq or \le \ll \prec \preceq \subset \subseteq \sqsubset a \sqsubseteq \in \vdash \mid \smile : a > ≥ ⊂ ⊆ ⊃ ⊇ ∈ | : ∈ / > \geq or \ge \gg \succ \succeq \supset \supseteq \sqsupset a \sqsupseteq \ni .4: Binary Operators. You can negate the following symbols by prefixing them with a \not command. \owns \dashv \parallel \frown \notin = ≡ . + ± · × ∪ ∨ ⊕ ⊗ ¡ ¢ + \pm \cdot \times \cup \sqcup \vee .76 Typesetting Mathematical Formulae Table 3. \lor \oplus \odot \otimes \bigtriangleup \lhd a \unlhd a − ÷ \ ∩ ∧ \mp \div \setminus \cap \sqcap \wedge .

5: BIG Operators. \sum \prod \coprod \int \bigoplus \bigcup \bigcap \bigsqcup \oint \bigotimes \bigvee \bigwedge \biguplus \bigodot Table 3.7: Arrows as Accents.10 List of Mathematical Symbols 77 Table 3. − − → AB ← − − AB ← → AB \overrightarrow{AB} \overleftarrow{AB} \overleftrightarrow{AB} AB − − → AB ← − − AB ← → \underrightarrow{AB} \underleftarrow{AB} \underleftrightarrow{AB} .3.6: Arrows. ← → ↔ ⇐ ⇒ ⇔ → ← \leftarrow or \gets \rightarrow or \to \leftrightarrow \Leftarrow \Rightarrow \Leftrightarrow \mapsto \hookleftarrow \leftharpoonup \leftharpoondown \rightleftharpoons \uparrow \updownarrow \Downarrow \nearrow \swarrow \leadsto a a ←− −→ ←→ ⇐= =⇒ ⇐⇒ −→ → ↑ ⇓ ⇐⇒ ↓ ⇑ \longleftarrow \longrightarrow \longleftrightarrow \Longleftarrow \Longrightarrow \Longleftrightarrow \longmapsto \hookrightarrow \rightharpoonup \rightharpoondown \iff (bigger spaces) \downarrow \Uparrow \Updownarrow \searrow \nwarrow Y Use the latexsym package to access this symbol Table 3.

.10: Miscellaneous Symbols. ℘ ∂ ∞ Q √ ♠ \ddots \ell \wp \partial \infty \Diamond a \surd \spadesuit \sharp Use the latexsym package to access this symbol Table 3. .8: Delimiters. These symbols can also be used in text mode. ...  ℵ ∅ P ∠ ♣ \vdots \jmath \aleph \mho a \emptyset \Box a \angle \clubsuit \natural . . ( [ { | / ( [ or \lbrack \{ or \lbrace \langle | or \vert / \lfloor \rceil ) ] } ) ] or \rbrack \} or \rbrace \rangle \| or \Vert \backslash \rfloor \lceil ↑ ↓ ⇑ ⇓ \uparrow \downarrow \updownarrow \Uparrow \Downarrow \Updownarrow \ Table 3. † ‡ \dag \ddag § ¶ \S \P © £ \copyright \pounds ® % \textregistered \% .9: Large Delimiters.       \lgroup \arrowvert \rmoustache   \rgroup \Arrowvert       \lmoustache \bracevert Table 3.11: Non-Mathematical Symbols.78 Typesetting Mathematical Formulae Table 3.. \dots \hbar \Re \forall ’ \nabla \bot \diamondsuit \neg or \lnot a ··· ı ∃ ∀ ⊥ ♦ ¬ ♥ \cdots \imath \Im \exists \prime \triangle \top \heartsuit \flat .

4 on 125 for other math fonts. \ulcorner \lvert \urcorner \rvert \llcorner \lVert \lrcorner \rVert | | Table 3.10 List of Mathematical Symbols 79 Table 3.3. \digamma κ \varkappa \beth \gimel \daleth Table 3.14: Math Alphabets. See Table 6.12: AMS Delimiters. \dotplus \ltimes \doublecup \veebar \boxplus \boxtimes \intercal \curlyvee \centerdot \rtimes \doublecap \barwedge \boxminus \boxdot \circledast \curlywedge \divideontimes \smallsetminus \doublebarwedge \circleddash \circledcirc \rightthreetimes \leftthreetimes .13: AMS Greek and Hebrew. Example ABCDEabcde1234 ABCDEabcde1234 ABCDEabcde ABCDE A BC DE ABCDEabcde1234 ABCDE Command \mathrm{ABCDE abcde 1234} \mathit{ABCDE abcde 1234} \mathnormal{ABCDE abcde 1234} \mathcal{ABCDE abcde 1234} \mathscr{ABCDE abcde 1234} \mathfrak{ABCDE abcde 1234} \mathbb{ABCDE abcde 1234} Required package mathrsfs amsfonts or amssymb amsfonts or amssymb Table 3.15: AMS Binary Operators.

16: AMS Binary Relations. \lessdot \leqslant \eqslantless \leqq \lll or \llless \lesssim \lessapprox \lessgtr \lesseqgtr \lesseqqgtr \preccurlyeq \curlyeqprec \precsim \precapprox \subseteqq \shortparallel \blacktriangleleft \vartriangleright \blacktriangleright \trianglerighteq \vartriangleleft \trianglelefteq \gtrdot \geqslant \eqslantgtr \geqq \ggg \gtrsim \gtrapprox \gtrless \gtreqless \gtreqqless \succcurlyeq \curlyeqsucc \succsim \succapprox \supseteqq \Supset \sqsupset \because \Subset \smallfrown \shortmid \therefore \doteqdot \risingdotseq \fallingdotseq \eqcirc \circeq \triangleq \bumpeq \Bumpeq \thicksim \thickapprox \approxeq \backsim \backsimeq \vDash \Vdash \Vvdash \backepsilon \varpropto \between \pitchfork \smallsmile \sqsubset ∼ ≈ ∝ ∴ .80 Typesetting Mathematical Formulae Table 3.

10 List of Mathematical Symbols 81 Table 3.17: AMS Arrows. \dashleftarrow \leftleftarrows \leftrightarrows \Lleftarrow \twoheadleftarrow \leftarrowtail \leftrightharpoons \Lsh \looparrowleft \curvearrowleft \circlearrowleft \multimap \downdownarrows \upharpoonright \rightsquigarrow \dashrightarrow \rightrightarrows \rightleftarrows \Rrightarrow \twoheadrightarrow \rightarrowtail \rightleftharpoons \Rsh \looparrowright \curvearrowright \circlearrowright \upuparrows \upharpoonleft \downharpoonright \leftrightsquigarrow .3.

18: AMS Negated Binary Relations and Arrows.82 Typesetting Mathematical Formulae Table 3. \hbar \square \vartriangle \triangledown \lozenge \angle \diagup \nexists \eth \hslash \blacksquare \blacktriangle \blacktriangledown \blacklozenge \measuredangle \diagdown \Finv \sphericalangle k \Bbbk \circledS \complement \Game \bigstar \backprime \varnothing \mho ♦ ∠ ∅ ð .19: AMS Miscellaneous. \nless \lneq \nleq \nleqslant \lneqq \lvertneqq \nleqq \lnsim \lnapprox \nprec \npreceq \precneqq \precnsim \precnapprox \subsetneq \varsubsetneq \nsubseteq \subsetneqq \nleftarrow \nLeftarrow \ngtr \gneq \ngeq \ngeqslant \gneqq \gvertneqq \ngeqq \gnsim \gnapprox \nsucc \nsucceq \succneqq \succnsim \succnapprox \supsetneq \varsupsetneq \nsupseteq \supsetneqq \nrightarrow \nRightarrow \varsubsetneqq \varsupsetneqq \nsubseteqq \nsupseteqq \nmid \nparallel \nshortmid \nshortparallel \nsim \ncong \nvdash \nvDash \nVdash \nVDash \ntriangleleft \ntriangleright \ntrianglelefteq \ntrianglerighteq \nleftrightarrow \nLeftrightarrow Table 3.

A much more complete description of specialities and enhancements possible with A A A LTEX can be found in the L TEX Manual [1] and The L TEX Companion [3]. Gimp.Chapter 4 Specialities A When putting together a large document. A There are several ways to generate the actual graphics with basic L TEX A or a L TEX extension package. A good set of commands for inclusion of graphics is provided in the graphicx package by D.1 Including Encapsulated PostScript A L TEX provides the basic facilities to work with floating bodies. . but this introduction will only discuss the use of Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) graphics. L TEX packages offer many ways to do this. A much easier way to get graphics into a document is to generate them with a specialised software package1 and then include the finished graphics A in the document. 3 CTAN://macros/latex/required/graphics 2 1 . 4. with the figure and table environments. Here again. because it is quite easy to do and widely used. you must have a PostScript printer2 available for output. such as images or graphics. Gnuplot.3 When working on a system with a PostScript printer available for output and with the graphicx package installed. P. Another possibility to output PostScript is the GhostScript program available from CTAN://support/ghostscript. bibliography management. Windows and OS/2 users might want to look for GSview. In order to use pictures in the EPS format. and other things. Carlisle. A A Please refer to The L TEX Companion [3] and the L TEX Manual [1] for more information on that subject. LTEX will help with some special features like index generation. . Xara X . a few of them are described in chapter 5. It is part of a whole family of packages called the “graphics” bundle. use the following step by Such as XFig.

Knowing the name of the driver.eps file. Export the picture from your graphics program in EPS format. Load the graphicx package in the preamble of the input file with \usepackage[driver]{graphicx} where driver is the name of your “dvi to PostScript” converter program. . The most widely used program is called dvips. Note that an EPS must not contain more than one page. The optional parameter accepts a comma separated list of keys and associated values. so that the printer understands it and can correctly include the . . for example) and then print to a file with this driver. you can try to install a PostScript printer driver (such as an Apple LaserWriter.1: Key Names for graphicx Package. because there is no standard on how graphics are included in TEX.1 lists the most important keys.4 2.84 step guide to include a picture into your document: Specialities 1. With some luck this file will be in EPS format. Table 4. Table 4. . The name of the driver is required. The keys can be used to alter the width. Some printer drivers can be explicitly configured to produce EPS format. 3. Use the command \includegraphics[key=value.dvi file. the graphicx package can choose the correct method to insert information about the graphics into the . . width height angle scale scale graphic to the specified width scale graphic to the specified height rotate graphic counterclockwise scale graphic 4 If your software cannot export into EPS format. height and rotation of the included graphic. ]{file} to include file into your document.

make sure to read [9] and [13].2 Bibliography The following example code may help to clarify things: \begin{figure} \centering \includegraphics[angle=90. . \cite{marker} If you do not use the label option. TUGboat Volume 9.0. . The width and height parameters can also be specified in absolute dimensions. The graphic is first rotated by an angle of 90 degrees and then scaled to the final width of 0.5 times the width of a standard paragraph. TUGboat Volume~9. The parameter after the \begin{thebibliography} command defines how much space to reserve for the number of labels. Issue~1 (1988) \end{thebibliography} Bibliography [1] H. the entries will get enumerated automatically. Refer to Table 6.2 Bibliography Produce a bibliography with the thebibliography environment. article or paper within the document. width=0.eps. The aspect ratio is 1.5\textwidth]{test} \caption{This is a test. If you want to know more about this topic.4.5 on page 130 for more information.~Partl: \emph{German \TeX}. Partl: German TEX. In the example A below. because no special height is specified. Partl~\cite{pa} has proposed that \ldots \begin{thebibliography}{99} \bibitem{pa} H. Issue 1 (1988) . Each entry starts with \bibitem[label]{marker} The marker is then used to cite the book. Partl [1] has proposed that . {99} tells L TEX to expect that none of the bibliography item numbers will be wider than the number 99.} \end{figure} It includes the graphic stored in the file test. 85 4.

introduction will only explain the basic index generation commands. 4.idx).86 Specialities For larger projects. This support program makeindex. If now the L TEX input file is On systems not necessarily supporting filenames longer than 8 characters. The formatted_entry is optional. A To enable their indexing feature of L TEX. Table 4. A When the input file is processed with L TEX. together with the current page number. where formatted_entry will appear in the index and key will be used for sorting. With L TEX and the 5 an index can be generated quite easily. the program may be called makeidx.3 Indexing A A very useful feature of many books is their index. please refer to The L TEX Companion [3]. 5 . The content of the index is specified with \index{key@formatted_entry} commands. but this time with the extension . You enter the index commands at the points in the text that you want the final index entries to point to. If it is missing the key will be used. It allows you to maintain a bibliographic database and then extract the references relevant to things you cited in your paper. A to a special file. each \index command writes an appropriate index entry. but a different extension (. For a A more in-depth view.2 explains the syntax with several examples. BibTEX is included with most TEX distributions. The visual presentation of BibTEX-generated bibliographies is based on a style-sheets concept that allows you to create bibliographies following a wide range of established designs.idx file can then be processed with the makeindex program: makeindex filename The makeindex program generates a sorted index with the same base file A name. The file has the same name as the L TEX input file. you might want to check out the BibTEX program. the makeidx package must be loaded in the preamble with \usepackage{makeidx} and the special indexing commands must be enabled by putting the \makeindex command in the preamble.ind. This .

3 Sam. My Word \index{Word}. 2 Lin. In the header and footer definition.6 written by Piet van Oostrum. As opposed to Word\index{Word}. Note the position of the full stop. This is quite useful for proofreading a document and verifying the index. L TEX accomplishes this with a two-stage approach.4. Look at the top of this page. As opposed to Word. Note the position of the full stop.2: Index Key Syntax Examples.4 Fancy Headers 87 Table 4. for an application of this package. makeindex has no clue about characters outside the ASCII range. Note that the \index command can affect your layout if not used carefully. My Word . 7 Käse. Example \index{hello} \index{hello!Peter} \index{Sam@\textsl{Sam}} \index{Lin@\textbf{Lin}} \index{Kaese@K\"ase} \index{ecole@\’ecole} \index{Jenny|textbf} \index{Joe|textit} Index Entry hello. provides a few simple commands that allow you to customize the header and footer lines of your document. this sorted index gets included into the document at the A point where L TEX finds \printindex A The showidx package that comes with L TEX 2ε prints out all index entries in the left margin of the text. 3 Joe. 1 Peter. The tricky problem when customising headers and footers is to get things A like running section and chapter names in there. you use the commands \rightmark and \leftmark to represent the current section 6 Available from CTAN://macros/latex/contrib/supported/fancyhdr. 5 Comment Plain entry Subentry under ‘hello’ Formatted entry Formatted entry Formatted entry Formatted entry Formatted page number Formatted page number processed again. 33 école. use the @ character as shown in the Käse and école examples above.4 Fancy Headers The fancyhdr package. . 4 Jenny. To get the sorting correct. 4.

5pt} \renewcommand{\footrulewidth}{0pt} \addtolength{\headheight}{0.5pt} % space for the rule \fancypagestyle{plain}{% \fancyhead{} % get rid of headers on plain pages \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{0pt} % and the line } Figure 4.1: Example fancyhdr Setup. .RO]{\bfseries\thepage} \fancyhead[LO]{\bfseries\rightmark} \fancyhead[RE]{\bfseries\leftmark} \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{0.88 Specialities \documentclass{book} \usepackage{fancyhdr} \pagestyle{fancy} % with this we ensure that the chapter and section % headings are in lowercase. \renewcommand{\chaptermark}[1]{% \markboth{#1}{}} \renewcommand{\sectionmark}[1]{% \markright{\thesection\ #1}} \fancyhf{} % delete current header and footer \fancyhead[LE.

I suggest you fetch the documentation for the package at the address mentioned in the footnote. They call yet another command (\chaptermark. hyphenat. you should find it pre-installed on most systems. you are going to learn about the verbatim package.org/). There will often be a readme. In any event.6 Installing Extra Packages A Most L TEX installations come with a large set of pre-installed style packages. or \subsectionmark) that is responsible for redefining \rightmark and \leftmark.dtx. 4. 89 4. In any case. If you want to know more about this package. As the verbatim package is part of the ‘tools’ bundle. \sectionmark. make sure to read [10].4. respectively.5 The Verbatim Package and chapter heading. This by itself is not spectacular. The verbatim package is basically a re-implementation of the verbatim environment that works around some of the limitations of the original verbatim environment. you need only “renew” the \chaptermark command. The values of these two commands are overwritten whenever a chapter or section command is processed. Packages such as geometry.txt with a brief description of the package. which allows you to include raw ASCII text into your document as if it were inside a verbatim environment. but many more are available on the net. you got to know the verbatim environment. The main place to look for style packages on the Internet is CTAN (http://www. but the implementation of the verbatim package added new functionality. which is why I am mentioning the package here. For ultimate flexibility. In this section. the \chapter command and its friends do not redefine \rightmark and \leftmark themselves. The verbatim package provides the \verbatiminput{filename} command. you still have to process them in a way that (a) tells your TEX distribution .ctan. once you have copied the package files onto your machine. You should of course read this file first. Figure 4.1 shows a possible setup for the fancyhdr package that makes the headers look about the same as they look in this booklet. and many others are typically made up of two files: a file with the extension .5 The Verbatim Package Earlier in this book. If you want to change the look of the chapter name in the header line.ins and another with the extension .

dtx file: A 1.dtx one last time before moving on to step 5.pdf file to increase your reading pleasure.ist -o name.dvi file. Refresh your distribution’s file-name database. Now extract the documentation from the .Flipo@univ-lille1. the index and all the other similar structures become collections of hyperlinks. Note that you A may have to run L TEX several times before it gets the cross-references right. Move the . Usually this is in your . In order to generate the index. 3. Run L TEX on the . If you do not see this file. A 4. some words in the document are marked as hyperlinks.dtx file. MiKTEX – initexmf --update-fndb or use the GUI. 5.ins file. Run the following command between step 4 and 5: makeindex -s gglo. If you click on such a hyperlink you get transported to the destination of the link.90 Specialities about the new style package and (b) gives you the documentation.dtx file once again.sty file.. This will generate a . Sometimes you will see that a .ps or . Last but not least. type the following: makeindex -s gind. 3. Much as in a web page. 2. Check to see if L TEX has produced a . the table of contents. . The command deA pends on the L TEXdistribution you use: TEXlive – texhash.ist name (where name stands for the main-file name without any extension).. Run L TEX on the .glo A Be sure to run L TEX on the .7 A Working with pdf LTEX By Daniel Flipo <Daniel. This will extract a . A 2. Run L TEX on the .sty file to a place where your distribution can find it.glo (glossary) file has been produced. this means that all occurrences of \ref and \pageref become hyperlinks. Additionally.idx file among the various files you now have.fr> PDF is a portable hypertext document format. 4./localtexmf /tex/latex subdirectory (Windows or OS/2 users should feel free to change the direction of the slashes). web2c – maktexlsr. They link to other places in the document or even to other documents. In the context A of L TEX. Here’s how you do the first part: A 1. make a . then you may proceed to step 5.gls name.

Most modern browsers come with plugins that allow the direct display of PDF documents. While there is a standard for it. it is sufficient to replace the command A latex file. Including mathematical formulae into HTML documents is not generally supported. But all of them cut corners left and right to get the job done. you may find a special button in the TEX GUI.7. Set the paper size with an optional documentclass argument such as A a4paper or letterpaper. If you use the hyperref package (see page 93). such as teTEX. Even though there are DVI and PS viewers for almost every platform.tex. A Both pdfTEX and pdfL TEX are installed automatically by most modern TEX distributions. but on top of this pdfTEX also needs to know the physical size of the paper to determine the physical size of the pages in the pdf file. On systems where L TEX is not called from the command line. but the results vary widely between platforms and browsers. This format has two significant disadvantages when writing scientific documents: 1. which preserves the layout of the document and permits hypertext navigation.1 PDF Documents for the Web A The creation of a PDF file from L TEX source is very simple. fpTEX. To produce a PDF instead of DVI. Some were even quite successful in the sense that they are able A to produce legible web pages from a standard L TEX input file. 4. Otherwise you have 7 http://pdfreaders. The results are miles removed from A the quality we have come to expect in the L TEX world. pdfTEX produces PDF ê A output where normal TEX produces DVI. As soon as you start A using more complex L TEX features and external packages things tend to fall apart.org . There is also a pdfL TEX. Authors wishing to preserve the unique typographic quality of their documents even when publishing on the web turn to PDF (Portable Document Format).tex by pdflatex file. most browsers used today do not support it. which A produces PDF output from L TEX sources. or lack the required fonts. TEXLive and CMacTEX. This works in pdfL TEX too. the papersize will be adjusted automatically.7 Working with pdf L TEX 91 Most web pages you find today are written in HTML (HyperText Markup Language).A 4. So providing PDF versions of your documents will make them much more accessible to your potential readers. thanks to the pdfTEX program developed by Hàn Th´ Thành. A There have been many attempts to create translators from L TEX to HTML. 2. Printing HTML documents is possible. MikTEX. you will find that Acrobat Reader and Xpdf for viewing PDF documents are more widely deployed7 .

92 Specialities to do this manually by putting the following lines into the preamble of the document: \pdfpagewidth=\paperwidth \pdfpageheight=\paperheight The following section will go into more detail regarding the differences A A between normal L TEX and pdfL TEX. PostScript A type 1. Helvetica and Courier (the primary candidates for such a replacement job) have not been designed to work in harmony in a single document. If you have a recent TEX installation.ru/pub/tex/font-packs/c1fonts. Another solution is to switch to other PostScript type 1 fonts. all available on CTAN. 4. If you are working with a stripped down setup. . TrueType. which are very space-efficient. Because these fonts have different character sizes. C1 fonts are missing other Cyrillic glyphs. If it works for you. . The Type 1 font set most widely used today is called Latin Modern (LM). the bitmap PK fonts produce very ugly results when the document is displayed with Acrobat Reader. available at ftp://ftp. and the manual configuration of hyperlinks. you may have to add the lm fonts explicitly. . The main differences concern three areas: the fonts to use. just skip this whole section. It is best to use PostScript Type 1 fonts exclusively to produce documents that display well. For the Russian language you may want to use C1 virtual fonts. Also. These fonts combine the standard CM type 1 fonts from Bluesky collection and CMCYR type 1 fonts from the Paradissa and BaKoMa collection. Actually. the text layout on your pages will change. all you need todo is to add \usepackage{lmodern} \usepackage[T1]{fontenc} \usepackage{textcomp} to the preamble of your document and you are all set for creating excellent PDF output with full support for the full Latin character set. Because Paradissa fonts contain only Russian letters. Best is to try. ) but the normal L TEX font format. the overall visual coherence of your document will suffer because Times. the format of images to include.vsu. Modern TeX installations will be setup so that this happens automatically. some of them are even included with every copy of Acrobat Reader.7. Generally these other fonts will use more space than the CM fonts. chances are that you already have a copy of them installed.2 The Fonts A pdfL TEX can deal with all sorts of fonts (PK bitmaps.

7. which can be found in most TEX distributions. as the resulting PDF document may not display the pages with the missing characters at all. The bad news is that graphics in Encapsulated A PostScript format do not work with pdfL TEX. It may even be desirable not to draw certain geometric figures. For bitmaps (photos. which is based on Palatino as its main text body font. depending on the setting of the driver option. For pdftex this is formats . as using color in documents displayed on the web comes quite naturally. which is based on Times. graphicx will go looking for a suitable file on its own. JPEG is great for photos. not found in the .7.graphicx} In the sample above I have included the color package. such as METAPOST.log file after compiling your input file.4 Hypertext Links The hyperref package will take care of turning all internal references of your document into hyperlinks. Make sure you identify and fix the offending parts of your document. So much for the good news. They mean that some font used in the document has not been found. scans) this is not ideal.7 Working with pdf L TEX 93 Two ready-made font sets are available for this purpose: pxfonts.eps. and comes with its own extensive manual. .A 4. 4. For vector graphics (drawings) this is a great solution.jpg and . If you don’t define a file extension in the \includegraphics command. as it is very space-efficient. To use them it is sufficient to put the following lines into the preamble of your document: \usepackage[T1]{fontenc} \usepackage{pxfonts} You may find lines like Warning: pdftex (file eurmo10): Font eur. PNG is good for screenshots and other images with few colours.. because the PDF format natively supports the inclusion of PNG and JPEG images. . 4. For this to work properly some magic is necessary.pdf. and the txfonts package.mps (METAPOST)—but not .3 Using Graphics Including graphics into a document works best with the graphicx package (see page 83): \usepackage{xcolor.. .png. but rather describe the figure with a specialized command language. The simple way out of this problem is to just convert your EPS files into PDF format using the epstopdf utility found on many systems.

The colour of these links can be configured using the following options (default colours are shown): linkcolor (=red) colour of internal links (sections.false ) show or hide Acrobat’s toolbar pdfmenubar (=true.false ) show or hide Acrobat’s menu pdffitwindow (=false. which then gets put into the PS file by dvips and is finally picked up by the pdf convertor when turning the PS file into PDF. pages. the others are optional and allow you to change the default behaviour of hyperref.true ) adjust the initial magnification of the pdf when displayed pdftitle (={text}) define the title that gets displayed in the Document Info window of Acrobat pdfauthor (={text}) the name of the PDF’s author pdfnewwindow (=false. bookmarks (=true. The only required option is pdftex. . web) 8 It is worth noting that the hyperref package is not limited to work with pdfTEX.) citecolor (=green) colour of citation links (bibliography) filecolor (=magenta) colour of file links urlcolor (=cyan) colour of URL links (mail.94 Specialities so you have to put \usepackage[pdftex]{hyperref} as the last command into the preamble of your document.8 In the following list the default values are written in an upright font.true ) surround the links by colour frames (false) or colour the text of the links (true).true ) allows the use of characters of non-latin based languages in Acrobat’s bookmarks pdftoolbar (=true. It can also be configured to embed PDF-specific information into the DVI output of normal A L TEX.true ) define whether a new window should be opened when a link leads out of the current document colorlinks (=false. Many options are available to customize the behaviour of the hyperref package: • either as a comma separated list after the pdftex option \usepackage[pdftex]{hyperref} • or on individual lines with the command \hypersetup{options}. etc.false ) show or hide the bookmarks bar when displaying the document unicode (=false.

% pdftex} When you just want to provide information for the Document Info section of the PDF file: \usepackage[pdfauthor={Pierre Desproges}.% pdftex]{hyperref} In addition to the automatic hyperlinks for cross references. use \usepackage[pdftex]{hyperref} To have the bookmark list open and links in colour (the =true values are optional): \usepackage[pdftex.% citecolor=black. Use colour frames.ctan. a click on the word “CTAN” will take you to the CTAN website. use the \href command without the ’http://’ bit: The complete document is \href{manual.bookmarks.A 4. it is possible to embed explicit links using \href{url}{text} The code The \href{http://www. making it difficult to read. coloured links are not a good thing as they end up in gray in the final output.colorlinks]{hyperref} When creating PDFs destined for printing.org}{CTAN} website.pdf}{here} .% pdftitle={Des femmes qui tombent}. which are not printed: \usepackage{hyperref} \hypersetup{colorlinks=false} or make links black: \usepackage{hyperref} \hypersetup{colorlinks.% linkcolor=black. If the destination of the link is not a URL but a local file. produces the output “CTAN”.% filecolor=black.% urlcolor=black.7 Working with pdf L TEX 95 If you are happy with the defaults.

The author of an article might want her readers to easily send email messages by using the \href command inside the \author command on the title page of the document: \author{Mary Oetiker $<$\href{mailto:mary@oetiker. but this will cause the page links in the index to stop working. Hyperref will normally notice such problems and put up a warning: Package hyperref Warning: Token not allowed in a PDFDocEncoded string: . 4. duplicate ignored appear when a counter gets reinitialized. Because bookmarks are “just text. hence the notice that “duplicate has been ignored.ch}$>$ Note that I have put the link so that my email address appears not only in the link but also on the page itself. This unfortunately only helps with the page counter.7.ch}{Mary Oetiker} would work well within Acrobat.” The counter measure consists of putting plainpages=false into the hyperref options. I did this because the link \href{mailto:mary@oetiker. (The filename is relative to the location of the current document). for example by using the command \mainmatter provided by the book document class.6 Problems with Bookmarks The text displayed by bookmarks does not always look like you expect it to look. An even more radical solution is to use the option hypertexnames=false. It resets the page number counter to 1 prior to the first chapter of the book.7. but once the page is printed the email address would not be visible anymore.5 Problems with Links Messages like the following: ! pdfTeX warning (ext4): destination with the same identifier (name{page.ch}% {mary@oetiker. A click on the word “here” will open the file manual.96 Specialities which produces the text “The complete document is here”.” fewer characters are available for A bookmarks than for normal L TEX text. But as the preface of the book also has a page number 1 all links to “page 1” would not be unique anymore.1}) has been already used. 4.pdf.

4. If you write your document in Unicode and use the unicode option for the hyperref package to use Unicode characters in bookmarks. . we want the PostScript version to be black and white due to the printing costs but we want the PDF version for online viewing to be colourful. % tune hyperref colorlinks. if not then you’re probably using MiKTEX which will install it for you automatically the first time you try to use it. and pdfL TEX will try to include a file with the extension . simply add the package ifpdf 9 to your preamble. All you have to do is create appropriate versions of A A the graphics files. L TEX will look for . The simple solution is to systematically drop the file extension from \includegraphics commands. this will give you a much larger selection of characters to pick from when when using \texorpdfstring.7 A A Source Compatibility Between L TEX and pdf L TEX A A Ideally your document would compile equally well with L TEX and pdfL TEX.12pt]{book} \usepackage[latin1]{inputenc} \usepackage[T1]{fontenc} \usepackage{lmodern} \usepackage[bookmarks.mps (in that order).ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=ifpdf.7.pdf. Chances are that you already have it installed. \RequirePackage{ifpdf} % are we producing PDF ? \documentclass[a4paper. For the cases where you want to use different code for the PDF version of your document. .jpg or . In this example. This package defines the special command \ifpdf that will allow you to write conditional code easily.A 4.eps. which replaces the offending text: \texorpdfstring{TEX text}{Bookmark Text} Math expressions are a prime candidate for this kind of problem: \section{\texorpdfstring{$E=mc^2$}% {E = mc ** 2}} which turns \section{$E=mc^2$} to “E = mc ** 2” in the bookmark area.tex. The main problem in this respect is the inclusion of graphics. plainpages=false]{hyperref} \usepackage{graphicx} If you want the whole story on why to use this package then go to the TEX FAQ under the item http://www. They will then automatically look for a file of a suitable format in the current directory.png.7 Working with pdf L TEX 97 Work around this problem by providing a text string for the bookmarks. 9 .

If you have the Linux Libertine fonts installed. The effect of this is to make the \href command work in all cases. There is a Wiki at http://wiki. which saves me from wrapping every occurrence into a conditional statement. MacTEX and MiKTEX).98 \ifpdf \hypersetup{linkscolor=blue} \else \hypersetup{linkscolors=black} \fi \usepackage[english]{babel} . .xelatex. a font may contain Latin. This will normally detect the italic and bold versions as well. so \textit and \textbf will work as usual. They may contain proportional numerals (the “1” takes less space than the “0”) or monospaced numerals which are suitable for tables.8. XEL TEX is able to use any font known to the operating system.Kielhorn@web. you can simply say \usepackage{fontspec} \setmainfont[Ligatures=TeX]{Linux Libertine} in the preamble.. Many fonts contain at least two kinds of numerals.php that collects A information relevant to XETEX and XEL TEX. Specialities In the example above I have included the hyperref package even in the non-PDF version. Greek and Cyrillic characters and the corresponding ligatures. The main feature is the extended character set..1 The Fonts A In addition to the normal tfm based fonts.8 A Working with XEL TEX By Axel Kielhorn <A. the normal lining numerals and so called old style (or lower case) numerals. 4. which partly extend below the baseline.org/doku. Note that in recent TEX distributions (like TEXLive. the normal TEX program is actually pdfTEX and it will automatically switch between producing pdf and dvi according to the name it is called with: use the pdflatex command to get pdf output and latex for normal dvi output.de> A A Most of the things said about pdfL TEX are valid for XEL TEX as well. 4. When the font is using OpenType technology you have access to many features which required switching to a separate font or using virtual fonts in the past.

Make sure that each font is only installed once.org/. A commercial version of the font called Zapfino Extra is available. You can use every font installed on your computer./texmf-dist/ fonts/opentype.11 10 11 The behavior has changed with this version. Sometimes these ligatures are language dependent. but remember that other users may not have these fonts. Where do I get OpenType fonts? If you have TeXLive installed. ct and tz. The Zapfino font used in the fontspec manual is included in Mac OSX. . This collection does not include DejaVu. Some fonts (like the commercial Adobe Garamond Premier Pro) contain A alternative glyphs that are activated by default in XEL TEX distributed with 10 . for example a ligature used in Polish (fk) is not used in English.8 Working with XEL TEX 99 \newfontfamily\LLln[Numbers=Lining]{(font)} \newfontfamily\LLos[Numbers=OldStyle]{(font)} \newfontfamily\LLlnm[Numbers=Lining.Numbers=Monospaced]{(font)} Almost all OpenType fonts contain the standard ligatures (fl fi ffi) but there are also some rare or historical ligatures like st. To enable these ligatures use either of the following lines: \setmainfont[Ligatures=Rare]{(font)} \setmainfont[Ligatures=Historic]{(font)} \setmainfont[Ligatures=Historic.A 4. which is available at http://dejavu-fonts.. it was off by default in earlier releases. To disable this feature you have to define the font with disabled contextuals: \setmainfont[Contextuals=NoAlternate]{(font)} A To learn about fonts in XEL TEX read the fontspec manual..Numbers=Monospaced]{(font)} \newfontfamily\LLosm[Numbers=OldStyle.Ligature=Rare]{(font)} Not every font contains both sets of ligature. You may not want to use them in a technical report but they are fine for a novel. you already have some at . The result is a stylish “Q” with a descender reaching below TEXLive 2010 the following “u”. but is not available on Windows computers. otherwise interesting results may happen. consult the font documentation or just try it out. just install them in your operating system. You have to add \setmainfont[Language=Polish]{(font)} to enable the Polish ligatures.

100 Entering Unicode Characters

Specialities

The number of characters in a font has grown but the number of keys on a regular keyboard has not. So, how do I enter non-ASCII characters? If you write a large amount of text in a foreign language, you can install a keyboard for that language and print out the character positions. (Most operatings system have some sort of virtual keyboard, just make a screenshot.) If you rarely need an exotic character, you can simply pick it in the character palette. Some environments (e. g. the X Window System) offer many methods to enter non-ASCII characters. Some editors (e. g. Vim and Emacs) offer ways to enter these characters. Read the manual for the tools you are using.

4.8.2

A A Compatibility Between XEL TEX and pdfL TEX

A A There are a few things that are different between XEL TEX and pdfL TEX. A • A XEL TEX document has to be written in Unicode (UTF-8) while A pdfL TEX may use different input encodings. A • The microtype packages does not work with XEL TEX yet, support for character protrusion is already under development.

• Everything font related has to be reviewed. (Unless you want to stick to Latin Modern.)

4.9

Creating Presentations

By Daniel Flipo <Daniel.Flipo@univ-lille1.fr>

You can present the results of your scientific work on a blackboard, with transparencies, or directly from your laptop using some presentation software. A pdfL TEX combined with the beamer class allows you to create presentations in PDF, looking much like something you might be able to generate with LibreOffice or PowerPoint if you had a very good day, but much more portable because PDF readers are available on many more systems. The beamer class uses graphicx, color and hyperref with options adapted to screen presentations. A When you compile the code presented in figure 4.2 with pdfL TEX you get a PDF file with a title page and a second page showing several items that will be revealed one at a time as you step though your presentation. One of the advantages of the beamer class is that it produces a PDF file that is directly usable without first going through a PostScript stage like prosper or requiring additional post processing like presentations created with the ppower4 package.

4.9 Creating Presentations

101

\documentclass[10pt]{beamer} \mode<beamer>{% \usetheme[hideothersubsections, right,width=22mm]{Goettingen} } \title{Simple Presentation} \author[D. Flipo]{Daniel Flipo} \institute{U.S.T.L. \& GUTenberg} \titlegraphic{\includegraphics[width=20mm]{USTL}} \date{2005} \begin{document} \begin{frame}<handout:0> \titlepage \end{frame} \section{An Example} \begin{frame} \frametitle{Things to do on a Sunday Afternoon} \begin{block}{One could \ldots} \begin{itemize} \item walk the dog\dots \pause \item read a book\pause \item confuse a cat\pause \end{itemize} \end{block} and many other things \end{frame} \end{document} Figure 4.2: Sample code for the beamer class

102

Specialities With the beamer class you can produce several versions (modes) of your document from the same input file. The input file may contain special instructions for the different modes in angular brackets. The following modes are available: beamer for the presentation PDF discussed above. trans for transparencies. handout for the printed version. The default mode is beamer, change it by setting a different mode as a global option, like \documentclass[10pt,handout]{beamer} to print the handouts for example. The look of the screen presentation depends on the theme you choose. Pick one of the themes shipped with the beamer class or create your own. See the beamer class documentation in beameruserguide.pdf for more information on this. Let’s have a closer look at the code in figure 4.2. For the screen version of the presentation \mode<beamer> we have chosen the Goettingen theme to show a navigation panel integrated into the table of contents. The options allow us to choose the size of the panel (22 mm in this case) and its position (on the right side of the body text). The option hideothersubsections, shows the chapter titles, but only the subsections of the present chapter. There are no special settings for \mode<trans> and \mode<handout>. They appear in their standard layout. The commands \title{}, \author{}, \institute{}, and \titlegraphic{} set the content of the title page. The optional arguments of \title[]{} and \author[]{} let you specify a special version of the title and the author name to be displayed on the panel of the Goettingen theme. The titles and subtitles in the panel are created with normal \section{} and \subsection{} commands that you place outside the frame environment. The tiny navigation icons at the bottom of the screen also allow to navigate the document. Their presence is not dependent on the theme you choose. The contents of each slide or screen has to be placed inside a frame environment. There is an optional argument in angular brackets (< and >), it allows us to suppress a particular frame in one of the versions of the presentation. In the example the first page would not be shown in the handout version due to the <handout:0> argument. It is highly recommended to set a title for each slide apart from the title slide. This is done with the command \frametitle{}. If a subtitle is necessary use the block environment as shown in the example. Note that the sectioning commands \section{} and \subsection{} do not produce output on the slide proper.

(http://latex-beamer. In many place it is possible to use angular brackets to further customize the presentation.sourceforge.9 Creating Presentations The command \pause in the itemize environment lets you reveal the items one by one.4. In any case make sure to read through the beamer class documentation beameruserguide. For other presentation effects check out the commands \only. \alt and \temporal.net/) 103 .pdf to get a complete picture of what is in store for you. This package is being actively developed. check out their website to get the latest information. \uncover.

.

The picture environment of L TEX 2ε brings with it the \qbezier command. ellipses. This has been the state of things until a few years ago when Till Tantau of beamer fame came up with the Portable Grafics Format pgf and its companion package TikZ (tikz). a programming language is used A to generate \qbezier blocks of L TEX input files. numerous packages have been written for specific . although this may require some mathematical toil. This system lets you create high quality vector graphics with all current TEX systems including full support for pdf. in addition.Chapter 5 Producing Mathematical Graphics A Most people use LTEX for typesetting their text. you will learn about a few of them.1 Overview A Creating graphical output with L TEX has a long tradition. In this section. Many frequently used curves such as circles. And since the structure oriented A approach to authoring is so convenient. It started out with the picture environment which allows you to create graphics by cleverly placing predefined elements onto the canvas. the picture environment becomes quite powerful. LTEX also offers a. if somewhat restricted. A complete description can A A be found in the L TEX Manual [1]. A quite a number of LTEX extensions have been created in order to overcome these restrictions. The documents thus produced are “small” with respect to bytes. A Although programming pictures directly in L TEX is severely restricted. If. Furthermore. “q” meaning “quadratic”. 5. there are still reasons for doing so. means for producing graphical output from textual descriptions. or catenaries can be satisfactorily approximated by quadratic Bézier curves. Building on these basic. and often rather tiresome. and there are no additional graphics files to be dragged along.

For an introduction.2. 1 . The first pair. of rectangular space for the picture. But if you are about to do any serious graphics work. A wide variety of these packages is described in detail in The A L TEX Graphics Companion [4]. A A very thorough discussion of L TEX and TEX strategies for graphics (and fonts) can be found in TEX Unbound [16]. assigns arbitrary coordinates to the bottom left corner of the reserved rectangle. it generA ates encapsulated PostScript files. (x0 . 5. . It is a stand-alone application based on Donald E. x0 . the picture environment works out of the box. A Perhaps the most advanced graphical tool related with L TEX is METAPOST. 5. . which can be reset any time (but not within a picture environment) with a command such as \setlength{\unitlength}{1. y).1 Basic Commands A picture environment1 is created with one of the two commands \begin{picture}(x. y0 ). The optional second pair. you should look at TikZ as presented in section 5. y).2cm} The default value of \unitlength is 1pt. \end{picture} or \begin{picture}(x. with standard L TEX 2ε no package loading necessary. METAPOST has the very powerful and mathematically sophisticated programming language of METAFONT but contrary to METAFONT. . y. A Believe it or not.106 Producing Mathematical Graphics purposes. .3 on page 115. (x. y)(x0 . y0 ). effects the reservation.2 The picture Environment By Urs Oswald <osurs@bluewin. which can be imported in L TEX and even A X. see A User’s Manual for METAPOST [15]. Knuth’s METAFONT. pdfL TE or the tutorial on [17].ch> A As mentioned above the picture environment is part of standard L TEX and it is great for simple tasks and also if you want to control the exact positoning of individual elements on a page. within the document. \end{picture} The numbers x. y0 refer to \unitlength.

5){.0){\line(5.5}} \put(0.1){1}} \put(0.0){\line(1.0){\line(2.1){1}} \put(0.0){\line(3.6){.1) \put(0.0){\line(4.0){\line(4. y3 ) 5.8333}} \put(0. y2 )(x3 .5){.1){1}} \put(0.0){\line(1.4){1}} \put(0.0){\line(5. y){object} 107 or \multiput(x.0){1}} \put(0.1667}} \put(0.4){.3){1}} \put(0. ∆y){n}{object} Bézier curves are an exception.25}} \put(0.6){.0){\line(3. They are drawn with the command \qbezier(x1 .5.2 Line Segments \setlength{\unitlength}{5cm} \begin{picture}(1.1){1}} \put(0.2.0){\line(1.6667}} \put(0.4){.5){1}} \end{picture}  (   ¢  ¡ 7  (7   ¥¥ ¤¤ ££ ¢  ¡ 7   ¥ ¤ £ ¢  ¡  ( D ( ¥¤ £ ¢  ¡  7   D 5 D5 ( ¥ ¤ £ ¢  ¡   7   5& & D  ( ¥ ¤ £ ¢  ¡  7   5& D 5 ( ¥ ¤ £ ¢  ¡ 7  D&&4 4 5 ( ¥ ¤ £ ¢  ¡ 7  D&4¨ 544¨ ¨ 7 ( D ¥ ¤ £ ¢  ¡   5& 3 D 7 54  ¥¤ £ ¢ ¡ (  &&4¨¨33 7 D  544 3 3  ¥¤£ ¢¡ ( &¨¨¨3 D $ 3  &4 ( 5 ¥¤£¢¡7 ¨3$$$ 2 2 D 5 7 4   &3222@@ @ ( 433 ¥¤£¢¡ ¨¨¨$$$$$22@ D 5 &3$$22@@@ 2@@ 4$2@ 7    3 ¥¤£¢¡( ¨2@   D 5 &  4 @ 7 D $ & 2 4 5   (   3  ¨$@ ¤£ 3 ¥¨@ ¢ 2  2 ¡ $@ . y1 )(x2 .0){\line(3.0){\line(1.3){.0){\line(3.8}} \put(0.0){\line(5.1){1}} \put(0.0){\line(5.0){\line(5.4}} \put(0.0){\line(2.5){.6}} \put(0.0){\line(6.3){.0){\line(1.2){1}} \put(0.75}} \put(0.2}} \put(0.2){.0){\line(1.0){\line(0.0){\line(1.2){1}} \put(0.1){1}} \put(0. y)(∆x.0){\line(2.1){1}} \put(0.3){1}} \put(0.3333}} \put(0.5){.0){\line(6.0){\line(4.2 The picture Environment Most drawing commands have one of the two forms \put(x.

2. and they have to be coprime (no common divisor except 1).1){30}} \put(30. y1 ){length}} The \line command has two arguments: 1. . . 4.20){\vector(2.3 Arrows \setlength{\unitlength}{0.108 Producing Mathematical Graphics Line segments are drawn with the command \put(x.20){\vector(-1.-1){5}} \put(30. . The figure illustrates all 25 possible slope values in the first quadrant.20){\vector(-1. 2.1){20}} \put(30.75mm} \begin{picture}(60. the components of the direction vector are even more narrowly restricted than for line segments.20){\vector(3. a direction vector. 5.20){\vector(1.1){30}} \put(30. The length is relative to \unitlength. . . 6. 3.0){30}} \put(30. . Notice the effect of the \thicklines command on the two arrows pointing to the upper left. 5.1){25}} \put(30. y){\line(x1 .20){\vector(4. .-4){5}} \end{picture} ! ¡ ¡ B ¨ ¡ ¨¨¨ I  y ˆ ˆ ˆ ˆ g ¡  X $ ˆˆˆ$¨$ E g¨$ ¨$ ¡ ©  £ £ £  ££ g y gg Arrows are drawn with the command \put(x. −3.4){5}} \thinlines \put(30. The length argument is the vertical coordinate in the case of a vertical line segment. The components of the direction vector are restricted to the integers −6. . −5. .2){10}} \thicklines \put(30. Components also have to be coprime (no common divisor except 1).20){\vector(-4.40) \put(30.20){\vector(1. y){\vector(x1 . y1 ){length}} For arrows.20){\vector(-1. a length. namely to the integers −4. the horizontal coordinate in all other cases.

30){\circle{14}} \put(15.30){\circle{12}} \put(40.5.30){\circle{32}} \put(40. not all diameters are possible. There is also a possibility within the picture environment. one may have to resort to additional packages.30){\circle{9}} \put(40.30){\circle{8}} \put(20. arbitrary circles and ellipses can be patched together from quadratic Bézier A curves.30){\circle{2}} \put(20. If one is not afraid of doing the necessary calculations (or leaving them to a program). y){\circle{diameter}} draws a circle with center (x. see The L TEX Graphics Companion [4]. y) and diameter (not radius) diameter.2.10){\circle*{1}} \put(20.4 Circles \setlength{\unitlength}{1mm} \begin{picture}(60. For a thorough description of these A packages. The picture environment only admits diameters up to approximately 14 mm.10){\circle*{2}} \put(25.30){\circle{4}} \put(40. and even below this limit.30){\circle{8}} \put(40.30){\circle{5}} \put(40. The \circle* command produces disks (filled circles).10){\circle*{4}} \put(35.30){\circle{10}} \put(40. .30){\circle{4}} \put(20.30){\circle{2}} \put(40.30){\circle{11}} \put(40. See Graphics in L TEX 2ε [17] for examples and Java source files. such as eepic or pstricks.30){\circle{1}} \put(40.30){\circle{1}} \put(20. As in the case of line segments.30){\circle{6}} \put(40.2 The picture Environment 109 5. 40) \put(20.10){\circle*{5}} \end{picture} 96 96 52 1( '$ # #   j e ˜ m j h e ˜   "! "! 0) &% 43 87 87 r u x z} The command \put(x.30){\circle{3}} \put(40.30){\circle{13}} \put(40.30){\circle{16}} \put(20.30){\circle{7}} \put(40.10){\circle*{3}} \put(30.

075mm} \multiput(0.05){$c$} \put(0. text and formulas can be written into a picture environment with the \put command in the usual way.05.1.0){25}} \linethickness{0.3.5.7){$b$} \put(2.3){\line(-2.0){6}% {\line(0.2){\line(-2.110 Producing Mathematical Graphics 5.0){2}% {\line(0.0)(0.0)(1.-5){1}} \put(0.1){20}} \multiput(0.5)(0.0.5){\line(2.4){$\displaystyle s:=\frac{a+b+c}{2}$} \end{picture} F = s(s − a)(s − b)(s − c) Cr  rra r  rB ¨ b ¨¨  ¨ c  ¨ a+b+c  ¨ ¨ s := A 2 As this example shows.10){2}% {\line(1.5){$a$} \put(1.0)(10.2. the translation vector from one object .3){$A$} \put(4. 5.2.0)(0.1){3}} \put(4.5) \thicklines \put(1.1.15mm} \multiput(0.2.2.7.0){25}} \linethickness{0.0){26}% {\line(0.1. ∆y){n}{object} has 4 arguments: the starting point.3mm} \multiput(5.20) \linethickness{0.5){5}% {\line(1.0.1){2}} \put(2. y)(∆x.4){$F= \sqrt{s(s-a)(s-b)(s-c)}$} \put(3.5.3.8cm} \begin{picture}(6.1){20}} \multiput(0.95){$C$} \put(3.0.0)(5.1){21}% {\line(1.5 Text and Formulas \setlength{\unitlength}{0.1){20}} \multiput(0.9){$B$} \put(1.7.6 \multiput and \linethickness \setlength{\unitlength}{2mm} \begin{picture}(30.0){25}} \end{picture} The command \multiput(x.1.

3){\oval(3. h)} or \put(x. t.8)} \thicklines \put(2. l. as the example illustrates.1. y) and having width w and height h.1){5}% {\line(1.5){\oval(1.8)} \thinlines \put(3. The optional position arguments b.1){\oval(3.0){6}} \thicklines \put(2. y){\oval(w.2 The picture Environment to the next.075mm} \multiput(0.8)[tl]} \put(4. The \linethickness command applies to horizontal and vertical line segments.1){4}} \multiput(0.1. It does.1.3){\oval(3.8. h)[position]} produces an oval centered at (x.1.1. nor to circles.7 Ovals \setlength{\unitlength}{0. and the object to be drawn. “left”.1){\oval(3. While \linethickness{length} applies only to horizontal and vertical lines (and quadratic Bézier curves). \thinlines and \thicklines apply to oblique line segments as well as to circles and ovals.0){7}% {\line(0. but neither to oblique line segments.0. r refer to “top”. “bottom”.8)[r]} \put(3. y){\oval(w.5. \thinlines and \thicklines on the other.1. Line thickness can be controlled by two kinds of commands: \linethickness{length} on the one hand. however. and can be combined. the number of objects.0)(1.75cm} \begin{picture}(6. “right”.4) \linethickness{0.2){\oval(3.4)} \end{picture} 5 5 2 2 2 4 3 3 5§ ¤ ¦ ¥ 3 4 4 3 The command \put(x. apply to quadratic Bézier curves! 111 5.2.0)(0. .8)[b]} \put(4.

0){8}} \put(17.0){2} {\line(0.1){102}} \put(14.0){8}} \put(8. In the example it is set to bl which puts the anchor point into the bottom left corner of the savebox.0)(0.0){19}} \put(39. The other position specifiers are top and right.168) \newsavebox{\foldera} \savebox{\foldera} (40.28){\oval(2.29){\oval(6.26){\line(0.2)[tl]} \put(1.2)[tr]} } \newsavebox{\folderb} \savebox{\folderb} (40.0)(40.32){\line(1.8 Multiple Use of Predefined Picture Boxes \setlength{\unitlength}{0.29){\line(1.0){40}} \multiput(0.86)(0. y){\usebox{name}} The optional position parameter has the effect of defining the ‘anchor point’ of the savebox.29){\oval(6.2.32)[bl]{% definition \multiput(0.112 Producing Mathematical Graphics 5.0){\usebox{\foldera}} } \put(34.14){\line(1.28){\oval(2.1){28}} \put(1.0){5}} \put(9.height)[position]{content} and finally arbitrarily often be drawn by \put(x.128){\usebox{\foldera}} \multiput(34.32)[l]{% definition \put(0.6)[tr]} \put(20.6)[tl]} \put(9.29){\line(1. .-37){3} {\usebox{\folderb}} \end{picture} £ § ¤   £ § ¤   £ § ¤   £ § ¤   A picture box can be declared by the command \newsavebox{name} then defined by \savebox{name}(width.5mm} \begin{picture}(120.28){2} {\line(1.

2. and m1 .5.5){0.5){0.075mm} \multiput(0. m2 − m1 y = yi + mi (x − xi ) (i = 1.1){2}} \qbezier(0.1) \qbezier(3.3)(3.5. and of the \thinlines and the \thicklines commands on oblique line segments.-1){3}} \put(5.0.3)(2. 113 5.2)(2.0){6}} \thicklines \put(0.0. The figure again shows the effect of the \linethickness command on horizontal or vertical lines.5}} \put(1. Boxed pictures can be nested: In this example. y) is then given by the equations    rclx =   m2 x2 − m1 x1 − (y2 − y1 ) .0)(0. 2). y2 ) denote the end points.2)(5. m2 the respective slopes.2)(4.1) A See Graphics in L TEX 2ε [17] for a Java program which generates the necessary \qbezier command line.3) \thinlines \qbezier(4.5.2) \end{picture} $$$ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ $ $ h h h h rr h rr h rr r As this example illustrates.8cm} \begin{picture}(6.5)(1. It also shows that both kinds of commands affect quadratic Bézier curves.0)(1.1)(4. \foldera is used within the definition of \folderb. splitting up a circle into 4 quadratic Bézier curves is not satisfactory. y1 ). (5.5){\line(-1.5}} \linethickness{1mm} \qbezier(2.5.1)(4.1){4}} \multiput(0.1){5} {\line(1.3)(2.2) \qbezier(2.2){\line(2.5.0){7} {\line(0. The intermediate control point S = (x.3. The \oval command had to be used as the \line command does not work if the segment length is less than about 3 mm. .5) \thinlines \put(2. At least 8 are needed.5)(5.5){\line(1.1)(3. of a quadratic Bézier curve.4) \linethickness{0.9 Quadratic Bézier Curves \setlength{\unitlength}{0.3) \qbezier(3.2 The picture Environment A The name argument refers to a L TEX storage bin and therefore is of a command nature (which accounts for the backslashes in the current example).3){\line(4. each command overriding all previous ones.5.0. P2 = (x2 .3)(3.0. Let P1 = (x1 .5.

This example points out the use of the optional argument of the \begin{picture} command.1. being less than one percent.-0.0){5} {\line(0.15241){\line(0.4}} \put(-1.-0.1.25) its lower left corner (marked by the black disk) is assigned the coordinates (−2.4}} \put(1. we can calculate the intermediate control points.15241){\line(0.0){\vector(1..35241){\line(1.5.10 Catenary \setlength{\unitlength}{1cm} \begin{picture}(4.25){\circle*{0.2384.0)(-1.4}} \put(-1.0)(0.0.0.-.0)(1.3.7622). The error is barely noticeable.2. the slope there having the value m = 3.5.3.4}} \put(2.34308){\line(0.5.0) (-2.114 Producing Mathematical Graphics 5. .2.1.1){. 0) and (−1.35241){\line(1.0.2}} \put(0.0.0.0){4}} \linethickness{.. whereas by the command \begin{picture}(4.1){.1){.2}} \end{picture} y T Ex In this figure..5.3.5.0){.4}} \put(.0){.7622) \qbezier(0.1)... The picture is defined in convenient “mathematical” coordinates.54308){\line(1.4}} \put(1.0){.0){.1){.0){\vector(0.0. Using again equation (5.4}} \put(-.2384.4}} u \put(-.12763){\line(1.0){$y$}} \qbezier(0.1){4} {\line(1.5.4}} \put(1.5.2384.05){$x$} \put(0..0.4}} \put(-1.-.4}} \put(-1.1){3. 0).3.0){4.4}} \put(-2.7.2. −0.0)(1.34308){\line(0.-.25).-0. The crosses indicate points of the real catenary. each symmetric half of the catenary y = cosh x − 1 is approximated by a quadratic Bézier curve.1.4}} \put(.075mm} \multiput(-2.8.2.35){\makebox(0.0){.0) (2.6269.3. They turn out to be (1.1){.54308){\line(1.7622) \linethickness{.3.2384.7.1){3}} \multiput(-2.3.2mm} \put( .0. The right half of the curve ends in the point (2.25) \put(-2.07237){\line(0.6)(-2. 2.1){.5.0){.07237){\line(0.6)(-2.45.12763){\line(1.

−2) (black disk).-1.4) {$\beta=v/c=\tanh\chi$} \qbezier(0.9640) \qbezier(0.4)(-3.-1)(0.8853. and the lower left corner is assigned the mathematical coordinates (−3. The pdf package comes with its own 500+ page documentation [18].-2){\circle*{0. I will just show you a few examples so that you can get a first impression of how this tool works.0.-0. m2 = 1/ cosh2 2. it’s just the interfaces that are rather diverse.0)(0.8cm} \begin{picture}(6.3 The PGF and TikZ Graphics Packages 115 5. So we are only going to scratch the surface of the package with this little section. The pgf package comes with a high level access language provided by the tikz package. First a simple non-sense diagram.5.-0. As mentioned above.5.1).4. Use the tikzpicture environment to wrap your TikZ commands. 5.5){\vector(0.1){$\chi$} \put(0.2}} \put(0.1. TikZ provides highly efficient commands to draw graphics right from inside your document.0){\vector(1.0){0.8853) (2.2.9640) \put(-3. The positive branch is determined by P1 = (0. Again. the picture is defined in mathematically convenient coordinates. 0).3 The PGF and TikZ Graphics Packages A Today every L TEX output generation system can create nice vector graphics.4. m1 = 1 and P2 = (2.1)(0.11 Rapidity in the Special Theory of Relativity \setlength{\unitlength}{0.2}} \end{picture} β = v/c = tanh χ T E χ t The control points of the two Bézier curves were calculated with formulas (5.8853.0){0.1){3}} \multiput(-2.-2) \put(-2. The pgf package provides an abstraction layer over these interface.0.5.0){13} {\line(1. there is an excellent manual for pgf and friends.0)(-0.5. . So instead of actually explaining how it works.2}} \multiput(-2.-0.7.8853) (-2. tanh 2).2.0){5}} \put(2.0){13} {\line(1.

(2.5.(3mm.1.0) -.0).0mm) arc (0:30:3mm) -.4. \draw[step=. \end{tikzpicture} economics psychology behavioral economics If you are using tikz in connection with babel some of the characters used in the TikZ language may get modified by babel.thick. draw=green!50!black] (0. \draw (0.5) {behavioral economics} edge[->.-1) {}.2).1. leading to odd errors.5.-2. \shorthandoff{:} \begin{tikzpicture} \node[circle. \end{tikzpicture} Producing Mathematical Graphics Note the semicolon (.in=-60] (i).0) circle (1cm).5.116 \begin{tikzpicture}[scale=3] \clip (-0.1. . minimum size=3cm.3. \draw (0.8. To counteract this. \filldraw[fill=green!20!white.0) {}.0) -.) character.0) {}. label=120:{economics}] at (0. It separates the individual commands.4) grid (3.5).very thin] (-1. \node at (0. out=60.4.cycle.6.5) -.25cm. Note the foreach loops in the next example. label=60:{psychology}] at (1.2) rectangle (1. minimum size=3cm. A simple Venn diagram.draw.-1.4). add the \shorthandoff command to your code.-0.gray. \draw (-1.-1.draw.(0. \node[circle. \node (i) at (0.

draw] (A) at (. like this box which is slightly bent. minimum size=2mm.fill=lightgray] (0. \usetikzlibrary{% decorations.3} \node[v] (G-\i-\j) at (\i.5) {B}.3.decorate] (A) -.(G-\n-\o).3}] \draw [decorate.draw] (B) at (5.5) {A}..8} \foreach \j/\o in {1/2..\j) {}.(G-\i-\o). \draw[->.4/5...3/4.2/3} { \draw[->] (G-\i-\j) -...3 The PGF and TikZ Graphics Packages \begin{tikzpicture}[scale=0. \draw[->.2/3} \draw[->] (G-\i-\j) -. \foreach \i/\n in {1/2..(B).8] \tikzstyle{v}=[circle..5. \foreach \i in {1.2/3. \node[circle.5/6... \node[circle.6/7.inner sep=0pt.(G-\i-\o). } \end{tikzpicture} 117 With the \usetikzlibrary command in the preamble you can enable a wide variety of additional features for drawing special shapes..5.draw] \foreach \i in {1..(A).4).decorate] (B) -.0) rectangle (5..pathmorphing} \begin{tikzpicture}[ decoration={bent.5. \end{tikzpicture} B A .8} \foreach \j in {1.aspect=.7/8} \foreach \j/\o in {1/2. \draw[->] (G-\n-\j) -.

digit E unsigned integer And there is more.draw. It provides everything you need to draw plots. \node[v] (c) [below=of a] {$2$}.->] (a) to node {} (d).net/tikz/. \end{tikzpicture} Producing Mathematical Graphics 1 2 2 1 You can even draw syntax diagrams that look as if they came straight from a book on Pascal programming. \draw[thick. if you have to draw plots of numerical data or functions.->] (a) to node {} (c). . If you have a look at the pdf documentation you will find a detailed tutorial on drawing this exact diagram.thick] \node[v] (a) {$1$}. \node[v] (d) [below=of b] {$1$}. so I will just show you the result. For more inspiration make sure to visit Kjell Magne Fauske’s excellent http://www. \draw[thick. yscale=8.118 \usetikzlibrary{positioning} \begin{tikzpicture}[xscale=6. \node[v] (b) [right=of a] {$2$}.>=stealth] \tikzstyle{v}=[circle. you should have a closer look at the pgfplot package. + unsigned integer . it contains an ever expanding store of A beautiful graphs and other L TEX code. \draw[thick. minimum size=1mm. It can even call the external gnuplot command to evaluate actual functions you wrote into the graph.->] (b) to node {} (d).texample. The code is a bit more daunting than the example above.

which typesets the command name and makes a corresponding entry in the index. I am using both a new environment called lscommand. and a new command named \ci. While they are not fancy-looking. or the output produced by some existing command may not meet your requirements. they obey all the established rules of good typesetting. Check this out by looking up the \dum command in the index at the back of this book. I have created a package in which I defined new commands and environments for this purpose. where you’ll find an entry for \dum. pointing to every page where I mentioned the \dum command. . Environments and Packages You may have noticed that all the commands I introduce in this book are typeset in a box. A However. A In this chapter. 6.Chapter 6 A Customising L TEX Documents produced with the commands you have learned up to this point will look acceptable to a large audience. and that they show up in the index at the end of the book.1 New Commands. A Instead of directly using the necessary L TEX commands to achieve this. which will make them easy to read and pleasant to look at. which is responsible for drawing the box around the command. Now I can simply write: \begin{lscommand} \ci{dum} \end{lscommand} \dum In this example. there are situations where LTEX does not provide a command or environment that matches your needs. I will try to give some hints on how to teach LTEX new tricks and how to make it produce output that looks different from what is provided by default.

i.e. . If you wanted to use more than one argument. This is short for “The Not A So Short Introduction to L TEX 2ε . . I can simply change the definition of the lscommand environment to create a new look. and the definition of the command. 6. \newcommand{\tnss}{The not so Short Introduction to \LaTeXe} This is ‘‘\tnss’’ \ldots{} ‘‘\tnss’’ This is “The not so Short Introduction to A L TEX 2ε ” .” Such a command could come in handy if you had to write the title of this book over and over again. no argument allowed.120 A Customising L TEX If I ever decide that I do not like the commands to be typeset in a box any more. “The not so Short IntroducA tion to L TEX 2ε ” The next example illustrates how to define a new command that takes one argument. Basically. use #2 and so on. The first example defines a new command called \tnss. It uses the same syntax as the \newcommand command. .1. the command requires two arguments: the name of the command you want to create.1 New Commands To add your own commands. This is much easier than going through the whole A document to hunt down all the places where I have used some generic L TEX commands to draw a box around some word. If missing it defaults to 0. The #1 tag gets replaced by the argument you specify. \newcommand{\txsit}[2] {This is the \emph{#1} #2 Introduction to \LaTeXe} % in the document body: \begin{itemize} \item \txsit{not so}{short} \item \txsit{very}{long} \end{itemize} • This is the not so short Introduction A to L TEX 2ε • This is the very long Introduction A to L TEX 2ε A L TEX will not allow you to create a new command that would overwrite an existing one. The following two examples should help you to get the idea. The num argument in square brackets is optional and specifies the number of arguments the new command takes (up to 9 are possible). use the \newcommand{name}[num]{definition} command. But there is a special command in case you explicitly want this: \renewcommand.

The num argument is used the same way as in the \newcommand command. The commands used in this example will be explained later. 121 6.2 New Environments Just as with the \newcommand command. which can potentially have fatal effects. It uses the same syntax as the \newenvironment command. . If you ever want to change an existing command. A There are some points to note about whitespace following L TEX commands.1. use the \renewenvironment command.3 Extra Space When creating a new environment you may easily get bitten by extra spaces creeping in. . but if the command is already defined. The example below illustrates the usage of the \newenvironment command. The \ignorespaces command in the begin block of the environment will make it ignore any space after executing . EX makes sure that you do not define an environment that already exists. for \stretch go to page 129.1 New Commands. For the \rule command see page 135. See page 5 for more information. there is a command to create your own environments. for example when you want to create a title environment which supresses its own indentation as well as the one on the following paragraph. A LT 6. \newenvironment{king} {\rule{1ex}{1ex}% \hspace{\stretch{1}}} {\hspace{\stretch{1}}% \rule{1ex}{1ex}} \begin{king} My humble subjects \ldots \end{king} My humble subjects . The \newenvironment command uses the following syntax: \newenvironment{name}[num]{before}{after} Again \newenvironment can have an optional argument. and more information on \hspace can be found on page 129. The material specified in the before argument is processed before the text in the environment gets processed.6. It works like \newcommand. A L TEX 2ε will silently ignore it. Environments and Packages In certain cases you might also want to use the \providecommand command. The material in the after argument gets processed when the \end{name} command is encountered.1.

} A Now call L TEX like this: latex ’\newcommand{\blackandwhite}{true}\input{test. \end{simple} Same\\here. }{ % "color" mode. In that connection it might be interesting to produce A different versions of the same document by calling L TEX with commandline parameters.122 A Customising L TEX the begin block. See the space to the left. . you might be using Makefiles to build A your L TEX projects. With the \ignorespacesafterend A L TEX will issue an \ignorespaces after the special ‘end’ processing has occured. Same here. No space to the left.4 A Commandline L TEX If you work on a Unix-like OS.. By setting \blackandwhite to false the color version of the document would be produced. do something different.tex}’ First the command \blackandwhite gets defined and then the actual file is read with input. If you add the following structure to your document: \usepackage{ifthen} \ifthenelse{\equal{\blackandwhite}{true}}{ % "black and white" mode. do something. The end block is a bit more tricky as special processing occurs at the end of an environment. \newenvironment{correct}% {\noindent\ignorespaces}% {\par\noindent% \ignorespacesafterend} \begin{correct} No space\\to the left. \newenvironment{simple}% {\noindent}% {\par\noindent} \begin{simple} See the space\\to the left..1. 6. \end{correct} Same\\here. Same here.

To do this.2. . . 6. \ProvidesPackage tells A L TEX the name of the package and will allow it to issue a sensible error message when you try to include a package twice.3 shows the absolute point size for these commands as implemented in the standard document classes. . There is one special command.sty. The small and bold Romans ruled all of . footnotes. Table 6.2. {\small The small and \textbf{bold} Romans ruled} {\Large all of great big \textit{Italy}. In this situation.6.2 6. use the commands listed in Tables 6. Figure 6. The actual size of each font is a design issue and depends on the document class and its options. ).2 Fonts and Sizes 123 6. one might like to change fonts and sizes by hand.1.} great big Italy. \ProvidesPackage{package name} for use at the very beginning of your package file.5 Your Own Package If you define a lot of new environments and commands.1: Example Package. In some cases.1 Fonts and Sizes Font Changing Commands A L TEX chooses the appropriate font and font size based on the logical structure of the document (sections. Writing a package basically consists of copying the contents of your document preamble into a separate file with a name ending in . it is a good idea to create a A L TEX package containing all your command and environment definitions.1 and 6.1 shows a small example package that contains the commands defined in the examples above. the preamble of your document will get quite long. Use the \usepackage command to make the package available in your document. % Demo Package by Tobias Oetiker \ProvidesPackage{demopack} \newcommand{\tnss}{The not so Short Introduction to \LaTeXe} \newcommand{\txsit}[1]{The \emph{#1} Short Introduction to \LaTeXe} \newenvironment{king}{\begin{quote}}{\end{quote}} Figure 6.

.} \textsl{.} sans serif bold face italic Small Caps document font Table 6.} roman typewriter medium upright slanted emphasized \textsf{. In connection with the font size commands.} \textit{. refer to Table 6.1: Fonts..} \textup{...} \emph{. In math mode use the font changing commands to temporarily exit math mode and enter some normal text. This means that issuing size or even font changing commands.4. If you want to switch to another font for math typesetting you need another special set of commands. He likes large and small letters.... curly braces play a significant A role. They are used to build groups..} \textsc{. and still keep bold or slant attributes set earlier..2: Font Sizes... \textrm{.. He likes {\LARGE large and {\small small} letters}... The closing curly brace } should therefore not come too early..} \textnormal{.. Note the position of the \par command in the next two examples... \tiny \scriptsize \footnotesize \small \normalsize \large tiny font \Large \LARGE \huge \Huge larger font very small font quite small font very large font small font normal font huge large font largest . 1 1 \par is equivalent to a blank line Table 6.. but only if the paragraph ends within the scope of the font size command.} \texttt{...124 A Customising L TEX A One important feature of L TEX 2ε is that the font attributes are independent. Groups limit the scope of most L TEX commands.} \textbf{.} \textmd{. The font size commands also change the line spacing..

3: Absolute Point Sizes in Standard Classes..} \mathsf{.4: Math Fonts.} \mathtt{.} \mathbf{...6.... size \tiny \scriptsize \footnotesize \small \normalsize \large \Large \LARGE \huge \Huge 10pt (default) 5pt 7pt 8pt 9pt 10pt 12pt 14pt 17pt 20pt 25pt 11pt option 6pt 8pt 9pt 10pt 11pt 12pt 14pt 17pt 20pt 25pt 12pt option 6pt 8pt 10pt 11pt 12pt 14pt 17pt 20pt 25pt 25pt Table 6.} Roman Font Boldface Font Sans Serif Font Typewriter Font Italic Font CALLIGRAPHIC FONT N ormal F ont . \mathrm{.2 Fonts and Sizes 125 Table 6.} \mathcal{..} \mathnormal{.......} \mathit{..

If you want to activate a size changing command for a whole paragraph of text or even more. it’s occupied by \oops{machines} of unknown origin and purpose. But remember I am a liar. Danger As noted at the beginning of this chapter. But remember I am a liar. \newcommand{\oops}[1]{% \textbf{#1}} Do not \oops{enter} this room. Will Robinson.}\par This is not true either. This approach has the advantage that you can decide at some later stage that you want to use a visual representation of danger other than \textbf. This will save you from counting lots of curly braces. You can believe me! {\Large This is not true either.2 Danger. You can believe me!\par} Don’t read this! It is not true. without having to wade through your document. The \emph command is context aware. identifying all the occurrences of \textbf and then figuring out for each one whether it was used for pointing out danger or for some other reason. while the font commands are absolute. you might want to use the environment syntax for font changing commands. But then again.126 A Customising L TEX {\Large Don’t read this! It is not true. This means that if you use the same font changing command in several places in order to typeset a special kind of information. because they work in opposition A to the basic idea of L TEX. 6. which is to separate the logical and visual markup of your document. \begin{Large} This is not true. it’s occupied by machines of unknown origin and purpose. it is dangerous to clutter your document with explicit commands like this. what is these days . But then again.2. . . Do not enter this room. A Please note the difference between telling L TEX to emphasize something and telling it to use a different font. what is these days \ldots \end{Large} This is not true. you should use \newcommand to define a “logical wrapper command” for the font changing command. .

so the default line spread factor is 1. and \linespread{1.6} for “double” line spacing. ! you s 6.} \texttt{or in \emph{typewriter} style.3 Advice To conclude this journey into the land of fonts and font sizes. the more readable and beautiful it become .6. Use \linespread{1. or in typewriter style.3 6.3 Spacing \textit{You can also \emph{emphasize} text if it is set in italics.3} for “one and a half” line spacing.} 127 You can also emphasize text if it is set in italics. change its value by putting the \linespread{factor} command into the preamble of your document.3. here is a little word of advice: Remember The MO RE fonts use in a document. 6. in a sans-serif font. Normally the lines are not spread.2.} \textsf{in a \emph{sans-serif} font. So if you have a good reason for changing . Note that the effect of the \linespread command is rather drastic and not appropriate for published work.1 Spacing Line Spacing If you want to use larger inter-line spacing in a document.

Its lines get spaced more loosely now as well.\par} This paragraph has a clear purpose. 6.5 of what it was before. if this is necessary to properly fit the paragraphs onto the page.5\baselineskip} This paragraph is typeset with the baseline skip set to 1. By placing a definition like \setlength{\parindent}{0pt} \setlength{\parskip}{1ex plus 0. This paragraph has a clear purpose. it shows that after the curly brace has been closed.2 Paragraph Formatting A In L TEX. paragraphs are often separated by some space and not indented. Note the par command at the end of the paragraph. But beware. To avoid this.3. everything is back to normal. The plus and minus parts of the length above tell TEX that it can compress and expand the inter-paragraph skip by the amount specified. In continental Europe. everything is back to normal. you might want to move the two commands from the preamble into your document to some place below the command \tableofcontents or to not use them at all.5\baselineskip} {\setlength{\baselineskip}% {1.128 A Customising L TEX the line spacing you might want to use the command: \setlength{\baselineskip}{1.5 of what it was before. there are two parameters influencing paragraph layout. . it shows that after the curly brace has been closed. This paragraph is typeset with the baseline skip set to 1. because you’ll find that most professional books use indenting and not spacing to separate paragraphs.2ex} in the preamble of the input file.5ex minus 0. Note the par command at the end of the paragraph. this also has its effect on the table of contents. you can change the layout of paragraphs. These two commands increase the space between two paragraphs while setting the paragraph indent to zero.

It stretches until all the remaining space on a line is filled up. 2 . The most important units are listed in Table 6. use \hspace* instead of \hspace. This might come in handy when you start a document with body text and not with a sectioning command. The length in the simplest case is just a number plus a unit.5 cm. If multiple \hspace{\stretch{n}} commands are issued on the same line.5. use: \hspace{length} If such a space should be kept even if it falls at the end or the start of a line. they occupy all available space in proportion of their respective stretch factors. it may make sense to make the space adjust its size relative to the size of the current font. To create a non-indented paragraph. 6. This is a space of 1.2 Obviously. To add horizontal space. use \indent 129 at the beginning of the paragraph. use \noindent as the first command of the paragraph. This can be done by using the text-relative units em and ex: To indent the first paragraph after each section head. x\hspace{\stretch{1}} x\hspace{\stretch{3}}x x x x When using horizontal space together with text.3 Horizontal Space A L TEX determines the spaces between words and sentences automatically. use the indentfirst package in the ‘tools’ bundle.3.5cm}is a space of 1. this will only have an effect when \parindent is not set to zero. The command \stretch{n} generates a special rubber space.3 Spacing If you want to indent a paragraph that is not indented. This\hspace{1.6.5 cm.

The \stretch command. in connection with \pagebreak.3. . .4 mm point ≈ 1/72 inch ≈ 1 mm 3 approx width of an ‘M’ in the current font approx height of an ‘x’ in the current font {\Large{}big\hspace{1em}y}\\ {\tiny{}tin\hspace{1em}y} big y tin y 6. With \bigskip and \smallskip you can skip a predefined amount of vertical space without having to worry about exact numbers. . If necessary. mm cm in pt em ex millimetre ≈ 1/25 inch centimetre = 10 mm inch = 25. additional vertical space between two paragraphs can be added with the command: \vspace{length} This command should normally be used between two empty lines. \vspace*. Some text \ldots \vspace{\stretch{1}} This goes onto the last line of the page. is determined A automatically by L TEX. sections.Table 6. or to centre text vertically on a page. subsections.5: TEX Units. can be used to typeset text on the last line of a page. If the space should be preserved at the top or at the bottom of a page. use the starred version of the command.4 Vertical Space The space between paragraphs. . instead of \vspace.\pagebreak Additional space between two lines of the same paragraph or within a table is specified with the \\[length] command.

. It then automatically picks the right text margins. Sure. The first command assigns a fixed value to any of the parameters: \setlength{parameter}{length} The second command adds a length to any of the parameters: \addtolength{parameter}{length} This second command is actually more useful than the \setlength command. But enough of the cautioning. . 3 4 macros/latex/required/tools I mean a real printed book produced by a reputable publisher. To add one centimetre to the overall text width. You will find that there are no more than A about 66 characters on each line. I put the following commands into the document preamble: \addtolength{\hoffset}{-0. So if you increase the width of your body text. compared to your off-the-shelf MS Word page. This is because it is difficult for the eyes to move from the end of one line to the start of the next one. It allows you to use arithmetic operations in the argument of \setlength and other places where numeric values are entered into function arguments. there is a good reason for the page layout to be as it is. keep in mind that you are making life difficult for the readers of your paper.4 Page Layout A L TEX 2ε allows you to specify the paper size in the \documentclass command. Now do the same on your L TEX page. you can change them. before you launch into a “Let’s make that narrow page a bit A wider” frenzy. it looks awfully narrow. I promised to tell you how you do it . Figure 6. because it works relative to the existing settings. Naturally. This is also why newspapers are typeset in multiple columns.3 WAIT! . As with most things in L TEX. The figure was produced with the layout package from the tools bundle. They are usually used in the document preamble.2 shows all the parameters that can be changed. . you might want to look at the calc package.5cm} \addtolength{\textwidth}{1cm} In this context. . .4 Page Layout 131 6. but sometimes you may not be happy with the predefined values. A L TEX provides two commands to change these parameters. But take a look at your favourite book4 and count the number of characters on a standard text line. take a few seconds to think. Experience shows that the reading gets difficult as soon as there are more characters on a single line. You will find that there are also about 66 characters per line.6.

.132 A Customising L TEX 4 i c 5 i c 6 i 2 T i c T T cHeader T T Margin Notes Body 7 i E ' 9i ' 3 i E 10 ' i E ' c ' 1i E T i 11 8 i c E Footer 1 3 5 7 9 11 one inch + \hoffset \oddsidemargin = 22pt or \evensidemargin \headheight = 12pt \textheight = 595pt \marginparsep = 7pt \footskip = 27pt \hoffset = 0pt \paperwidth = 597pt 2 4 6 8 10 one inch + \voffset \topmargin = 22pt \headsep = 19pt \textwidth = 360pt \marginparwidth = 106pt \marginparpush = 5pt (not shown) \voffset = 0pt \paperheight = 845pt Figure 6.2: Layout parameters for this book. Try the layouts package to print the layout of your own document.

height and depth of a text string. Isn’t that puzzling? 6. c – is the hypotenuse of the triangle and feels lonely. each letter is a little box. I avoid using absolute lengths in L TEX documents. including . $b$ -.finally does not show up here at all. The following 3 commands allow you to determine the width. this is a very simplistic version of what really happens. At first. but the point is that TEX operates on glue and boxes. $d$ -. d – finally does not show up here at all.6 Boxes A L TEX builds up its pages by pushing around boxes. b – are adjoin to the right angle of a right-angled triangle. but with special glue. which is then glued to other letters to form words.is the hypotenuse of the triangle and feels lonely. You can put virtually everything into a box.are adjoin to the right angle of a right-angled triangle.6. which is elastic so that a series of words can be squeezed or stretched as to exactly fill a line on the page. I rather try to base things on the width or height of other page elements. Letters are not the only things that can be boxes. I admit.5 More Fun With Lengths A Whenever possible. Isn’t that puzzling? \end{vardesc} a2 + b2 = c2 Where: a. For the width of a figure this could be \textwidth in order to make it fill the page. $c$ -. \flushleft \newenvironment{vardesc}[1]{% \settowidth{\parindent}{#1:\ } \makebox[0pt][r]{#1:\ }}{} \begin{displaymath} a^2+b^2=c^2 \end{displaymath} \begin{vardesc}{Where}$a$.5 More Fun With Lengths 133 6. These are again glued to other words. \settoheight{variable}{text} \settodepth{variable}{text} \settowidth{variable}{text} The example below shows a possible application of these commands.

5 Besides the length expressions. or spread the text to fill the box. The pos parameter takes a one letter value: center. While \parbox packs up a whole paragraph doing line breaking and everything. flushleft. This means that you can easily arrange two tables or images side by side. In the past chapters you have already encountered some boxes. it’s called \mbox. The tabular environment and the \includegraphics. you can also use \width. there is also a class of boxing commands that operates only on horizontally aligned material. The pos parameter can take one of the letters c. The command \framebox works exactly the same as \makebox. The following example shows you some things you could do with the \makebox and \framebox commands. You just have to make sure that their combined width is not larger than the textwidth. \depth. It simply packs up a series of boxes into another one. and can be A used to prevent L TEX from breaking two words. 5 . You can also pack a paragraph of your choice into a box with either the \parbox[pos]{width}{text} command or the \begin{minipage}[pos]{width} text \end{minipage} environment. You can even set the width to 0pt so that the text inside the box will be typeset without influencing the surrounding boxes. and \totalheight in the width parameter. They are set from values obtained by measuring the typeset text. This means it can be smaller than the material inside the box. but it draws a box around the text.134 A Customising L TEX A other boxes. both produce a box. Each box will then be handled by L TEX as if it were a single letter. while almost anything is possible in a minipage. these horizontal box packers give you ultimate flexibility. t or b to control the vertical alignment of the box. The main difference between a minipage and a \parbox is that you cannot use all commands and environments inside a parbox. flushright. relative to the baseline of the surrounding text. As boxes can be put inside boxes. width takes a length argument specifying the width of the box. We already know one of them. although I did not tell you. for example. \height. \makebox[width][pos]{text} width defines the width of the resulting box as seen from the outside.

\height. but not even the next one in line noticed that something terrible had happened to her..5ex}{h}}} she shouted.. I am too wide I am too wide} \par \framebox[1cm][l]{never never mind.7 Rules \makebox[\textwidth]{% c e n t r a l}\par central \makebox[\textwidth][s]{% s p r e a d}\par s p r e \framebox[1.2ex}{g}% \raisebox{-4. the obvious next step is to go for the A vertical. Aaaaaaa she shouted.8\width][r]{Bummer.1pt}% \rule[1mm]{1cm}{5mm}% \rule{3mm}{.1pt}% \rule[-1mm]{5mm}{1cm}% \rule{3mm}{. and \totalheight in the first three parameters.6 No problem for L TEX.1pt} 6 Total control is only to be obtained by controlling both the horizontal and the vertical . \depth. but not rg even the next one in line noticed that something terrible had happened to her. The \raisebox{lift}[extend-above-baseline][extend-below-baseline]{text} command lets you define the vertical properties of a box. You can use \width.you am I this? Can so read mind. h 6.7ex}{aa}% \raisebox{-1. in order to act upon the size of the box inside the text argument. Bummer.2ex}{r}% \raisebox{-2.6.3ex}{a}% \raisebox{-0. . \raisebox{0pt}[0pt][0pt]{\Large% \textbf{Aaaa\raisebox{-0. \rule{3mm}{.1\width]{Guess I’m Guess I’m framed now! framed now!} \par \framebox[0.7 Rules A few pages back you may have noticed the command \rule[lift]{width}{height} In normal use it produces a simple black box. so am I} Can you read this? 135 a d Now that we control the horizontal.

. for example. has been created with a \rule command.136 A Customising L TEX This is useful for drawing vertical and horizontal lines. The line on the title page. The End.

Here we just tell about the ones we know. For all platforms there are many programs that fit the requirements above. Mac OS X and Windows to get TEX working. 2. A program to handle PostScript files and images for inclusion into your documents. A PDF/DVI viewer program for previewing and printing your documents.Appendix A A Installing L TEX Knuth published the source to TEX back in a time when nobody knew about OpenSource and/or Free Software. The TEX/L TEX program for processing your L TEX source files into typeset PDF or DVI documents. A.1 What to Install For using LaTeX on any computer system. A text editor for editing your LaTeX source files. A A 1. The License that comes with TEX lets you do whatever you want with the source. This has lead to a situation where we have free TEX implementations for almost every Operating System under the Sun. like and have some experience with. 3. 4. In this chapter you will give some hints on what to install on Linux. you need several programs. but you can only call the result of your work TEX if the program passes a set of tests Knuth has also provided. Some products even let you start the latex program from within the editor. .

org/ which is a multi-platform editor based on the TEXShop design. is A that MiKTeX will download missing L TEX packages on the fly and install .2 A.2.sourceforge.org/.uoregon. Linux. Open PDFViews preferences dialog and make sure that the automatically reload documents option is enabled and that PDFSync support is set to the TextMate preset. Mac and Unix/Linux equally well.3 Treat yourself to PDFView Use PDFView for viewing PDF files generated by LaTeX.3. Windows.2 Picking an Editor A The most popular open source editor for L TEX on the mac seems to be TEXshop.3 A.) A.2. Another fine editor is Texmaker. It is a pre-compiled LaTeX distribution for OS X. Since TEXworks uses the Qt toolkit. MacTeX provides a full LaTeX installation plus a number of additional tools.xm1math. Download and install PDFView.miktex.1 TEX on Mac OS X Get a TEX Distribution Just download MacTeX. PDFView is an open-source application can be downloaded from the PDFView website on http://pdfview.edu/~koch/texshop. A. Note there is also a forked version of Texmaker called TexmakerX on http: //texmakerx. A.net/texmaker for further Information. Recent TEXLive distributions contain the TEXworks editor http:// texworks. Apart from being a useful editor it has the advantage of running on Windows. The coolest feature in my eyes. Fink users use the command fink install texlive .net/.138 A Installing L TEX A. Get a copy from http://www.2. It contains all the basic programs and files A required to compile L TEX documents.1 TEX on Windows Getting TEX First.net/ it promises additional functionality. get a copy of the excellent MiKTEX distribution from http://www. install LaTeX using these package managers.org/mactex/. Macport users install LaTeX with port install texlive . It is also contained in the MacTeX distribution.sourceforge. If you are already using Macports or Fink for installing Unix software under OS X. it integrates tightly with your LaTeX text editor. Go to http://www. Get MaxTeX from http://www. it is available on any platform supported by this toolkit (MacOS X.tug.

4 TEX on Linux them magically while compiling a document. TeXnicCenter integrates nicely with MiKTeX.org.tug.kowalczyk. If you deal with bitmap graphics (photos and scanned material). I mention Sumatra PDF because it lets you jump from any position in the pdf document back into corresponding position in your source document. Unix and Mac OS to get your base setup going http://www.3. You can get it. A.latexeditor. you may want to have a look at the open source photoshop alternative Gimp available from http://gimp-win.org/. A.wisc. together with its own front-end GhostView. It supports Unicode and requires at least Windows XP. from http://www.A. Use your package manager to install the following packages: A • texlive – the base TEX/L TEX setup. Get your copy from http://http://www. . Version 2. 139 A. or at least available on the installation source you used to setup.sourceforge.texniccenter.cs. See the note on Texmaker in the Mac section above for a third choice.info/software/sumatrapdf/.4 Working with graphics A Working with high quality graphics in L TEX means that you have to use Encapsulated PostScript (eps) or PDF as your picture format. A.3 Document Preview You will most likely be using Yap for DVI preview as it gets installed with MikTeX. Alternatively you can also use the TeXlive distribution which exists for Windows. TeXnicCenter uses many concepts from the programming-world to provide a nice and efficient A L TEX writing environment in Windows.2 A A L TEX editor A L TEX is a programming language for text documents. For PDF you may want to look at Sumatra PDF http: //blog. The program that helps you deal with this is called GhostScript.net/. the recent alpha version seems to be quite stable. Recent TEXLive distributions contain the TEXworks Editor http:// texworks.org/. Other excellent choice is the editor provided by the LEd project available on http://www.3.org/texlive/.0 of TeXnicCenter will support Unicode.3. chances are high that L TEX is already installed on your system.4 TEX on Linux A If you work with Linux. edu/~ghost/.

If you are looking for a more windows like graphical editing environment. check out Texmaker or TEXworks. • inkscape – a free illustrator/corel draw look-a-like. • imagemagick – a free program for converting bitmap images. See the note in the Mac section above. . go check again. • ghostscript – a PostScript preview program. • gimp – a free photoshop look-a-like. so if something is missing after your first install.140 A Installing L TEX A • emacs (with auctex) – a Linux editor that integrates tightly with L TEX through the add-on AucTeX package. • xpdf and acrobat – a PDF preview program. Most Linux distros insist on splitting up their TEX environments into a large number of optional packages.

go and ask your local A L TEX guru for help. AddisonWesley. Sebastian Rahtz and Frank Mittelbach. 1997. Addison-Wesley. L TEX 2ε for authors. some lazy sysops do not provide such a document.Bibliography A [1] Leslie Lamport. Reading. Chris Rowley. Comes with the ‘tools’ bundle as . 1994. ISBN 0-201-13448-9. Volume A of Computers and Typesetting. Comes with the L TEX 2ε distribution as fntguide. ISBN 0-201-36299-6. Comes with the L TEX 2ε distribution as usrguide. Carlisle. Reading. Johannes Braams. Michel Goossens. (2nd Edition). In this case. The TEXbook.tex. Unfortunately. which explains the things that are special to the local system. It should be contained in a file called local. A [4] Michel Goossens. Reading. A A [7] L TEX3 Project Team. A New Implementation A of L TEX’s verbatim Environments. Massachusetts. ISBN 0-20152983-1.tex. Addison-Wesley. The L TEX Companion. ISBN 0-201-85469-4. Reading. A A A [8] L TEX3 Project Team. Massachusetts. second edition. Addison-Wesley. Massachusetts. Packages in the ‘graphics’ bundle.tex. Knuth. [10] Rainer Schöpf. available from the same source your A L TEX distribution came from. L TEX 2ε for Class and Package writers. A Chris Rowley. Comes A with the L TEX 2ε distribution as clsguide. David Carlisle. [2] Donald E. Massachusetts. A A [5] Each L TEX installation should provide a so-called L TEX Local Guide. 1984. L TEX 2ε Font selection. [3] Frank Mittelbach. L TEX: A Document Preparation System. [9] D. P.tex. The L TEX Graphics Companion. 2004.tex. second edition. A A A [6] L TEX3 Project Team. Bernd Raichle. Comes with the ‘graphics’ bundle as grfguide.

The xgreek package. Download from CTAN://graphics/ pgf/base/doc/generic/pgf/pgfmanual.tex. Graphics in L TEX 2ε .) . ursoswald. Hobby.) [22] Apostolos Syropoulos.) [21] Will Robertson and Khaled Hosny. A [11] Vladimir Volovich. Available online from CTAN: //help/Catalogue/catalogue.bell-labs. Available online from CTAN://info/epslatex. ISBN 0-19-509685-1. (Type texdoc polyglossia on the command line. and METAPOST . Comes with the TEXLive distribution as fontspec.com/who/hobby/ [16] Alan Hoenig. (Type texdoc xgreek on the command line. Comes with the TEXLive distribution as arabxetex. Cyrillic A A languages support in L TEX. (Type texdoc fontspec on the command line.dtx. An ArabTEX-like interface for typesetting languages A in Arabic script with XEL TEX. containing some Java source files for generating arbitrary circles and ellipses within the picture environment. available from the same source your L TEX distribution came from. Werner Lemberg and L TEX3 Project Team.A Tutorial.142 BIBLIOGRAPHY A verbatim. TEX Unbound. TikZ&PGF Manual. which explains everything and much more than you ever wanted to know A about EPS files and their use in L TEX documents. Comes with the L TEX 2ε distribution as cyrguide.) [20] François Charette. 1998.html A [13] Keith Reckdahl. Rose. Oxford University Press.pdf.pdf A [19] François Charette. (Type texdoc arabxetex on the command line. Comes with the TEXLive distribution as xgreek.pdf. Both downloadable from http://www.ch [18] Till Tantau. A User’s Manual for METAPOST. Downloadable from CTAN Y with X -pic distribution Y [15] John D.pdf. Downloadable from http://cm. Polyglossia: A Babel Replacement for XEL TEX. 0-19-509686-X (pbk.) A [17] Urs Oswald.pdf. X -pic User’s Guide. [12] Graham Williams. Using EPS Graphics in L TEX 2ε Documents. Comes with the TEXLive distribution as polyglossia. The TeX Catalogue is a very complete listing of A many TEX and L TEX related packages. The fontspec package.ps [14] Kristoffer H.

pdf. 143 .pdf. (Type texdoc xepersian on the command line. [25] Wenchang Sun. (Type texdoc xecjk on the command line. [24] Vafa Khalighi. The xeCJK package. The bidi package.BIBLIOGRAPHY [23] Vafa Khalighi. Comes with the TEXLive distribution as xepersian-doc. (Type texdoc bidi on the command line. The XePersian package.pdf. Comes with the TEXLive distribution as xeCJK. Comes with the TEXLive distribution as bidi.

130 \\*. 55. 48 arrow symbols. 70. 68 \arraystretch.Index Symbols \!. 34 \Alpha. 53 amsbsy. 60. 40. 58 \appendix. 47. 71 amsfonts. 41 ansinew. . 11 å. 34 \asbuk. 62 \Alph. 11 A5 paper. 34 $.. space after. 34 "‘. 55 \\. 58 article class. 69 \@. 22 . 58 array. 33–36. 22 −. 25 abstract. 38 arabxetex. 39 \[. 58 \arcsin. 34 "<. 39 \addtolength. 96 A A4 paper. 69. 25 align. 116 \backmatter. 21 "’. 34 "-. 41. 41 . 3 æ. . 75 American Mathematical Society. 22 \-. 56. 38 \arccos. 53. 19. 67. 53 \. 72 \and. 58 \arctan. 24 Acrobat Reader. 54.. 34 ">. 22 —. 45. 69 ". 20. 79 amsmath. 69 -. 25 B B5 paper. 34 "---. 24 \:. 41 applemac. 70. 21 –. 45 accent. 34 \alph. 39 . 34 "=. 75 amsthm. 26 Arabic. 66. 11 babel. 10 \Asbuk. 71 amssymb. 91 acute. 54 ~. 59. 26 apostrophe. . 69 \. 58 \arg. 25. 131 A advantages of L TEX. 71. 34 \author. 19 \]. 44.. 68.

69 \@. 52 \cline. 71 \boldmath. 106. 100–102. 69 \. 68 \bmod. 58 bold face. 10 comma.INDEX backslash. 130 \\*. 51. 75 \bibitem. 55 \\. 5 \bar. 59 binomial coefficient. 55. 60 145 C calc. 102 bm. 130 binary relations. 57 \cdots. 59 blackboard bold. 54. 69 \. 89 . 47 color. 43. 58 \arcsin. 21 \:. 68 \cdot. 71 \boldsymbol. 52 cases. 71 Bmatrix. 105 \begin. 114 \Beta. 43. 60 \bigskip. 60 \big. 58 base font size. 57 bracketing. 131 \caption. 34 \author. 85 CJK package. 57 center. 10 brace horizontal. 131 \Alph. 60 \big(. 69 \-. 85 bicig. 28 Chinese.. 59 \binom. 41. 19. 85 \Big. 52 \clearpage. 58 \begin. 39 \[. 60 brazilian. 60 \big. 75 \bibitem. 66. 106. 39 \ci. 60 \bigg. 40. 96 \backmatter.. 41 \bar. 119 \circle. 54 \addtolength. 40 \chaptermark. 38 \Big. 114 \Beta. 56. 45. 71 book class. 31 \cleardoublepage. 34 \asbuk. 56 block. 44. 48 \Asbuk. 41 \arccos. 66 \Bigg. 109 \cite. 11 beamer. 19 \]. 100 coloured text. 47. 124 bold symbols. 68 bmatrix. 109 \circle*. 5 \!. 34 \alph. 34 \Alpha. 35 bidi. 58 \arraystretch. 75 \and. 85 bibliography. 58 \arctan. 24 commands. 41 \appendix. 58 \arg. 44 \chapter.

20 \idotsint. 57 \cdots. 58 \csc. 58 \cosh. 9. 67 \IEEEyessubnumber. 122 \iiiint. 106 \enumBul. 119 \circle. 70 \documentclass. 71 \caption. 58 \headheight. 69 \iiint. 109 \cite. 69 \iint. 58 \displaystyle. 134. 135 \det. 89 \ci. 15 \indent. 66 \IEEEyesnumber. 40 \chaptermark. 96. 20 \dq. 121. 58 \date. 98 \hspace. 95. 52 \cline. 130 \binom. 58 \depth. 67 \ifpdf. 121. 30 \frqq. 97. 52 \clearpage. 33. 34 \enumEng. 60 \bigg. 47 \hom. 113 \footnote. 52 \cdot. 129 \hyphenation. 58 \coth. 58 \boldmath. 34 \enumLat. 135 \hline. 134 \frenchspacing. 30 \foldera. 41 \ddots. 47 \cos. 30 \flqq. 57 \chapter. 34 \eqref. 58 \deg. 69 \include. 59 \framebox. 57 \DeclareMathOperator. 58 \hat. 60 \bigskip. 132 \headsep. 85 \cleardoublepage. 58 \cot. 42.146 \big(. 59 \bmod. 119 \emph. 58. 93. 39 \frontmatter. 134. 43. 51. 69 \IEEEeqnarraymulticol. 54 \exp. 30 \fussy. 14. 66 \dfrac. 58 \href. 126 \end. 113 \folderb. 129 \index. 122 \ignorespacesafterend. 43. 58 \input. 71 \boldsymbol. 132 \frac. 14. 109 \circle*. 132 \height. 67 \IEEEnonumber. 124. 87 \inf. 30 \dum. 65 \IEEEmulticol. 15 . 134 \includeonly. 59 \dim. 86. 97 \ignorespaces. 66 \Bigg. 21 \flq. 41 \frq. 52 \footskip. 84. 58 INDEX \fbox. 15 \includegraphics. 20 \gcd.

INDEX \int, 60, 66 \item, 43 \ker, 58 \label, 42, 51, 54 \LaTeX, 21 \LaTeXe, 21 \ldots, 24, 57 \left, 60, 66 \lefteqn, 63, 65 \leftmark, 87, 89 \lg, 58 \lim, 58 \liminf, 58 \limsup, 58 \line, 108, 113 \linebreak, 19 \linespread, 127 \linethickness, 110, 111, 113 \listoffigures, 51 \listoftables, 51 \ln, 58 \log, 58, 66 \mainmatter, 41, 96 \makebox, 134 \makeindex, 86 \maketitle, 41 \marginparpush, 132 \marginparsep, 132 \marginparwidth, 132 \mathbb, 56 \max, 58, 66 \mbox, 21, 24, 134 \min, 58 \multicolumn, 48 \multicolumns, 65 \multiput, 107, 110 \newcommand, 69, 120, 121 \newenvironment, 121 \newline, 19 \newpage, 19 \newsavebox, 112 \newtheorem, 71 \noindent, 129 \nolinebreak, 19 \nombre, 29 \nonumber, 66 \nopagebreak, 19 \not, 76 \oddsidemargin, 132 \oval, 111, 113 \overbrace, 57 \overleftarrow, 58 \overline, 57 \overrightarrow, 58 \pagebreak, 19 \pageref, 42, 90 \pagestyle, 13 \paperheight, 132 \paperwidth, 132 \par, 124 \paragraph, 40 \parbox, 134 \parindent, 128 \parskip, 128 \part, 40 \partial, 59 \phantom, 52, 70 \pmod, 58 \Pr, 58 \printindex, 87 \prod, 60 \protect, 52 \providecommand, 121 \ProvidesPackage, 123 \put, 107–112 \qbezier, 105, 107, 113 \qedhere, 73 \qquad, 55, 69 \quad, 55, 65, 69 \raisebox, 135 \ref, 42, 51, 90 \renewcommand, 120 \renewenvironment, 121 \right, 60, 66, 67 \right., 60 \rightmark, 87, 89 \rule, 49, 121, 135, 136 \savebox, 112

147

148 \scriptscriptstyle, 70 \scriptstyle, 70 \sec, 58 \section, 40, 52 \sectionmark, 89 \selectlanguage, 26 \setlength, 106, 128, 131 \settodepth, 133 \settoheight, 133 \settowidth, 133 \shorthandoff, 116 \sin, 58, 66 \sinh, 58 \slash, 22 \sloppy, 20 \smallskip, 130 \smash, 55 \sqrt, 57 \stackrel, 59 \stretch, 121, 129 \subparagraph, 40 \subsection, 40 \subsectionmark, 89 \substack, 60 \subsubsection, 40 \sum, 60, 66 \sup, 58 \tabcolsep, 48 \tableofcontents, 40 \tag, 54 \tan, 58 \tanh, 58 \TeX, 21 \texorpdfstring, 97 \textbackslash, 5 \textcelsius, 23 \textdegree, 23 \texteuro, 23 \textheight, 132 \textstyle, 70 \textwidth, 132 \tfrac, 59 \theoremstyle, 71 \thicklines, 108, 111, 113

INDEX \thinlines, 111, 113 \thispagestyle, 13 \title, 41 \tnss, 120 \today, 21 \topmargin, 132 \totalheight, 134, 135 \ud, 69 \underbrace, 57 \underline, 43, 57 \unitlength, 106, 108 \usebox, 112 \usepackage, 10, 13, 23, 25–27, 34, 123 \usetikzlibrary, 117 \vdots, 57 \vec, 58 \vector, 108 \verb, 46 \verbatiminput, 89 \vspace, 130 \widehat, 58 \widetilde, 58 \width, 134, 135 comment, 6 comments, 6 \cos, 58 \cosh, 58 \cot, 58 \coth, 58 cp1251, 26, 35 cp850, 26 cp866nav, 26 cross-references, 42 \csc, 58 curly braces, 5, 124 Cyrillic, 37

D
dash, 22 \date, 41 dcolumn, 48 \ddots, 57 decimal alignment, 48

INDEX \DeclareMathOperator, 58 \deg, 58 degree symbol, 22 delimiters, 60 \depth, 134, 135 description, 43 \det, 58, 66 Deutsch, 29 \dfrac, 59 diagonal dots, 57 \dim, 58 dimensions, 129 display style, 53, 55 displaymath, 54 \displaystyle, 70 doc, 12 document font size, 11 document title, 11 \documentclass, 9, 14, 20 dot, 57 dotless ı and , 25 dots, 57 three, 57 double line spacing, 127 double sided, 11 \dq, 30 \dum, 119 T2B, 27 T2C, 27 X2, 27 input ansinew, 26 applemac, 26 cp1251, 26, 35 cp850, 26 cp866nav, 26 koi8-ru, 26, 33 latin1, 26 macukr, 26 mn, 35 utf8, 26, 27, 35 \end, 43, 106 \enumBul, 34 \enumEng, 34 enumerate, 43 \enumLat, 34 environments Bmatrix, 68 IEEEeqnarray, 61, 62, 64 Vmatrix, 68 abstract, 45 align, 62 array, 67, 68 block, 102 bmatrix, 68 E cases, 68 eepic, 109 center, 44 ellipsis, 24 comment, 6 em-dash, 22 description, 43 \emph, 43, 124, 126 displaymath, 54 empty, 13 enumerate, 43 en-dash, 22 eqnarray, 62 Encapsulated PostScript, 83, 93, equation*, 54, 55, 61 139 equation, 54, 55, 61, 63 encodings figure, 50, 51 font flushleft, 44 LGR, 27 flushright, 44 OT1, 27 frame, 102 T1, 27, 33 itemize, 43 T2*, 33 lscommand, 119 matrix, 68 T2A, 27, 33

149

21 figure.tex. 89 verse. 14 . 115 verbatim.lot. 61 multline. 113 \folderb.idx. 51 file types. 56 exscale. 124 \scriptsize. 72 quotation. 124 \textsl. 12 . 61.150 minipage. 124 \texttt. 49 \flq. 62 equation. 53 A L TEX. 14. 125 \normalsize. 61 eurosym. 45 table. 124 \LARGE.log. 134 picture.aux. 55. 124 \textsc. 124 \textbf. 54. 86 . 55.lof. 14 . 61. 50. 124 \tiny. 109. 13 . 124 \textup. 134 thebibliography. 90 . 54. 134 multline*. 106. 110 pmatrix. 124 \Huge. 124 \large. 68 proof. 113 font. 14 . 51 tabular. 54 equation. 14. 84 . 54 multiple. 84 . 85 tikzpicture. 68 eqnarray. 14 . 124 \Large.toc. 14.dtx. 14 . 14 . 124 \textmd. 124 \small. 124 \textnormal.dvi. 11 \exp. 45 quote.sty. 62 \eqref. 45 vmatrix. 13 . 14 . 86 . 125 \mathrm. 44 flushright. 13 . 13 floating bodies.ins. 125 \mathtt. 44 \foldera. 46. 124 \mathbf. 50. 14 INDEX F fancyhdr. 23 executive paper. 123 \footnotesize. 124 \textrm. 125 \mathsf. 14 .eps. 124 \huge. 13. 58 exponent.fd. 46.ind. 12 extension. 54 amsmath. 124 font encoding. 30 flushleft. 63 parbox. 8. 124 \textit. 105. 63 equation*. 125 \mathcal. 125 \mathit.ilg. 125 \mathnormal. 87–89 \fbox. 30 \flqq. 124 \textsf.cls.

31 A Xp. 27 T2C. 59 fragile commands. 20 151 H A HL TEX. 58 horizontal brace. 58 geometry. 65 \IEEEmulticol. 97 ifthen. 27. 27. 67 \IEEEyessubnumber. 13 \headsep. 69 \iiint. 31 hL TE \hat. 33 T2A. 29 GhostScript. 27 font size. 27 X2. 93. 121. 26. 124 . 27. 69 \iint. 124 hyperref. 132 \frac. 25 Greek. 94. 69 IEEEeqnarray. 129 \href. 132 textttheadings. 13 \headheight. 98. 32. 99 footer. 42.INDEX font encodings. 9. 30 \fussy. 57 dots. 52 frame. 123. 33 T2*. 36. 27 LGR. 33 fontspec. 67 \IEEEnonumber. 30 \frqq. 61. 37 Greek letters. 52 \footnotesize. 10. 38. 122 \ignorespacesafterend. 12. 58 header. 89 German. 22 hyphenat. 41 \frq. 62. 83. 57 line. 97 \ifpdf. 132 Hebrew. 134. 102 \framebox. 66 IEEEtrantools. 38 \height. 97. 135 \hline. 98 \hspace. 69 G \gcd. 89 \hyphenation. 47 \hom. 28 frenchb. 129 \Huge. 33 T2B. 100 grave. 122 \iiiint. 83. 90 hyphen. 29 \frenchspacing. 59 fraction. 83 graphicx. 91. 124 \footskip. 64 \IEEEyesnumber. 64 \IEEEeqnarraymulticol. 20 I \idotsint. 139 graphics. 139 GhostView. 67 ifpdf. 139 Gimp. 27 OT1. 134 French. 57 space. 13 \footnote. 95. 12 \ignorespaces. 27 T1. 96. 56 grouping. 121. 33. 124 fontenc. 124 \huge. 39 \frontmatter. 93. 100 hypertext.

152 \include. 25 \LARGE. 19 line spacing. 38 K kashida. 26 cp866nav. 60. 134 \includeonly. 26. Donald E. 127 \linethickness. 124 \LaTeX. 26 applemac. 26 mn. 15 input encodings ansinew. 7 inputenc. 108. 58 line horizontal. 57 \line. 66 left aligned. 26 cp1251. 27. 26. 58 \log. 39 Jawi. 26. 35 cp850. 42. 35 utf8. 24 \lim. 66 long equations. 58 \limsup. 58 Knuth. 33 \int. 21 latexsym. 60. 39 Korean font UHC font. 113 \listoffigures. 25 italic. 89 legal paper. 93. 127 \linebreak. 51 \ln.. 87. 54 Lamport. 12 latin1. 31 Korean input files. 129 index. 111. 48 lscommand. 26 koi8-ru. 132 \ldots. 15 \indent. 27 ligature. 44 \lefteqn. 43 INDEX L \label. 63. 11 letter paper. 131 layouts. 24. 119 J Japanese. 84. 86. 30. 110. 58 \input. 11 \lg. 129 indentfirst. 26 layout. 38 \ker. 26. 87 \inf. 12. 15 \includegraphics. 26 macukr. 57 \left. 124 \item. 58 LGR. 113 line break. 43 itemize. 124 \Large. 30 Kurdish. 86 \index. 33 Korean. 35 input file. 58. 14. 66 integral operator. 97. 38 Kashmiri. 51 \listoftables. 51. 60 international. 124 \large. 1 koi8-ru. Leslie. 27. 2 language. 38 . 33 latin1. 19 \linespread. 65 \leftmark. 4 \LaTeXe. 26. 21 A L TEX3. 58 \liminf. 61 longtable.

125 \mathnormal. 48 \multicolumns. 93 mhchem. 124 \not. 138 \min. 70 microtype. 86 makeidx package. 66 \mbox. 57 delimiter. 129 \nolinebreak. 58 minus. 22 mathematics. 10 minipage. 138 macukr. 86 makeindex program. 27 Ottoman. 132 œ. 58 \multicolumn. 134 N \newcommand. 22 Mittelbach. 19 \newpage. 86 \makeindex. 125 \mathcal. 63 multline*.INDEX 153 minus sign. 131 math mode. 10. 29 O \oddsidemargin. 26 \mainmatter. 72 numprint. 19 \newsavebox. 7. 25 one column. 120. 125 \mathrm. 111. 41 Malay. 20 \overleftarrow. 110 multline. 58. 35 modulo function. 125 mathematical accents. 12. 121 \newline. 61 M MacTeX. 19 \normalsize. 125 matrix. 58 P package. 55 math spacing. 65 \multiput. 69 \mathbb. 9 optional parameters. 29 \nonumber. 57 \overrightarrow. 69. 76 ntheorem. 41. 61. 57 overfull hbox. 33 \mathtt. 5 OT1. 132 \marginparwidth. 132 \marginparsep. 125 mathtext. 121 \newenvironment. 68 \max. 24. 96 \makebox. 100 MiKTEX. 68 matrix. 60 functions. 132 margins. 71 \noindent. 113 \overbrace. 58 \overline. 107. 53 \mathit. 79 \mathsf. 21. 19 \nombre. 112 \newtheorem. 66 \nopagebreak. 38 \oval. 58 minimal class. 86 \maketitle. 56 \mathbf. 119 packages . 38 \marginparpush. 125 mathrsfs. 2 mn. Frank. 134 METAPOST. 134 makeidx. 11 option.

38. 134 layouts. 37 exscale. 105. 115. 70 Pashto. 12 xeCJK. 100 A pdf. 38 pstricks. 68. 98 microtype. 29 pdfL TEX. 36. 100 arabxetex. 86 \part. 89 dcolumn. 93. 33 partial derivative. 26. 12 paragraph. 70. 12. 59 mhchem. 98. 100 \pageref. 29 plain. 23 xgreek. 12 page layout. 109 babel. 79 \partial. 53. 131 txfonts. 116 calc. 56. 87 bicig. 36–38 amssymb. 71. 12. 132 IEEEtrantools. 12. 128 longtable. 33 parameter. 109 xepersian. 38 eurosym. 93 color. 27. 40 mathrsfs. 132 ifpdf. 72 pdf. 100 verbatim. 90. \pagestyle. 90 hyperref. 97 \par. 131 100 hyphenat. 134 layout. 70. 12 \parbox. 71 tikz. 79 pgfplot. 15 bidi. 17 \paragraph. 25. 118 amsmath. 19 graphicx. 87–89 page style. 131 parbox. 33 empty. 89 \pagebreak. 115. 42. 115 amsfonts. 116 pxfonts. 13 frenchb. 99 headings. 100 ntheorem. 118 pdfL TEX. 5 latexsym. 40 indentfirst. 59 mathtext. 132 \parindent. 71 polyglossia. 97. 35 syntonly. 129 inputenc. 93. 64 \paperwidth. 48 makeidx. 69. 12. 118 A numprint. 91 INDEX . 59. 128 \parskip. 48 xalx.154 amsbsy. 91. 105. 131 fancyhdr. 6. 105 showidx. 71 pgf. 13 paper size. 39 eepic. 13 fontenc. 38 PDF. 38 textcomp. 13 geometry. 124 ifthen. 13 fontspec. 23 bm. 89 \paperheight. 11. 20. 91. 33–36. 75 ppower4. 100–102. 60. 92. 83. 100 amsthm. 93 beamer. 27. 72 prosper. 115. 94. 34 doc.

121 pgf. 124 \qbezier. 51. 69 slides class. 124 pmatrix. 133 proof. 70 \right. 38 \put. 58. 109. 52 \shorthandoff. 60 \setlength. 113 Slash. 135. 58 Russian. 137. 21 Small Caps. 58 Q slanted. 40. 87 \sectionmark. 10 \selectlanguage. sans serif. 22 \qedhere. 60 \settodepth. 139 \scriptscriptstyle. 109 Sindhi. 83. 106. 55. 27 S Portuguese. 9. 60 placement specifier. 135 PDFView. 36–38 Português. 105. 131 product operator. 110 right-aligned. 45 \small. 100. 106. 130 155 . 92. 128. 70 preamble. 65. 106. 93. 112 97. 83. 70 ppower4. 38 \renewenvironment. 89 proc class. 138 \ref. 22 \qquad. 45 \smallskip. 121. 66. 72 \settoheight. 124 \Pr. 107. 67 \right. 100 \settowidth. 49. 124 quotation marks. 73 \slash. 10 \quad. 69 \sloppy. 120 Persian. 93 \sinh. 133 \protect.. 50 \rightmark. 100 \scriptsize. 55. 90 period. 118 reserved characters. 115 report class. 20 quotation. 42. 140 Scandinavian letters. 107–112 single sided. 121 showidx. 133 prosper. 58 \section. 10 pgfplot. 7 \sec. 87. 89 plain. 11 pxfonts. 66 pstricks. 68 \rule. 13 roman. 136 \pmod. 84. 105. 124 quote. 27 PostScript. 44 piecewise function. 5 \phantom. 87 \ProvidesPackage. 58 prime. 58 \scriptstyle. 116 \providecommand. 31. 67 picture. 60.INDEX pdfTEX. 124 \savebox. 123 \sin. 52. 26 \prod. 105. 52 \printindex. 25 Encapsulated. 52. 91 R \raisebox. 24 \renewcommand. 3. 37 polyglossia.

41 \tnss. 115. 105. 60 \subsubsection. 59 thebibliography. 7 strut. 33 T2*. 38 two column. 121. 132 \tfrac. 116 tikzpicture. 134 \tag. 27. 38 umlaut. 60. 58 \tanh. 57 \stackrel. 23 textcomp. 46 table. 60 \sup. 22. 53. 50. 132 \textit. 135 Turkish. 111. 41 \title. 40 tabular. 124 title. 24 \sqrt. 120 \today. 23 \textheight. 85 \theoremstyle. 124 \textcelsius. 48 table. 27. 33 T2A. 124 \textrm. 71 \thicklines. 57 square brackets. 57 tilde ( ~). 12. 57 underfull hbox. 124 \textmd. 11 txfonts. 56 syntonly. 54 \tan. 139 \texorpdfstring.156 \smash. 129 structure. 115 tilde. 108. 4 spacing math mode. 111. 5 square root. 124 \textwidth. 134. 40 \sum. 124 \textstyle. 55 special character. 5 U \ud. 66 sum operator. 27 \tabcolsep. 124 \textnormal. 21 \topmargin. 20 . 25 \underbrace. 124 \textsc. 124 \textsf. 40 \subsectionmark. 58 \TeX. 56 \subsection. 70 \texttt. 49 \subparagraph. 15 \textbf. 51 table of contents. 40 \tableofcontents. 27 T2C. 59 \stretch. 21 TeXnicCenter. 11. 113 \thispagestyle. 39 \tiny. 55 \textbackslash. 89 \substack. 93 INDEX T T1. 132 \totalheight. 124 \textsl. 23 \texteuro. 124 \textup. 97 text style. 58 superscript. 55 space. 113 \thinlines. 46. 69 Uighur. 33 T2B. 23 \textdegree. 13 tikz. 40 subscript.

98 xepersian. 108 vectors. 45 vertical dots. 98 \unitlength. 22 \usebox. 10. 35 157 V \vdots. 57 \vec. 46 verbatim. 124 Urdu. 68 \vspace. 130 W whitespace. 26. 37 units. 123 \usetikzlibrary. 91 upright. 112 \usepackage. 34. 6. 130 Vmatrix. 4 after commands. 38 . 89 verbatim. 58 \widetilde. 89 \verbatiminput. 58 \vector. 130 Xpdf. 27 xalx. 89 verse. 57 XETEX. 106. 34 xeCJK. 4 \widehat. 23. 39 A XEL TEX. 13. 25–27. 27. 134. 129. 57 vertical space. 68 vmatrix. 108 xgreek. 38 URL link.INDEX \underline. 58 \verb. 3 X X2. 117 utf8. 5 at the start of a line. 58 \width. 135 Word. 43. 46. 2. 87 WYSIWYG.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful